Tibbo Hardware Manual

Tibbo Programmable Hardware Manual
Copyright Tibbo Technology 2000-2016
Programmable Hardware Manual (PHM)
Table of Contents
Introduction
Legal Information
Embedded Modules
Module Comparison
...................................................................................................................................
Table
3
EM1000 BASIC/C-programmable
...................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Module
13
EM1000-00 and -01
............................................................................................................................................................... 15
I/O Pin Assignm ent and Pin
...............................................................................................................................................................
Functions
16
General-purpose I/O Lines ............................................................................................................................................................ 20
Wireless Add-on Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 21
Ethernet Port Lines
............................................................................................................................................................ 22
Serial Ports
............................................................................................................................................................ 24
Square Wave Generator
............................................................................................................................................................ 24
Flash and EEPROM Memory ............................................................................................................................................................ 25
Real-time Counter
............................................................................................................................................................ 25
LED Lines
............................................................................................................................................................ 26
Pow er, Reset, PLL Control, and
............................................................................................................................................................
Mode Selection Lines
27
Mechanical Dim ensions ............................................................................................................................................................... 28
Ordering Info and Specifications
............................................................................................................................................................... 30
...................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Module
32
...............................................................................................................................................................
Functions
34
Ethernet Port Lines
............................................................................................................................................................ 38
Serial Ports
............................................................................................................................................................ 39
............................................................................................................................................................ 39
Real-time Counter
............................................................................................................................................................ 39
LED Lines
............................................................................................................................................................ 40
Pow er, Reset, and Mode Selection
............................................................................................................................................................
Lines
41
Onboard LEDs
............................................................................................................................................................... 42
Therm al considerations ............................................................................................................................................................... 43
............................................................................................................................................................... 45
EM500 "MiniMo"
...................................................................................................................................
BASIC/C-programmable Ethernet Module
47
...............................................................................................................................................................
Functions
49
Serial Port and General-purpose
............................................................................................................................................................
I/O Lines
50
Ethernet Port Lines
............................................................................................................................................................ 51
LED Lines
............................................................................................................................................................ 53
............................................................................................................................................................
Lines
54
............................................................................................................................................................... 56
...................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Module
57
...............................................................................................................................................................
Function
59
Ethernet Port Lines
............................................................................................................................................................ 62
Serial Ports
............................................................................................................................................................ 63
............................................................................................................................................................ 63
LED Lines
............................................................................................................................................................ 64
............................................................................................................................................................
Lines
64
2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.
Contents
II

............................................................................................................................................................... 66
EM200
................................................................................................................................... 68

...............................................................................................................................................................
Functions
70
Ethernet Port Lines
............................................................................................................................................................ 71
Serial Port and General-purpose
............................................................................................................................................................
I/O Lines
73
LED Lines
............................................................................................................................................................ 73
............................................................................................................................................................
Lines
74
............................................................................................................................................................... 76
Boards
77
...................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Board
77
...............................................................................................................................................................
Functions
80
Wireless Add-on Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 84
Ethernet Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 85
Serial Ports
............................................................................................................................................................ 85
............................................................................................................................................................ 85
Real-time Counter and Backup
............................................................................................................................................................
Supercap
86
LEDs and LED Lines
............................................................................................................................................................ 86
Pow er, Reset, PLL Control, MD
............................................................................................................................................................
Button, and Mode Lines
87
............................................................................................................................................................... 89
NB10x0 and IB100x

...................................................................................................................................
Boards
91
NB10x0 Netw ork Boards ............................................................................................................................................................... 92
NB1000 Board
............................................................................................................................................................ 93
NB1000 Connectors and Controls
.......................................................................................................................................................... 94
Pow er Jack, Terminals and Pow
.......................................................................................................................................................
er Regulator
94
Ethernet Jack
....................................................................................................................................................... 95
Jumpers, Buttons and LEDs ....................................................................................................................................................... 95
External LED Control
....................................................................................................................................................... 96
Buzzer
....................................................................................................................................................... 97
.......................................................................................................................................................... 97
NB1010 Board
............................................................................................................................................................ 98
.......................................................................................................................................................... 99
Pow er Jack, Terminals and Pow
.......................................................................................................................................................
er Regulator
99
Ethernet Jack
....................................................................................................................................................... 100
Jumpers, Buttons and LEDs....................................................................................................................................................... 100
....................................................................................................................................................... 101
Buzzer
....................................................................................................................................................... 103
Optional Wi-Fi Interface
....................................................................................................................................................... 103
Optinal GPRS Interface
....................................................................................................................................................... 103
............................................................................................................................................................ 104
IB100x Interface Boards ............................................................................................................................................................... 105
IB1000, IB1002, and IB1003............................................................................................................................................................
(4 Serial Ports)
105
Connectors and Headers .......................................................................................................................................................... 106
Serial Ports
.......................................................................................................................................................... 108
LED Control
.......................................................................................................................................................... 110
.......................................................................................................................................................... 110
IB1004 and SB1004 (Analog
............................................................................................................................................................
I/O)
111
Terminal blocks
.......................................................................................................................................................... 112
Control Lines
.......................................................................................................................................................... 114
Detailed Information
.......................................................................................................................................................... 116
A/D Converter
....................................................................................................................................................... 117
III
D/A Converter
....................................................................................................................................................... 122
Relays
....................................................................................................................................................... 124
RS232/485 Port
....................................................................................................................................................... 125
LED Control
....................................................................................................................................................... 126
.......................................................................................................................................................... 127
IB1005 and SB1005 (Digital............................................................................................................................................................
I/O)
127
Terminal Blocks
.......................................................................................................................................................... 128
Control Lines
.......................................................................................................................................................... 130
.......................................................................................................................................................... 132
Opto-isolated Inputs
....................................................................................................................................................... 133
Relays
....................................................................................................................................................... 135
RS232/485 Port
....................................................................................................................................................... 136
LED Control
....................................................................................................................................................... 137
.......................................................................................................................................................... 137
LB100x LED Boards
............................................................................................................................................................... 138
LB1000
............................................................................................................................................................ 138
LB1001
............................................................................................................................................................ 139
Cable data
............................................................................................................................................................... 140
IC1000 Interboard Cable ............................................................................................................................................................ 140
LC1000 LED Board Cable ............................................................................................................................................................ 141
Mechanical data
............................................................................................................................................................... 141
NB10x0 and IB100x Board Dimensions
............................................................................................................................................................ 142
SB100x Board Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................................ 143
LB100x Board Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................................ 145
DS1206N
................................................................................................................................... 147
DS1206N Hardw are

............................................................................................................................................................... 149
Pow er Arrangement
............................................................................................................................................................ 150
Ethernet Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 151
Multi-channel Serial Port ............................................................................................................................................................ 152
Flash and EEPROM Memory............................................................................................................................................................ 154
Mechanical Dim ensions............................................................................................................................................................... 154
............................................................................................................................................................... 155
EM1202EV
................................................................................................................................... 157
EM1202EV Hardw are

............................................................................................................................................................... 159
Pow er Arrangement
............................................................................................................................................................ 160
Ethernet Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 160
Multi-channel Serial Port ............................................................................................................................................................ 161
Additional Information on Serial
..........................................................................................................................................................
Port Lines
163
............................................................................................................................................................... 166
EM1206EV
................................................................................................................................... 167
Wireless Add-on Connector

............................................................................................................................................................... 168
Main and Backup Pow er............................................................................................................................................................... 169
Multi-channel RS232 Port
...............................................................................................................................................................
and Expansion Connector
170
EM120/EM200-EV
................................................................................................................................... 173
Pow er Jack
............................................................................................................................................................... 173
Ethernet Port Pin Assignm
...............................................................................................................................................................
ent
174
RS232 Port Pin Assignm...............................................................................................................................................................
ent
174
Expansion Connector Pin
...............................................................................................................................................................
Assignm ent
175
Development Systems
176
EM1000EV
................................................................................................................................... 176
EM1000TEV
................................................................................................................................... 177
TEV-MB0
TEV-KB0
............................................................................................................................................................... 178
............................................................................................................................................................... 178
Contents
TEV-LBx Boards
TEV-LB0
TEV-LB1
TEV-LB2
TEV-IBx Boards
TEV-IB0
TEV-IB1
Ordering Info
EM500EV
EM500EV-MB0
EM500EV-IB0
EM500EV-IB1
Ordering Info
IV
............................................................................................................................................................... 180
............................................................................................................................................................ 182
............................................................................................................................................................ 184
............................................................................................................................................................ 185
............................................................................................................................................................... 187
............................................................................................................................................................ 188
............................................................................................................................................................ 189
............................................................................................................................................................... 191
................................................................................................................................... 192
............................................................................................................................................................... 193
............................................................................................................................................................... 194
............................................................................................................................................................... 195
............................................................................................................................................................... 196
Tibbo Project System (TPS)
197
The TPS: General

...................................................................................................................................
View
198
Tibbits
................................................................................................................................... 199
Tibbit Form Factors & Colors

............................................................................................................................................................... 199
M1 "Narrow " Tibbits
............................................................................................................................................................ 200
M2 "Wide" Tibbits
............................................................................................................................................................ 202
C1 "Narrow " Tibbits
............................................................................................................................................................ 204
C2 "Wide" Tibbits
............................................................................................................................................................ 205
H1 "Hybrid" Tibbits
............................................................................................................................................................ 207
H2 "Hybrid" Tibbits
............................................................................................................................................................ 208
Tibbit Pow er Lines
............................................................................................................................................................... 209
Tibbit Sockets and Tiles............................................................................................................................................................... 210
Electrical Connections on
...............................................................................................................................................................
a Tile
212
Tibbits w ith "Special Needs"
............................................................................................................................................................... 213
[SER] Tibbits That Require UART
............................................................................................................................................................
Functionality
213
[INT] Tibbits That Require an............................................................................................................................................................
Interrupt Line
214
[POE] Tibbits That Require PoE
............................................................................................................................................................
Pow er Lines
215
[CAN] Tibbits That Require CAN
............................................................................................................................................................
functionality
215
[AUD] Tibbits That Require Audio
............................................................................................................................................................
Functionality
216
[MMC] Tibbits That Require MMC
............................................................................................................................................................
(SD) Functionality
216
Com bining "C" and "M" ...............................................................................................................................................................
Tibbits
216
C1 + M1
............................................................................................................................................................ 216
C2 + M2
............................................................................................................................................................ 218
C2 + Tw o M1s
............................................................................................................................................................ 218
Tw o C1s + M2
............................................................................................................................................................ 219
Tibbit LEDs and Their Colors
............................................................................................................................................................... 220
Labeling
............................................................................................................................................................... 221
Available Tibbits
............................................................................................................................................................... 222
#00-1, M1S: Four Direct I/O............................................................................................................................................................
Lines
223
#00-2, M1S: Three Direct I/O
............................................................................................................................................................
Lines and Ground
224
#00-3, M1S: Tw o Direct I/O............................................................................................................................................................
Lines, +5V Pow er, Ground
225
#01, M1S: Four-line RS232 ............................................................................................................................................................
Port
227
#02, M2S: RS232/422/485 Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 228
#03-1, M1S: Tw o Low -pow............................................................................................................................................................
er Relays (Configuration 1)
230
#03-2, M1S: Tw o Low -pow............................................................................................................................................................
er Relays (Configuration 2)
231
#04-1, M1S: Tw o Isolated Inputs
............................................................................................................................................................ 232
#04-2, M1S: Three Isolated ............................................................................................................................................................
Inputs, Common (-)
233
#04-3, M1S: Three Isolated ............................................................................................................................................................
Inputs, Common (+)
234
#04-4, M1S: Four Opto-inputs,
............................................................................................................................................................
Common Ground
235
#05, M1S: RS485 Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 236
#06, M2T: Tw o High-pow er............................................................................................................................................................
Relays
237
#07, M1S: Tw o Solid State Relays
............................................................................................................................................................ 239
#08, M1S: Wiegand and Clock/Data
............................................................................................................................................................
Reader Port
240
#09, M1S: Low -pow er 5V Supply,

............................................................................................................................................................
12V Input
241
#10, M1T: Medium-pow er 5V
............................................................................................................................................................
Supply, 12 V Input
242
#11, M1S: Four Open Collector
............................................................................................................................................................
Outputs
243
#12, M1S: Low -pow er +15/-15V
............................................................................................................................................................
Pow er Supply, 5V Input
245
#13, M1S: Four-channel ADC
............................................................................................................................................................ 246
#14, M1S: Four-channel DAC
............................................................................................................................................................ 247
#15, H1: High-voltage AC Solid
............................................................................................................................................................
State Relay
248
#16, M1S: Three PWMs With
............................................................................................................................................................
OC Outputs
250
#17, M1S: Three PWMs With
............................................................................................................................................................
Pow er Outputs
251
#18, C1: Pow er Input
............................................................................................................................................................ 253
#19, C2: DB9M Connector ............................................................................................................................................................ 254
#20, C2: Nine Terminal Blocks
............................................................................................................................................................ 254
#21, C1: Four Terminal Blocks
............................................................................................................................................................ 255
#23, M2T: Isolated PoE Pow............................................................................................................................................................
er Supply, 5V Output
256
#24, M1S: Thermocouple Temperature
............................................................................................................................................................
Meter
258
#25: M2S: High-pow er 5V Supply,
............................................................................................................................................................
12/24/48V Input
259
#26, M1S: IR Command Processor
............................................................................................................................................................ 261
Theory of Operation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Resetting and Initializing the..........................................................................................................................................................
Onboard FPGA
264
SPI Read and Write Transactions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 265
Registers
.......................................................................................................................................................... 266
Command Register
....................................................................................................................................................... 266
Status Register
....................................................................................................................................................... 267
TX Length Registers
....................................................................................................................................................... 267
RX Length Registers
....................................................................................................................................................... 267
Carrier Divider Registers ....................................................................................................................................................... 267
TX and RX Data Buffers ....................................................................................................................................................... 268
Examples of Wiring to IR Receivers
..........................................................................................................................................................
& Emitters
268
#28, C1: Ambient Light Sensor
............................................................................................................................................................ 269
#29, C1: Ambient Temperature
............................................................................................................................................................
Meter
270
#30, C1: Ambient Humidity/Temperature
............................................................................................................................................................
Meter
271
#31, C1: PIC Coprocessor ............................................................................................................................................................ 272
#35, C1: Barometric Pressure
............................................................................................................................................................
Sensor
274
#36, C1: 3-axis Accelerometer
............................................................................................................................................................ 275
#37, C1: RF Connector
............................................................................................................................................................ 276
#38: C1: Pushbutton
............................................................................................................................................................ 277
#39-1~4, C1: Large LED (Four
............................................................................................................................................................
Colors Available)
277
#40-1~4, M1S: Digital Potentiometer
............................................................................................................................................................
(Four Nominals)
278
#41, C1: 8-bit Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 279
#42, M1S: RTC and NVRAM............................................................................................................................................................
With Backup
280
#47, H2: GPRS Modem
............................................................................................................................................................ 282
#48, H2: Audio In/Out
............................................................................................................................................................ 284
#49, C2: SD Card Socket ............................................................................................................................................................ 284
#57, M1S: FPGA Tibbit
............................................................................................................................................................ 284
Resetting and Initializing the..........................................................................................................................................................
Onboard FPGA
286
Implemented Configurations.......................................................................................................................................................... 287
Smart LED Controller Configuration
....................................................................................................................................................... 287
Tibbo Project...................................................................................................................................
PCBs (TPPs)
289
Available TPP Models ............................................................................................................................................................... 289
Size 2 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP2),
............................................................................................................................................................
Gen 2
290
Tiles, Sockets, Connectors,..........................................................................................................................................................
Controls
293
Size 3 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP3),
............................................................................................................................................................
Gen 2
294
Controls
297
Size 2 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP2)
............................................................................................................................................................ 298
Controls
301
Size 3 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP3)
............................................................................................................................................................ 302
Controls
304
Size 3 Linux Tibbo Project PCB
............................................................................................................................................................
(LTPP3)
305
Contents
VI

Controls
308
Common Information
............................................................................................................................................................ 309
Pow er Arrangement
.......................................................................................................................................................... 309
Ethernet Port
.......................................................................................................................................................... 309
MD and RST Buttons
.......................................................................................................................................................... 310
LEDs
.......................................................................................................................................................... 310
Buzzer
.......................................................................................................................................................... 312
LCD Display Connector (TPP2
..........................................................................................................................................................
only)
312
Keypad Connector (TPP2 only)
.......................................................................................................................................................... 312
Optional Wi-Fi Interface .......................................................................................................................................................... 313
Tibbo Project...................................................................................................................................
Box (TPB) Kits
314
TPB Structure
............................................................................................................................................................... 315
Available Tibbo Project Box
...............................................................................................................................................................
Kits
316
Size 2 Tibbo Project Box (TPB2)
............................................................................................................................................................ 316
TPB2 Parts and Accessories
.......................................................................................................................................................... 317
Size 2 Vibration Protection ..........................................................................................................................................................
Kit (VPK)
318
Mechanical Dimensions .......................................................................................................................................................... 319
Size 2 Project Box With LCD/Keys
............................................................................................................................................................
(TPB2L)
319
TPB2L Parts and Accessories
.......................................................................................................................................................... 320
Kit (VPK)
321
Size 3 Tibbo Project Box (TPB3)
............................................................................................................................................................ 322
.......................................................................................................................................................... 323
Kit (VPK)
324
Retail Packaging
................................................................................................................................... 326
TPB2/TPS2 Retail Packaging
...............................................................................................................................................................
Kit
327
TPB2L/TPS2L Retail Packaging
...............................................................................................................................................................
Kit
328
TPB3/TPS3 Retail Packaging
...............................................................................................................................................................
Kit
329
Assem bled Retail Package
............................................................................................................................................................... 330
Ordering Info ................................................................................................................................... 330
External Controllers
DS110x
330
................................................................................................................................... 331
DS110x Connectors and...............................................................................................................................................................

Controls
333
Pow er Arrangement
............................................................................................................................................................ 334
DS1100
.......................................................................................................................................................... 334
DS1101
.......................................................................................................................................................... 335
DS1102
.......................................................................................................................................................... 336
Ethernet Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 336
Serial Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 337
DS1100
.......................................................................................................................................................... 337
DS1101
.......................................................................................................................................................... 337
DS1102
.......................................................................................................................................................... 339
Mapping Options for the RS232
.......................................................................................................................................................
Mode
341
.......................................................................................................................................................
Mode
341
.......................................................................................................................................................
Mode
342
Buzzer (DS1101 and DS1102)
............................................................................................................................................................ 342
Optional Wi-Fi (DS1101 and............................................................................................................................................................
DS1102)
342
Optional OLED Display (DS1101
............................................................................................................................................................
and DS1102)
343
LED Bar (DS1101 and DS1102)
............................................................................................................................................................ 344
DIN Rail and Wall Mounting Plates
............................................................................................................................................................ 345
............................................................................................................................................................... 346
DS1206
................................................................................................................................... 348
DS1206 Connectors and...............................................................................................................................................................

Controls
350
VII
Pow er Arrangement
............................................................................................................................................................ 351
Ethernet Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 352
Multi-channel RS232 Port ............................................................................................................................................................ 353
............................................................................................................................................................... 354
DS1202
................................................................................................................................... 355
DS1202 Connectors and...............................................................................................................................................................

Controls
357
Pow er Arrangement
............................................................................................................................................................ 358
Ethernet Port
............................................................................................................................................................ 358
Multi-Channel RS232 Port ............................................................................................................................................................ 358
............................................................................................................................................................... 360
DS10xx
................................................................................................................................... 361
Com m on Features of the

...............................................................................................................................................................
DS10xx Fam ily
362
Secondary Cover
............................................................................................................................................................ 362
DIN Rail Mounting
............................................................................................................................................................ 364
DS10x0, DS10x2, DS10x3 ...............................................................................................................................................................
(4 Serial Ports)
364
............................................................................................................................................................ 365
DS10x4 (Analog I/O)
............................................................................................................................................................... 367
............................................................................................................................................................ 368
DS10x5 (Digital I/O)
............................................................................................................................................................... 369
............................................................................................................................................................ 370
Companion Products
GA1000
371
................................................................................................................................... 371
I/O Pin Assignm ent and...............................................................................................................................................................

Pin Functions
372
Connecting GA1000 to Tibbo
...............................................................................................................................................................
Devices
373
Status LED
............................................................................................................................................................... 374
............................................................................................................................................................... 376
RJ203 Jack/Magnetics
...................................................................................................................................
Module
377
Interface Pads
............................................................................................................................................................... 377
Interfacing the RJ203 to...............................................................................................................................................................
the DM9000B
378
Using the RJ203 With the...............................................................................................................................................................
EM203 and Other Modules
379
Mechanical Dim ensions:
...............................................................................................................................................................
RJ203
380
...............................................................................................................................................................
RJ203+EM203
381
...............................................................................................................................................................
RJ203+EM1206
382
............................................................................................................................................................... 383
Accessories
384
WAS-P0004(B)...................................................................................................................................
DS-to-Device Serial Cable
384
WAS-P0005(B)...................................................................................................................................
DS-to-PC Serial Cable
384
WAS-1499 'Straight'
...................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Cable
385
WAS-1498 'Crossover'
...................................................................................................................................
Ethernet Cable
385
12VDC Power...................................................................................................................................
Adaptors
385
TB100 Terminal
...................................................................................................................................
Block Adaptor
385
TB1000 Terminal
...................................................................................................................................
Block Adaptor
387
TB1004 Test Board
................................................................................................................................... 388
TB1005 Test Board
................................................................................................................................... 390
Appendix 1: Status LEDs
391
Contents
VIII
Appendix 2: Setup (MD) Button

(Line)
393
Update history
393
Introduction
Last update: 07SEP2016
Legal Information
Manual Update History
This Manual has the following sections:

Embedded Modules
Boards
Development Systems
Companion Products
Kits and Accessories
Important notes:
This manual should be used in conjunction with a "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual"
-- a separate manual that documents Tibbo BASIC, TIDE software, hardware
"platforms", and everything else required for successful development of Tibbo
BASIC applications.
This manual does not include any information on fixed-function, non-programmable
Tibbo devices, such as the original EM100 module or the DS100 serial device
server. The data on these devices can be found in the "Serial-over-IP Solutions
Manual" -- a separate document.
Some Tibbo devices are dual-use in nature. Depending on the loaded firmware,
any dual-use product can be a fixed-function, serial-over-IP device, or a BASICprogrammable controller. Dual-use devices are documented in the present manual
as well as the "Serial-over-IP Solutions Manual". The present manual describes
each such device as a BASIC-programmable one, while the "Serial-over-IP
Solutions Manual" describes the same device as a serial device server.
Legal Information
Tibbo Technology ("TIBBO") is a Taiwan corporation that designs and/or
manufactures a number of hardware products, software products, and applications
("PRODUCTS"). In many cases, Tibbo PRODUCTS are combined with each other and/
or third-party products thus creating a PRODUCT COMBINATION.
Whereas you (your Company) wish to purchase any PRODUCT from TIBBO, and/or
whereas you (your Company) wish to make use of any documentation or technical
information published by TIBBO, and/or make use of any source code published by
TIBBO, and/or consult TIBBO and receive technical support from TIBBO or any of its
employees acting in an official or unofficial capacity,
You must acknowledge and accept the following disclaimers:
1. Tibbo does not have any branch office, affiliated company, or any other form of
presence in any other jurisdiction. TIBBO customers, partners and distributors in
Taiwan and other countries are independent commercial entities and TIBBO does not
indemnify such customers, partners or distributors in any legal proceedings related
to, nor accepts any liability for damages resulting from the creation, manufacture,
Legal Information
importation, advertisement, resale, or use of any of its PRODUCT or PRODUCT

COMBINATION.
2. BASIC/C-programmable devices ("PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES") manufactured by
TIBBO can run a variety of applications written in Tibbo BASIC, Tibbo C, or a
combination of the two ("BASIC APPLICATIONS"). Combining a particular
PROGRAMMABLE DEVICE with a specific BASIC and/or C APPLICATION, either written
by TIBBO or any third party, may potentially create a combinatorial end product
("END PRODUCT") that violates local rules, regulations, and/or infringes an existing
patent granted in a country where such combination has occurred or where the
resulting END PRODUCT is manufactured, exported, advertised, or sold. TIBBO is not
capable of monitoring any activities by its customers, partners or distributors aimed
at creating any END PRODUCT, does not provide advice on potential legal issues
arising from creating such END PRODUCTs, nor explicitly recommends the use of any
of its PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES in combination with any BASIC APPLICATION, either
written by TIBBO or any third party.
3. TIBBO publishes a number of BASIC and/or C APPLICATIONS and segments
thereof ("CODE SNIPPETS"). Such APPLICATIONS and CODE SNIPPETS are provided
"as is" without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not
limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of said APPLICATIONS
and CODE SNIPPETS resides with you. The APPLICATIONS and CODE SNIPPETS may
be used only as a part of a commercial device based on TIBBO hardware. Modified
code does not have to be released into the public domain, and does not have to
carry a credit to TIBBO. APPLICATIONS and CODE SNIPPETS are provided solely as
coding aids and should not be construed as any indication of the predominant,
representative, legal, or best mode of use for any PROGRAMMABLE DEVICE.
4. BASIC/C-programmable modules ("PROGRAMMABLE MODULES"), such as the
EM1000 device, are shipped from TIBBO in either a blank state (without any
APPLICATION loaded), or with a simple test APPLICATION aimed at verifying correct
operation of a PROGRAMMABLE MODULE's hardware. All other BASIC/C-programmable
products including boards, external controllers, and developments systems ("NONMODULE PRODUCTS"), such as the DS1100 and TPS, are normally shipped with an
APPLICATION preloaded. This is done solely for the convenience of testing by the
customer and the nature and function of the preloaded APPLICATION shall not be
construed as any indication of the predominant, representative, or best mode of use
for any such NON-MODULE PRODUCT.
5. All specifications, technical information, and any other data published by TIBBO
are subject to change without prior notice. TIBBO assumes no responsibility for any
errors and does not make any commitment to update any published information.
6. Any technical advice provided by TIBBO or its personnel is offered on a purely
technical basis, does not take into account any potential legal issues arising from
the use of such advice, and should not be construed as a suggestion or indication
of the possible, predominant, representative, or best mode of use for any Tibbo
PRODUCT.
7. Any advance product or business information posted as news or updates of any
kind (including Tibbo Blog posts, Tibbo Newsflashes, site news, forum posts and any
other timely information posted by Tibbo personnel) shall not be construed as
obligatory to TIBBO in any way, shape or form. TIBBO may change or delay any of
its plans and product roadmaps without prior notice, and shall not be held liable for
such changes.
8. Neither TIBBO nor its employees shall be held responsible for any damages
resulting from the creation, manufacture, or use of any third-party product or
system, even if this product or system was inspired, fully or in part, by the advice
provided by Tibbo staff (in an official capacity or otherwise) or content published by

TIBBO or any other third party.
9. TIBBO may make non-English documentation or other information available at its
discretion. Such texts may be the result of work done by third parties, and may not
always be reviewed by TIBBO personnel. As such, these are not to be considered
official statements by TIBBO. Any apparent inaccuracies, conflicts or differences in
meaning between English-language and non-English texts shall always be resolved in
favor of the English-language version.
10. TIBBO reserves the right to halt the production or availability of any of its
PRODUCTS at any time and without prior notice. The availability of a particular
PRODUCT in the past is not an indication of the future availability of this PRODUCT.
The sale of the PRODUCT to you is solely at TIBBO's discretion and any such sale
can be declined without explanation.
11. TIBBO makes no warranty for the use of its PRODUCTS, other than that
expressly contained in the Standard Warranty located on the Company's website.
Your use of TIBBO PRODUCTS is at your sole risk. TIBBO PRODUCTS are provided on
an "as is" and "as available" basis. TIBBO expressly disclaims the warranties of
merchantability, future availability, fitness for a particular purpose and noninfringement. No advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you
from TIBBO shall create any warranty not expressly stated in the Standard
Warranty.
12. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. BY USING TIBBO PRODUCTS YOU EXPRESSLY AGREE
THAT TIBBO SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, GOODWILL, OR OTHER
INTANGIBLE LOSSES (EVEN IF TIBBO HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES) RESULTING FROM THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE OF TIBBO
PRODUCTS.
13. "Tibbo" is a registered trademark of Tibbo Technology, Inc (TAIWAN).
14. Terms and product names mentioned on TIBBO website or in TIBBO
documentation may be trademarks of others.
Embedded Modules
The following embedded modules are currently being offered by Tibbo:
EM1000
EM1206
EM500
EM1202
EM200*
Use the module comparison chart to select the module that best suites your
application.
* The EM200 module is a dual-use device. For best results, use the EM1000 and
EM1202 modules based on the new T1000 ASIC developed by Tibbo.
Module Comparison Table

Gene
ratio
n
2nd generation:
Mature serial-over-IP
platform, support for
3rd generation:
Full power of Tibbo BASIC/C
programmability, support for serial-over-IP
Embedded Modules
simple Tibbo BASIC/C
applications
Devic
e
Highli
ghts
EM200
Like the
EM120,
but with
10/100B
ase-T
Ethernet
.
EM203 (SoI
manual)
Member of
x20x family,
mates with
the RJ203
jack/
magnetics.
Combined
footprint
only
31x19mm.
via available Tibbo BASIC applcation
EM1000
2.54mm
(0.1") pin
pitch ideal
for
prototyping.
New to Tibbo
BASIC/C?
Start your
quest with
this module!
EM1202
Stacked
design
minimizes
footprint,
device
width close
to that of a
standard
RJ45 jack.
EM1206
Member of
x20x family,
mates with
the RJ203
jack/
magnetics.
Combined
footprint
only
34.5x19mm.
E
M
5
0
0
I
d
e
a
l
f
o
r
c
o
s
t
s
e
n
s
i
t
i
v
e
a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
.
M
i
n
i
m
a
l
f
o
o
t
p
r

i
n
t
.
W
i
d
t
h
a
n
d
h
e
i
g
h
t
c
l
o
s
e
t
o
t
h
o
s
e
o
f
a
s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
R
J
4
5
j
a
c
k
.
Can
work
as a
serial
-to-
YES
YES, through the use of available serialover-IP Tibbo BASIC application
Embedded Modules
IP
devic
e?
Ether
net
port
10/100BaseT
Ether
net
magn
etics
NO (External only)
Wi-Fi
port
NO
EXTERNAL, requires the GA1000 Wi-Fi addon module
Serial
port(
s)
I/O
lines
Flash
mem
ory
Up to 9
Up to 4
128KB, for SoI or Tibbo

OS (TiOS) firmware,
compiled T-Basic app.
Up to 54
Up to 32
Y
E
S
,
i
n
t
h
e
f
u
t
u
r
e
1
Up to 17
512KB or 1024KB, for TiOS firmware,

compiled Tibbo BASIC application and its
data
U
p
t
o
8
5
1
2
K
B
,
f
o
r
T
i
O
S
+
B
A
S
I
C

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
Flash
disk
(FD.
objec
t)
EEPR
OM
NO
2048 bytes, used by SoI

firmware to store
settings, 2042 bytes
available to store TBASIC app. data
YES, can take all free space in the flash

memory (space not already occupied by
TiOS firmware and Tibbo BASIC
application)
2048 bytes, 2042 bytes available to store

Tibbo BASIC application data
I
n
t
h
e
f
u
t
u
r
e
,
w
i
t
h
e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
f
l
a
s
h
I
C
2
5
6
b
y
t
e
s
,
2
0
Embedded Modules
8
0
b
y
t
e
s
a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e
t
o
s
t
o
r
e
T
i
b
b
o
B
A
S
I
C
a
p
p
.
d
a
t
a
RTC
(RTC.
objec
t)
NO, but you can

connect an external
RTC
YES, with
internal or
external
backup
power
source
NO, but you

can
connect an
external
RTC
YES, with
external
backup
power
source
N
O
,
b
u
t
y
o
u
c
a
n
c
o
n

n
e
c
t
a
n
e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
R
T
C
Displ
ay
supp
ort
(LCD.
objec
t)
NO, but you can

connect a simple text
display
YES, supports several models of graphical

displays, connected externally
Y
E
S
,
i
n
t
h
e
f
u
t
u
r
e
Y
E
S
,
i
n
t
h
e
f
u
t
u
r
e
Keyp
ad
supp
ort
(KP.
objec
t)
NO, but you can

connect keys to I/O
lines
YES, up to 64 keys depending on the

availability of I/O lines and keypad
configuration
Buzz
er
contr
ol
outp
ut
NO
YES, programmable square wave output
N
O
Embedded Modules
Syste
m
(a.k.
a.
MD)
butto
n
line
Statu
s LED
contr
ol
lines
Ether
net
LED
contr
ol
lines
10
YES
2, for green and red status LEDs
2, for link and speed mode indication
2
,
f
o
r
g
r
e
e
n
a
n
d
r
e
d
d
u
a
l
f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
L
E
D
s
1
,
f
o
r
l
i
n
k
i
n
d
i
11

c
a
t
i
o
n
PLL
(spe
ed)
contr
ol
Relia
ble
onbo
ard
reset
Suppl
y
volta
ge
(nom
inal)
Curre
nt
cons
umpt
ion
(max
)
NO
YES, through
hardware
(jumper) or
software
YES, through software

only
NO, proper external

reset circuit is required
for correct device
operation
YES, onboard power-up, brown-out

detection, and watchdog circuit
5V
3.3V, I/O lines are 5V-tolerant
220mA, with 100BaseT

link
230mA, with PLL on and 100BaseT link
N
O
N
O
,
e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
r
e
s
e
t
r
e
q
u
i
r
e
d
2
6
0
m
A
,
a
t
1
0
0
Embedded Modules
12
B
a
s
e
T
Dime
nsion
s
(LxW
xH)
32.1x18.
5x7.3m
m
Firm
ware
upgr
ades
30.1x18.1x5.
5mm
38.4x28.4x5.
5mm
19.1x17.1x1
4.6mm
YES, through a serial port or network
33.2x18.1x5
.5mm
1
8
.
5
x
1
6
.
0
x
6
.
5
m
m
Y
E
S
,
s
e
r
i
a
l
/
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
,
i
n
c
l
u
d
i
n
g
"
c
o
l
d
13

u
p
g
r
a
d
e
"
EM1000 BASIC/C-programmable Ethernet Module
Please be sure to read the following topic: EM1000-00 and -01.

Introduction
The EM1000 is Tibbo's most powerful and versatile BASIC-programmable embedded
module.
The module's hardware is a potent combination that includes 100/10BaseT Ethernet
port, four serial ports, onboard flash, EEPROM, RTC with onboard backup power, and
abundant I/O lines (up to 54!) to interface with external LCD, keypad, buzzer, and
card readers. Thus, the EM1000 is perfect for designing data collection and
automation such as access control panels, time and attendance terminals, inventory
control systems, factory floor automation terminals, and the like.
The EM1000 is also excellent for prototyping your projects -- its pin pitch is
standard 2.54mm (0.1).
The EM1000 is fully supported by TIDE software and a dedicated EM1000 platform
that covers all hardware facilities of the module (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual"). For convenient testing and evaluation Tibbo offers EM1000TEV and
EM1000EV development systems. The EM1000 can also support Wi-Fi
communications (this requires GA1000 add-on board).
Hardware features
Based on a high-performance purpose-built 88-MHz T1000 ASIC.
10/100BaseT auto-MDIX Ethernet port (automatic detection of "straight" and
"cross" cables). Standard Ethernet magnetics are NOT integrated into the module.
Optional Wi-Fi interface (requires GA1000 add-on module to be connected).
Four high-speed serial ports (CMOS-level):
Embedded Modules
14
- Baudrates of up to 921,600bps;
- None/even/odd/mark/space parity modes;
- 7/8 bits/character modes;
- Full-duplex mode with optional flow control;
- Half-duplex mode with direction control;
- Encoding and decoding of Wiegand and clock/data streams.
512K or 1024KB flash memory for firmware, application, and data storage.
2KB EEPROM for data storage.
RTC with dedicated backup power input (optional onboard supercapacitor).
Up to 54 general-purpose I/O lines. Among them:
- 8 interrupt lines;
- Serial port lines;
- 40 lines that are combined into five 8-bit ports;
- Square wave output (6Hz - 22'1184MHz), which can be used to control an
external buzzer.
Supports external LCD and keypad.
Four control lines for status LEDs:
- 2 lines for green and red status LED control;
- 2 lines for Ethernet status LED control.
Software- and hardware-controlled onboard PLL to select the clock frequency of
the device: 11.0592MHz with PLL off, 88.4736MHz with PLL on.
Reliable power-on/ brown-out reset circuit; no additional external reset circuitry
required. Master reset input also provided.
Power: 230mA @ 3.3V (100BaseT mode, PLL on).
Dimensions: 38.4x28.4x5.5mm.
Firmware and Tibbo BASIC/C application are upgradeable through the serial port or
network.
Tibbo BASIC/C application can be debugged through the network and no additional
debugging hardware, such as in-circuit emulator, is required.
Programming features
Variable Types: Byte, char, integer (word), short, dword, long, real, string, plus
user-defined arrays and structures.
Function Groups: string functions (27 in total!), date/time conversion functions
(8), encryption/hash calculation functions (AES128, RC4, MD5, SHA-1), and more.
Platform objects:
- Sock socket communications (up to 16 UDP, TCP, and HTTP sessions);
- Net controls the Ethernet port;
- Wln handles the Wi-Fi interface (requires GA1000 add-on module);
- Ssi implements up to four serial synchronous interface (SSI) channels,
supports SPI, I2C, clock/data, etc.;
- Ser in charge of serial ports (UART, Wiegand, and clock/data modes);
- Io handles I/O lines, ports, and interrupts;
- Lcd controls graphical display panels (several types supported, LCD must be
15

connected externally);
- Kp scans keypads of matrix and "binary" types (keypad must be connected
externally);
- Rtc keeps track of date and time;
- Fd manages flash memory file system and direct sector access;
- Stor provides access to the EEPROM;
- Romfile facilitates access to resource files (fixed data);
- Pppoe provides access to the Internet over an ADSL modem;
- Ppp provides access to the Internet over a serial modem (GPRS, POTS, etc.);
- Pat "plays" patterns on up to five LED pairs (LEDs must be connected
externally);
- Beep generates buzzer patterns (buzzer must be connected externally);
- Button monitors MD line;
- Sys in charge of general device functionality.
EM1000-00 and -01

Small hardware changes were made to the EM1000 since its first release. Currently
Tibbo supplies version "-01" of the module. The first version ever produced was "00". The main difference is in the Ethernet IC: the EM1000-...-00 used Davicom's
DM9000 while the EM1000-...- 01 features newer DM9000A. This change reduced
module's current consumption and operating temperature. Unfortunately, this
transition requires certain alterations to the way Ethernet magnetics and RJ45 are
wired to the module. Tibbo apologizes for any inconvenience caused!
Throughout this document, differences between hardware versions of the module
are highlighted in pink. Please, note that from the programming standpoint there are
no functional differences between the EM1000-...- 00 and EM1000-...- 00.
Pictures below show the original EM1000-...- 00 and the EM1000-...- 01.
This is how the original EM1000-...- 00 looks like:
And this is how the EM1000-...- 01 looks like:
Embedded Modules
16
I/O Pin Assignment and Pin Functions
Note: "SPI connector" is now referred to as "wireless add-on port"

See these topics for more information on various hardware facilities of the EM1000:
General-purpose I/O Lines
Wireless Add-on port
Ethernet Port Lines
17

Serial Ports
Flash and EEPROM Memory
Real-time Counter
LED Lines
Power, Reset, PLL Control, and Mode Selection Lines
I/O pin assignment
Pin #
Function
Description
(1,2)
GPIO0/P0.0
General-purpose I/O line 0 (P0.0).
(1,2)
GPIO1/P0.1
(1,2)
GPIO2/P0.2
(1,2)
GPIO3/P0.3
(1,2)
GPIO4/P0.4
(1,2)
GPIO5/P0.5
(1,2)
GPIO6/P0.6
(1,2)
GPIO7/P0.7
(1,2)
GPIO8/P1.0/RX0
General-purpose I/O line 8 (P1.0);

RX, W1, and din input of the serial port 0.
10
GPIO9/P1.1/TX0
(1,2)
11
(1,2)
12
(1,2)
13
(1,2)
14
(1,2)
15
(1,2)
16
(1,2)
17
(1,2,3)
18
(1,2,3)
19
(1,2,3)
20
(1,2,3)
21
(1,2,3)
22

TX, W1, and dout output of the serial port 0.
GPIO10/P1.2/
RX1
GPIO11/P1.3/
TX1
GPIO12/P1.4/
RX2
GPIO13/P1.5/
TX2
GPIO14/P1.6/
RX3
GPIO15/P1.7/
TX3
GPIO16/P2.0/
INT0
GPIO17/P2.1/
INT1
GPIO18/P2.2/
INT2
GPIO19/P2.3/
INT3
GPIO20/P2.4/
INT4
GPIO21/P2.5/

interrupt line 0.
interrupt line 1.
interrupt line 2.
interrupt line 3.
interrupt line 4.
Embedded Modules
(1,2,3)
INT5
interrupt line 5.
23
GPIO22/P2.6/
INT6
GPIO23/P2.7/
INT7
GPIO40
General-purpose I/O line 40 (does not belong to

any 8-bit port).
GPIO41

any 8-bit port).
GPIO42

any 8-bit port).
GPIO43

any 8-bit port).
29
GND
System ground.
30
GPIO44
General-purpose I/O line 44.
GPIO25/P3.1
GPIO24/P3.0
GPIO27/P3.3
GPIO26/P3.2
GPIO29/P3.5
GPIO28/P3.4
GPIO31/P3.7
GPIO30/P3.6
GPIO33/P4.1
GPIO32/P4.0
GPIO35/P4.3
GPIO34/P4.2
GPIO37/P4.5
GPIO36/P4.4
GPIO39/P4.7
GPIO38/P4.6
47
MD
Mode selection pin.
48
<TEST PIN>
Leave this pin unconnected.
49
RST
Reset line, active high.
50
PM
PLL control line (HIGH- PLL ON, LOW- PLL OFF).
51
SR
Red status LED control line.
52
SG
Green status LED control line.
53
GPIO46
(1,2,3)
24
(1,2,3)
25
(1,2)
26
(1,2)
27
(1,2)
28
(1,2)
interrupt line 6.
interrupt line 7.
(1,2)
31
(1,2)
32
(1,2)
33
(1,2)
34
(1,2)
35
(1,2)
36
(1,2)
37
(1,2)
38
(1,2)
39
(1,2)
40
(1,2)
41
(1,2)
42
(1,2)
43
(1,2)
44
(1,2)
45
(1,2)
46
(1,2)
18
19

(1,2)
54
GPIO45/CO
(1,2)

any 8-bit port);
square wave output line.
55
GPIO48

any 8-bit port).
GPIO47

any 8-bit port).
57
DBGRX
RX line of debug serial port (details to be

published).
58
VCCB
Backup power for the real-time counter; connect

to 3.3V through a 50 Ohm resistor.
59
DBGTX
TX line of debug serial port (details to be

published).
60
VCC
Positive power input, 3.3V nominal, +/- 5%, max.

current consumption 230mA (100BaseT, PLL on).
61
TX-
Ethernet port, negative line of the differential

output signal pair.
62
AVCC
"Clean" power output for magnetics circuitry:
(1,2)
56
(1,2)
EM1000-...- 00: 3.3V (not in production)

EM1000-...- 01: 2.5V (currently in production).
63
TX+
Ethernet port, positive line of the differential

output signal pair.
64
EY
Yellow Ethernet status LED control line.
65
EM1000-...- 00:
---
EM1000-...- 00: --EM1000-...- 01: external supercapacitor input.
EM1000-...- 01:
SCAP
66
EG
Green Ethernet status LED control line.
67
RX-

input signal pair.
68
EM1000-...- 00:
---
EM1000-...- 00: --EM1000-...- 01: analog ground.
EM1000-...- 01:
AGND
69
RX+
Ethernet port, positive line of the differential input

signal pair.
70
EM1000-...- 00:
---
EM1000-...- 00: --EM1000-...- 01: analog ground.
EM1000-...- 01:
AGND
71 (4)
GND
System ground.
(4)
VCC
3.3V power available on this pin. Do not connect

to the power source. To avoid current loops, only
use pin #60 to power the device.
GPIO49

any 8-bit port).
SPIDI
SPI, data in [no longer in use].
GPIO50
72
73
(1,2,4)
74
(4,5)
75
(1,2,4)
Embedded Modules
20
any 8-bit port).

76
SPIDO
SPI, data out [no longer in use].
GPIO51

any 8-bit port).
SPICLK
SPI, clock line [no longer in use].
GPIO52

any 8-bit port).
GPIO53

any 8-bit port).
(4,5)
77
(1,2,4)
78
(1,2,4,5)
79
(1,2,4)
80
(1,2,4)
Notes:
1. This line is 5V-tolerant and can be interfaced to 5V CMOS devices directly.
2. This line can be mapped to serve as an RTS/Wout/cout line of a serial port
(provided that this does not interfere with any other function).
3. This line can serve as a CTS/W0&1in/cin line of a serial port (provided that this
does not interfere with any other function).
4. This pin is on the wireless add-on port (formerly known as "SPI port"). "-A" option
device modification has the connector header soldered in and "available" to the
host PCB. "T" option devices have a female connector. Other EM1000 versions do
not have any connector installed.
5. The SPI lines are no longer used. Our current wireless add-on modules, such as
the GA1000, rely on GPIO49~53 for communicating with add-on devices. SPIDI,
SPIDO, and SPOCLK lines should never be connector to.
General-purpose
I/O Lines
3.2.2.1
The EM1000 has 54 general-purpose I/O lines (GPIO0 - GPIO53). All lines are 3.3V,
CMOS, 5V-tolerant lines. Maximum load current for each I/O line is 10mA. 49 of
these lines are always available. Remaining 5 lines are located on the wireless addon connector. This connector is "available" to the host PCB only on option "-A"
EM1000 devices.
40 of the I/O lines are combined into five 8-bit ports.
The simplified structure of one I/O line of the EM1000 is shown on the circuit
diagram below. Each line has an independent output buffer control. When the
EM1000 powers up all its I/O lines have their output buffers tri-stated (in other
words, all I/O lines are configured as inputs). You need to explicitly enable the
output buffer of a certain I/O line if you want this line to become an output.
Many I/O lines of the EM1000 also serve as inputs or outputs of special function
modules, such as serial ports. Majority of those lines need to be correctly configured
as inputs or outputs -- this won't happen automatically. Several lines -- such as TX
and RX lines of the serial port when in the UART mode -- are configured as outputs
and inputs automatically when the serial port (or some other hardware block) is
enabled. For details see "Platform-dependent Programming Information inside the
EM1000 platform documentation ("TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Each I/O line has a weak pull-up resistor that prevents the line from floating when
the output buffer is tri-stated.
21
I/O line control is described in detail in the documentation for the I/O (io.) object
found inside the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual".
Wireless
Add-on Port
3.2.2.2
The wireless add-on port (a.k.a. "SPI port") of the EM1000 is a separate 10-pin
connector.
This port carries 5 general-purpose I/O lines. When a wireless add-on module, such
as the GA1000 Wi-Fi add-on, is plugged into the EM1000, these lines are used for
SPI communications with the add-on. In the absence of a wireless module these 5
lines may be used as general-purpose input/output lines.
It should be noted that the GA1000 can be controlled through any five I/O lines of
the EM1000. Obviously, the lines on the wireless add-on port are the most
convenient for the task as the connector pinout matches that of the GA1000.
Nonetheless, it is always possible to connect the GA1000 by wires, in which case
any combination of I/O lines can be used for communicating with it.
The wireless add-on port also carries three legacy lines SPIDI, SPIDO, and SPOCLK.
These lines are not used by wireless add-on devices and should never be connected
to.
For more details on Wi-Fi communications see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual" (wln.
object).
EM1000 versions and the wireless add-on port
Standard EM1000 devices do not have the wireless add-on port connector and the
"landing" PCB area for the connector is left empty.
Wireless add-on modules, such as the GA1000, may be soldered into the wireless
add-on port pads on the EM1000. Tibbo will solder the GA1000 in if you order the
"EM1000G" device.
Option "-A" EM1000 devices feature a 10-pin wireless add-on pin header. The pins
on this header are identical to all other pins on the EM1000 and face the host PCB.
This way the wireless port of the EM1000 can be connected to some other circuitry
on the host PCB. For example, instead of mounting onto the EM1000, the GA1000
can be mounted directly onto the host PCB. Option "-A" EM1000 module is then
required to facilitate the connection between the EM1000 and the GA1000.
Finally, option "-T" devices have a female wireless add-on port connector, which the
GA1000 can be plugged into. EM1000 modules of "-T" variety are intended for
convenient GA1000 testing and are not recommended for use in production devices.
For further information on available EM1000 versions see Mechanical Dimensions and
Embedded Modules
22
Specifications and Ordering Info topics.
Ethernet
Port Lines
3.2.2.3
ATTENTION! There are two different Ethernet magnetics arrangements: one for
original EM1000-...- 00, another one -- for the EM1000-...- 01.
Ethernet port of the EM1000 is of 100BaseT type. Onboard electronics of the
EM1000 do not include Ethernet magnetics, so magnetics circuitry must be
connected externally to pins TX+, TX-, RX+, RX-, and AVCC. The AVCC pin outputs
clean power for the magnetics circuitry, which is very sensitive to noise. The
voltage on the AVCC depends on the EM1000 version: 3.3V for EM1000-...- 00, 2.5V
for the EM1000-...- 01. Separate AGND analog ground pins have been added on the
EM1000-...- 01. For the EM1000-...- 00 there is no separate analog ground. Please,
note the following:
The AVCC is an output!
Do not combine AVCC with the VCC (main power) pin. On the EM1000-...- 00 this
is counter-productive, and on the EM1000-...- 01 this will apply wrong voltage to
the AVCC pin. Doing so appears to be causing no immediate permanent damage to
the EM1000-...- 01, but the circuit will not work and the effects of prolonged
over-voltage on the AVCC line are not known.
You can use either a standalone magnetics part (such as YCL-PH163112) or RJ45
connector with integrated magnetics (i.e. YCL-PTC1111-01G). Here are two
connection diagrams based on the YCL-PTC1111-01G -- one for the EM1000-...- 00,
another one - for the EM1000-...- 01.
23
Once again, the EM1000-...- 00 is a legacy part that has been replaced with the
EM1000-...- 01. In case you have already made the PCB based on the EM1000-...00 specifications and are not willing to change it, you can easily modify it to
accommodate the EM1000-...- 01 (see diagram below):
Do not install four 50 Ohm resistors (they are crossed out on the diagram).
Connect a wire between pins 4 and 7 of the RJ45 connector (pin numbers are for
YCL-PTC1111-01G).
If possible, find a way to install a 220uF capacitor. The circuit will still work even
if you don't have this capacitor but you may have FCC/CE certification issues.
Notice that one of the 0.1 capacitors becomes redundant but that's OK.
All of the above is based on the assumption that your host PCB was designed
correctly and the AVCC output of the EM1000 is not joined together with the main
VCC line. If you erroneously had AVCC and VCC combined together then you will
need to separate them as well: pin AVCC outputs 2.5V on the EM1000-...- 01
and this is different from the main power on the VCC pin, which is 3.3V. Applying
3.3V to pin AVCC of the EM1000-...- 01 appears to be causing no immediate
permanent damage to the device, but the circuit will not work and the effects of
prolonged over-voltage on the AVCC line are not known.
Embedded Modules
24
It is important to make the PCB wire connections between the Ethernet port pins of
the EM1000 and external magnetics circuitry as short as possible. Making the wires
too long may cause the noise level generated by your PCB to surpass the maximum
radiated emission limits stipulated by FCC/CE regulations. Additionally, longer
Ethernet lines on the PCB will make your board more susceptible to the damage from
the ESD (electrostatic discharge).
The EM1000 also has two Ethernet status LED control lines- see here for details.
Serial Ports
3.2.2.4
The EM1000 has four serial ports that can work in one of the three modes: UART,
Wiegand, or clock/data. All three modes are described in detail in the documentation
for the serial (ser.) object found inside the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual".
Additionally, see the Platform-dependent Programming Information section inside the
EM1000 platform documentation (same manual).
Square3.2.2.5
Wave Generator
The square wave generator can produce a square wave output on pin GPIO45/CO of
the EM1000. This output is primarily intended for generating audio signals using
buzzer and is covered in the beep (beep.) object -- see the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
25

Manual".
Flash and
EEPROM Memory
3.2.2.6
The EM1000 has 512KBytes or 1024KBytes of flash memory and 2KBytes of EEPROM
memory (see Specifications and Ordering Info).
The first 64KBytes of flash memory are used to store the TiOS firmware. When you
are performing a firmware upgrade it is this memory you are saving the firmware
binary into.
The rest of this flash memory is available to your Tibbo BASIC/C application and its
data. Whatever memory space is left after the compiled application is loaded can be
used as a flash disk (see fd. object documentation in the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual").
The EEPROM is almost fully available to your application, save for a small 8-byte
area called "special configuration area". The EEPROM is accessed through the stor.
object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual"). Details on the special configuration
area are provided in the Platform-dependent Programming Information section inside
the EM1000 platform documentation (same manual).
Real-time
Counter
3.2.2.7
The real-time counter (RTC) of the EM1000 is a free-running 40-bit register that
increments at a rate of 128Hz.
As a source of backup power, the EM1000 can rely on a supercapacitor. Option "-S"
of the EM1000 (see Specifications and Ordering Info) has this onboard
supercapacitor. To enable charging, connect 3.3V power to the VCCB pin of the
EM1000, preferably through a current-limiting resistor (50 Ohm is a good value). A
fully discharged supercapacitor creates a nearly short-circuit current inrush when it
starts charging and this can damage the power supply of the host board.
The EM1000-...-S carries the supercapacitor on the bottom side of its PCB (see
Mechanical Dimensions). With this supercapacitor present, it is impossible to solder
Embedded Modules
26
the module into the host PCB directly and the module can only be installed on a
socket. If this is not acceptable you can use a "plain" EM1000 (non- "-S") and
connect an external supercapacitor to the SCAP pin of the EM1000. This option is
only available on the newer EM1000-...- 01 device (EM1000-...- 00 does not have
the SCAP input).
The supercapacitor has many advantages -- it charges almost instantly and has
virtually unlimited lifespan. The disadvantage is that the supercapacitor is only able
to sustain the RTC of the EM1000 for several days at most (about 6 days for the 4F
supercapacitor of the EM1000-...-S), which may appear to be insufficient.
Remember, however, that the EM1000 is usually connected to the network and can
always synchronize its clock* with an Internet time server or a master clock on the
main server of your system. Therefore, the role of the supercapacitor is to provide
the backup power during relatively short periods of power interruption, i.e. when the
device is unplugged and moved to another location, or when the device is powered
off over the weekend.
It is also possible to use a 3V lithium battery to power the RTC (in this case, do not
use the EM1000 with "-S"). Connect the battery to the VCCB pin through a small
Schottky diode. This diode is necessary to slightly reduce the voltage on the VCCB
pin. You can calculate the time the battery will be able to sustain the EM1000 from
the average backup current, which is ~13uA. Note that the VCCB pin cosumes a
much larger current (~1mA) when the Vcc is applied and the EM1000 is running.
Therefore, your battery-based backup circuit should be designed in a way that does
not drain the battery while the Vcc is applied.
The RTC will continue to function with backup power on the VCCB pin as low as
2.2V. Make sure that the voltage on this pin does not exceed 3.3V. Failure to
observe this limit may cause permanent damage to the EM1000.
Your Tibbo BASIC/C application can access the RTC through the RTC (rtc.) object,
which is documented in the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual".
*With the right application, that is.
LED Lines
3.2.2.8
The EM1000 has four LED control lines -- SG, SR, EG, and EY. All lines have the
same internal structure and the LEDs should be connected to these lines as shown
on the schematic diagram below. Maximum load for each line is 10mA.
Further information on status LEDs can be found in Appendix 1: Status LEDs.
27
Your Tibbo BASIC/C application can control red and green status LEDs, as well as up
to four externally connected LED pairs through the pattern (pat.) object, which is
documented in the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual".
Power,3.2.2.9
Reset, PLL Control, and Mode Selection Lines
The EM1000 should be powered from a stabilized DC power supply with nominal
output voltage of 3.3V (+/- 5% tolerance). This power should be applied to the pin
#60. "-A" modification of the EM1000 has the second VCC pin -- #72. To prevent
"current loops", only use either pin #60, or pin #72 to supply the power to the
device.
Current consumption of the EM1000 is approximately 230mA (PLL on, 100BaseT
mode). This does not include the power consumption of the wireless add-on module,
such as the GA1000. The slave module, depending on its type, can add significantly
to the power consumed by the EM1000. Therefore, providing an adequate power
supply is very important -- poorly built circuit may affect EM1000 operation. We
recommend that you use a switching power supply. One (but not the only) example
of such circuit is shown below.
Please, do not forget that the VCCB pin should not be left unconnected (see Realtime Counter).
Proper external reset is not required. The EM1000 has a reliable power-on reset
circuit with brown-out detection. Optionally, you can connect a reset button or
some other reset-generating circuit to the RST pin of the EM1000. This will allow
you to generate "external" resets. The RST line has active HIGH polarity. If you are
not using the RST pin you can leave it unconnected.
The main clock frequency of the EM1000 is generated by the 11.0592MHz crystal
connected to the onboard PLL circuit. When the PLL is off, the EM1000 is clocked at
11.0592MHz. When the PLL is on, the main clock is eight times higher- 88.4736MHz.
Naturally, with PLL turned on the EM1000 works 8 times faster and consumers more
current (230mA with PLL on against 110mA with PLL off). Main clock frequency also
affects the baudrates of serial ports when in the UART mode, as well as the
frequency produced by the square wave generator.
The PLL cannot be switched off and on while the EM1000 is running. This is because
when the PLL mode changes its output needs some time to stabilize. For this
reason, the PLL mode of the EM1000 can only be changed on reset. A special
internal delay circuit will hold the EM1000 in reset while PLL frequency stabilizes.
The state of the PM pin at power-on or external reset (i.e. reset pulse on the RST
line) defines whether the EM1000 will run with PLL on or off. To have the PLL on,
leave the PM pin unconnected. To disable PLL and run at lower clock frequency,
ground the PM pin.
Your Tibbo BASIC/C application can also change the PLL mode programmatically.
The Tibbo BASIC/C application can check the current PLL mode through the system
(sys.) object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual"). If the PLL mode needs to be
changed, the application can set new mode and then perform an internal reset
(again, through the system object). The internal reset is identical to the power-on
or external reset with one difference: the PLL mode is set basing not on the PM pin
but on the PLL mode requested by the application prior to the reset.
The function of the MD line is described in Appendix 2: Setup Button (MD line).
Power supply circuit
Many power supply circuits will work well. The one below is being used by Tibbo.
Embedded Modules
28
The circuit can handle input voltages in the 9-24V range.
Notes:
U1 (AP1501-33) is a popular power IC manufactured by Anachip (now Diodes
Incorporated, www.diodes.com)
C1 and C2 capacitors: Do not use SMD capacitors -- use regular through-hole
aluminum capacitors. This really helps reduce noise produced by the power supply.
This is an analog circuit, so layout matters. Apply reasonable "good layout" effort.
Ideally, one should use an oscilloscope to see what sort of "square wave" the
power supply generates, both at low and high input voltages, as well as light
and heavy loads. There are no recipes here -- just try and see what works for
your circuit.
Mechanical Dimensions
29
Notes:
Standard EM1000 devices do not have a wireless add-on connector (a.k.a. "SPI
port") and the "landing" PCB area for the connector is left empty (cross-section A).
Compatible wireless add-on modules (such as the GA1000 Wi-Fi module) can
optionally be soldered into the connector pads (cross-section B).
Option "-A" EM1000 devices feature a 10-pin wireless add-on header (cross-section
C). The pins on this header are identical to all other pins of the EM1000 and face
the host PCB. This way the wireless add-on port of the EM1000 can be connected
to some other circuitry on the host PCB. For example, instead of mounting onto the
EM1000, the GA1000 can be mounted directly onto the host PCB. Option "-A"
EM1000 module is then required to facilitate the connection between the EM1000
and the GA1000.
Finally, option "-T" devices have a female wireless add-on port connector, which the
GA1000 can be plugged into. EM1000 modules of "-T" variety (cross-section D) are
intended for convenient GA1000 testing and are not recommended for use in
production devices.
L
Max
.
38.
4
Module length
Max
.
28.
4
Module width
Max
.
5.5
Module height
H
'
Max
.
11.
0
Module height with the GA1000 module soldered into the

EM1000 module
Max
.
Additional height added by the supercapacitor ("-S" option

devices only)
Min
.
6.0
Lead length
Ave
r.
2.5
4
Pin pitch
Dimensions are for reference only. Tibbo assumes no responsibility for any errors in
this Manual, and does not make any commitment to update the information
contained herein.
Embedded Modules
30

Device numbering scheme is as follows:
"A" and "T" versions are not standard and cannot be ordered from our online store.
Contact Tibbo if you wish to order EM1000 devices with "A" or "T" options.
512K devices are no longer available.
If the flash memory size is omitted, 1024K option is implied.
To order the EM1000 in combination with the GA1000 module, use the "EM1000G"
ordering code. This code means that the EM1000 module will be supplied with the
GA1000 module soldered into it (resulting mechanical structure is presented as
"option B" on the Mechanical Dimensions drawing).
Examples of valid model numbers
Model number
Description
EM1000-512K
This is an obsolete device with only 512KBytes of flash

memory
EM1000G-1024K-S
EM1000 module with GA1000 Wi-Fi add-on, 1024KBytes

of flash memory and the supercapacitor (backup power
source for the RTC)
EM1000T
EM1000 module with 1024KBytes of flash memory and

the wireless add-on female connector soldered in
Hardware specifications
Ethernet interface
10/100BaseT Ethernet, Auto-MDIX, magnetics not

built-in
Serial ports
4 ports, CMOS-level
UART capabilities
Baudrates up to 921'600bps; none/even/odd/mark/

space parity and 7/8 bits/character
Number of I/O lines
"Regular" EM1000: 49 lines; option "-A" device: 54

lines;
all lines are 5V-tolerant;
31

40 of I/O lines are combined into five 8-bit ports;
8 lines can be used as interrupt lines.
Max. load current for each
I/O line
10mA
Square wave generator
6Hz - 22'1184MHz, primarily intended for driving

external buzzer
Real-time counter (RTC)
40 bit, increments at 128Hz, has its own backup

power input
RTC backup power source
Supercapacitor, supports RTC for app. 6 days ("-S"

version only); alternatively, external supercapacitor
or backup battery can be connected.
Clock frequency
11.0592MHz with PLL off

88.4736MHz with PLL on
Flash memory
512KBytes or 1024KBytes, the entire memory minus

64KB is available for storing Tibbo BASIC/C
application and data
EEPROM memory
2048 bytes, 2040 bytes available for storing

application data
Nominal power supply

voltage (VCC pin)
DC 3.3V, +/- 5%
Reset circuit trip voltage

(VCC pin)
3.0V on power-up (i.e. when the voltage on VCC is

rising)
2.9V on brown-out (i.e. when the voltage on VCC
is dropping)
Operating current (VCC

pin), not including
hardware consumed by an
add-on modules plugged
into the EM1000
40mA with PLL off, Ethernet cable unplugged

50mA with PLL off, 10BaseT mode
160mA with PLL on, Ethernet cable unplugged
170mA with PLL on, 10BaseT mode
Backup power voltage

range (VCCB pin)(1)
2.2V - 3.3V (option without "-S" only)
Backup current (VCCB pin)
1mA when the EM1000 is running (3.3V on VCC)

13uA when the EM1000 is not powered (0V on
VCC)
Operating temperature
-20 to +70 degrees C
Operating relative humidity
10-90%
Mechanical dimensions
(excl. leads)
"Plain" EM1000: 38.4x28.4x5.5 mm

EM1000-...-S(2): 38.4x28.4x9.5 mm
EM1000G: 38.4x28.4x11.0 mm
EM1000G-...-S(2): 38.4x28.4x15.0 mm
Pin diameter
0.64mm
Packaging
Plain EM1000 devices: tube, 10 modules/tube

All other variants: tray, 30 modules/tray
Notes:
1. The RTC will not lose its data and will keep running as long as the backup voltage
stays within this range.
Embedded Modules
32
2. The EM1000-xxxK-S device cannot be installed on the PCB directly. This is

because it has a supercapacitor mounted on the bottom side of the module. This
device must be be mounted on a socket.
All specifications are subject to change without notice and are for reference only.
Tibbo assumes no responsibility for any errors in this Manual, and does not make
any commitment to update the information contained herein.
EM1206 module
EM1206 in combination with the RJ203
Introduction
The EM1206 is a miniature BASIC-programmable embedded module. This device is a
member of the x20x family of embedded modules and takes full advantage of unique
mechanical concept of x20x devices. The module can be used with any suitable jack
and magnetics, or with our patent-pending RJ203 jack/magnetics module. The
combined PCB footprint of the EM1206 and RJ203 is only 34.5x19mm.
The module's hardware mix, which includes 100Base/T Ethernet, four serial ports,
flash disk, EEPROM, and RTC, has been carefully tailored to address the typical
needs of network-enabled control applications. This makes the EM1206 especially
suitable for "connected" edge products such as sensors, network-enabled card
readers, actuators, and other lightweight devices.
33

Manual"). For convenient testing and evaluation Tibbo offers the EM1206EV
evaluation board. The EM1206 can also support Wi-Fi communications (this requires
GA1000 add-on board), as well as external LCD, keypad, and buzzer.
Hardware features
"cross" cables). Standard Ethernet magnetics are NOT integrated into the module:
- Connect any suitable external jack and magnetics; or
- Combine the EM1206 with Tibbo's patent-pending RJ203 module to achieve
minimal PCB footprint.
RTC with dedicated backup power input.
- 16 lines that are combined into two 8-bit ports;
external buzzer.
Control lines for two external status LEDs.
Four LEDs onboard:
- Green and red status LEDs;
- Green and yellow Ethernet status LEDs.
Software-controlled onboard PLL to select the clock frequency of the device:
11.0592MHz with PLL off, 88.4736MHz with PLL on.
network.
Embedded Modules
34
Platform objects:
externally);
- Pat "plays" patterns on up to five LED pairs (two LEDs onboard, additional
LEDs must be connected externally);

The EM1206 has three connectors: main connector, additional connector, and
magnetics connector. Depending on the EM1206 version, magnetics connector can
be soldered facing up or down, as described in the Mechanical Dimensions topic.
35
Ethernet Port Lines
Serial Ports
Real-time Counter
LED Lines
Power, Reset, and Mode Selection Lines
Main connector
Pin #
Function
Description
VCCB
Backup power for the real-time counter.
MD
Mode selection pin.
RST
GPIO5/P0.5/TX2/
INT5
Do not connect to 3.3V directly!

3
4
(1,2,3)
TX, W1, dout output of the serial port 2;

Interrupt line 5.
(1,2,3)
GPIO4/P0.4/RX2/
INT4

RX, W1, din input of the serial port 2;
Interrupt line 4.
(1,2,3)
GPIO6/P0.6/RX3/
INT6

Interrupt line 6.
(1,2,3)

GPIO7/P0.7/TX3/
INT7
VCC
Positive power input, 3.3V nominal, +/- 5%,

max. current consumption 230mA (100BaseT,
Interrupt line 7.
Embedded Modules
36
PLL on).
9
GND
System ground.
10
GPIO0/P0.0/RX0/
INT0
(1,2,3)

Interrupt line 0.
11
(1,2,3)
GPIO1/P0.1/TX0/
INT1

Interrupt line 1.
12
(1,2,3)
GPIO2/P0.2/RX1/
INT2

Interrupt line 2.
13
(1,2,3)
GPIO3/P0.3/TX1/
INT3

Interrupt line 3.
Notes:
2. This line can serve as an RTS/Wout/cout line of a serial port (provided that this
Additional connector
Pin #
Function
Description
SG
SR
GPIO16/CO

any port);
2
3
(1,2)
(1,2)
GPIO8/P1.0
(1,2)
GPIO9/P1.1
(1,2)
GPIO10/P1.2
(1,2)
GPIO11/P1.3
(1,2)
GPIO12/P1.4
(1,2)
GPIO13/P1.5
10
(1,2)
GPIO14/P1.6
11
(1,2)
GPIO15/P1.7
Notes:
2. This line can be assigned to serve as an RTS/Wout/cout line of a serial port.
Magnetics connector
Pin #
Function
Description
37

#1
RX+

signal pair.
#2
RX-
Ethernet port, negative line of the differential input

signal pair.
#3
AVCC
"Clean" 1.8V power output for magnetics circuitry.
#4
---
---
#5
---
---
#6
AGND
Analog ground.
#7
TX+
Ethernet port, positive line of the differential output

signal pair.
#8
TX-
Ethernet port, negative line of the differential output

signal pair.
General-purpose
I/O Lines
3.3.1.1
CMOS, 5V-tolerant. Maximum load current for each line is 10mA. Out of seventeen
available lines, sixteen are combined into two 8-bit ports.
The simplified structure of one I/O line of the EM1206 is shown on the circuit
diagram below. Each line has an independent output buffer control. When the
EM1206 powers up all I/O lines have their output buffers tri-stated (in other words,
all I/O lines are configured as inputs). You need to explicitly enable the output
buffer of a certain I/O line if you want this line to become an output.
the output buffer is tri-stated. I/O line control is described in the io. object
documentation ("TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Many I/O lines of the EM1206 have alternative functions and serve as inputs or
outputs of special function modules: On the EM1206, the special function modules
are four serial ports and the square wave generator. When any special function
module is enabled, its I/O lines seize to work as inputs/outputs and are controlled by
this special function module directly. Depending on the nature of an alternative
function a given I/O line is to perform, your application may still have to manually
configure this line for input or output. The table below details which special function
module lines require manual configuration:
RX lines of serial ports
Automatically configured as inputs when a
Embedded Modules
38
corresponding serial port is enabled, revert to

previous state when this port is disabled.
TX lines of serial ports
Automatically configured as outputs when a

corresponding serial port is enabled, revert to
previous state when this port is disabled.
CTS lines of serial ports
Must be configured as inputs by your application.

Note that CTS lines can be "remapped".
RTS lines of serial ports
Must be configured as outputs by your application.

Note that RTS lines can be "remapped".
CO (square wave output)
Automatically configured as output when the square

wave is being generated, reverts to previous state
when the square wave output stops.
Ethernet
Port Lines
3.3.1.2
EM1206 do not include Ethernet magnetics, so magnetic circuitry must be
clean 1.8V power for the magnetics circuitry, which is very sensitive to noise.
Separate AGND analog ground is also provided. Please, note the following:
Do not combine AVCC with the VCC (main power) pin. This will apply wrong
voltage to the AVCC pin. Doing so appears to cause no immediate permanent
damage to the EM1206, but the circuit will not work and the effects of prolonged
You can use either a standalone magnetics part (such as YCL-PH163112) or an RJ45
connector with integrated magnetics (i.e. YCL-PTC1111-01G). Here is a connection
diagram for the YCL-PTC1111-01G jack with integrated magnetics.
Alternatively, you can use the EM1206 in combination with the RJ203 jack/
magnetics module. Unique patent-pending design of the RJ203 "tucks" the EM1206
under the RJ203 thus minimizing required host PCB space. For more information see
RJ203 documentation (mechanical drawing of the EM1206+RJ203 module combination
can be found here).
39
Serial Ports
3.3.1.3
Wiegand, or clock/data. All three modes are described in detail in the ser. object
documentation ("TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual"). Additionally, see the Platformdependent Programming Information section inside the EM1206 platform
documentation (same manual).
Square3.3.1.4
Wave Generator
buzzer and is covered in the beep. object documentation ("TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual").
Flash and
EEPROM Memory
3.3.1.5
memory.
binary into.
Manual").
Real-time
Counter
3.3.1.6
As a source of backup power, the EM1206 can rely on a supercapacitor. Suggested
schematic diagram is shown below. The resistor is used for current limiting: a fully
discharged supercapacitor creates a nearly short-circuit current inrush when it
starts charging and this can damage the power supply of your host board.
Embedded Modules
40
The supercapacitor has many advantages- it charges almost instantly and has
virtually unlimited lifespan. The disadvantage is that the supercapacitor is only able
to sustain the RTC of the EM1206 for about 5-6 days, which may appear to be
insufficient. Remember, however, that the EM1206 is a "connected" product. As
such, it can always synchronize its clock with an Internet time server or a master
clock on the main server of your system. Therefore, the role of the supercapacitor
is to provide backup power during relatively short periods of power interruption, for
example when the device is unplugged and moved to another location, or when the
device is powered off over the weekend.
It is also possible to use a 3V lithium battery for backup power. Remember,
however, that the voltage on the VCCB pin should not exceeed 2.5V. Therefore, you
need to use several diodes in series between the battery and the VCCB input. You
can calculate the time the battery will be able to sustain the EM1206 from the
average backup current, which is ~13uA. Note that the VCCB pin cosumes a much
larger current (~1mA) when the Vcc is applied and the EM1206 is running.
Therefore, your battery-based backup circuit should be designed in a way that does
not drain the battery while the Vcc is applied.
Your Tibbo BASIC/C application can access the RTC through the rtc. object (see
"TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
LED Lines
3.3.1.7
The EM1206 has two LED control lines -- Status Green (SG), and Status Red (SR).
Both lines have the same internal structure and the LEDs should be connected to
these lines as shown on the schematic diagram below. The use of an external gate
is recommended because the EM1206 has its own onboard status LEDs, and those
are driven by SG and SR lines as well. The combined load of the internal and
external LED on the same line is too "heavy".
41
Power,3.3.1.8
Reset, and Mode Selection Lines
output voltage of 3.3V (+/- 5% tolerance). Current consumption of the EM1206 is
approximately 230mA (PLL on, 100BaseT mode). Providing an adequate power supply
is very important -- poorly built circuit may affect EM1206 operation. We
The main clock frequency of the EM1206 is generated by an 11.0592MHz crystal
Naturally, with PLL on the EM1206 works 8 times faster and consumers more current
(230mA with PLL on against 110mA with PLL off). Main clock frequency also affects
the baudrates of serial ports when in the UART mode, as well as the frequency
produced by the square wave generator.
when PLL mode changes its output needs some time to stabilize. For this reason,
the PLL mode of the EM1206 can only be changed on reset. A special internal delay
circuit will hold the EM1206 in reset while PLL frequency stabilizes.
Unlike the EM1000, the EM12062 does not have a hardware pin to control the state
of the PLL. On power up, the PLL is always enabled. Your Tibbo BASIC/C application
can change the PLL mode programmatically. The application can check the current
PLL mode through the sys. object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual"). If the PLL
mode needs to be changed, the application can set new mode and then perform an
internal reset (again, through the sys. object). The internal reset is identical to the
power-on or external reset with one difference: the PLL mode will not default to
"PLL on" but instead will be set as requested by the application prior to the reset.
Embedded Modules
42
Notes:
your circuit.
Onboard LEDs
The EM1206 features four onboard status LEDs. The LEDs are strategically
positioned on the edge of the module's board. Your product can have a small
window or opening on its cover to make the LEDs of the EM1206 visible from the
outside. When the EM1206 is used in combination with the RJ203 module, the status
LEDs are visible through a transparent portion of the RJ203's housing.
43
Thermal considerations
The DM9000B Ethernet controller of the EM1206 can become very hot during normal
module operation. To aid the module in dissipating excess heat, a special heatconductive sticker is applied to the top of the DM9000B. The protective paper of
the sticker MUST BE REMOVED prior to installing the module on the host PCB.
To further lower the operating temperature of the EM1206 we advise you to arrange
a copper area on the host PCB and in contact with the heat-conductive sticker.
Best results are achieved when the copper area is larger, and also when two copper
areas are provided on both sides of the host PCB and interconnected by a number
of large vias.
Embedded Modules
44
L
W
H
l1
Max.
Max.
Max.
Aver
.
w Max.
p Aver
.
s1 Aver
.
s2 Aver
.
s3 Aver
.
l
Min.
33.4
18.1
4.2
14.4
Length
Width
Height
Length of the narrower part of the board
16.7 Width at the narrower part of the board

1.27 Pin pitch
32.1 Distance from the edge of the board to the pins of the main
5
connector
27.2 Distance from the edge of the board to the pins of the magnetics
connector
3.8
Distance from the edge of the board to the pins of the additional
connector
4.0
Connector pin length
All dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are for reference only. Tibbo assumes
no responsibility for any errors in this Manual, and does not make any commitment
to update the information contained herein.
45


To order the EM1206 in combination with the RJ203 module, use the "RJ203
+EM1206" ordering code. This code means that the RJ203 and the EM1206 will come
pre-assembled together.
Model number
Description
EM1206-1024K
EM1206 with 1024KBytes of flash memory, configured

for mating with the RJ203
RJ203+EM1206
EM1206 with 1024KBytes of flash, in combination with

the RJ203
EM1206-D
EM1206 with 1024KBytes of flash memory, configured

for mating with the host PCB
Ethernet interface

built-in
Serial ports
4 ports, CMOS-level.
UART capabilities

space parity and 7/8 bits/character.
Number of I/O lines
17 lines, all lines are 5V-tolerant;

16 lines are combined into five 8-bit ports;

I/O line
10mA

external buzzer
Embedded Modules
40 bit, increments at 128Hz, has its own backup

power input
Clock frequency
46

Flash memory
1024KBytes, entire memory minus 64KB is available

to store Tibbo BASIC/C application and data
EEPROM memory

application data

voltage (VCC pin)
DC 3.3V, +/- 5%

(VCC pin)

rising)
is dropping)

pin), excluding hardware
consumed by an add-on
modules plugged into the
EM1000

Nominal backup voltage

(VCCB pin)
2.5V
Backup current (VCCB pin)
1mA when the EM1000 is running (3.3V on VCC)

13uA when the EM1000 is not powered (0V on
VCC)
10-90%
(excl. leads)
33.4x18.1x4.2mm
Pin diameter
0.4mm
Packaging
Tray, 30 modules/tray
* Implemented in (supported through) firmware.

47
EM500 "MiniMo" BASIC/C-programmable Ethernet Module
Introduction
The EM500 "MiniMo"* device is a miniature stand-alone BASIC-programmable
embedded module, designed to be used in combination with a standard LED/
magnetics RJ45 jack. The combined footprint of the EM500 and a standard jack is
only 28.5x18.5mm.
The module's hardware mix, which includes 10/100BaseT Ethernet port, a serial port,
and 8 I/O lines, has been carefully tailored to address the basic needs of lightweight
network-enabled control devices. If your application has a need to store data, an
external flash IC can be connected to the EM500. The EM500 also supports Wi-Fi
communications (using the GA1000 add-on board).
Compact dimensions, a space-saving "vertical slice" mechanical design, low power
consumption, and innovative dual-function LED control lines make the module an
excellent fit for miniature, cost-sensitive designs.
The EM500 is fully supported by TIDE software and a dedicated EM500 platform that
covers all hardware facilities of the module (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
For convenient testing and evaluation Tibbo offers the EM500EV development
system.
The EM500 can be ordered standalone or in combination with an industry-standard
RJ45 jack and/or other discrete components required to complete a working circuit.
Hardware features
Based on a second-generation Tibbo ASIC (T2000).
10/100BaseT auto-MDIX Ethernet port (no magnetics).
One serial port (CMOS-level):
- Baudrates of up to 460'800bps;
Embedded Modules
48

512KB flash memory; 256KB available for compiled Tibbo BASIC/C application; an
external flash IC can be connected if data storage is required.
208 bytes of EEPROM space for data storage.
8 general-purpose I/O lines (including 2 interrupt lines) and excluding TX and RX
lines of the serial port.
Control lines for two external dual-function status LEDs.
Additional control line for a dedicated Ethernet link LED.
RST input for an external reset source (which is required).
Power: 260mA @ 3.3V.
"Vertical slice" construction; dimensions: 18.5x16.0x6.5mm.
Firmware is upgradeable through the serial port or network (including "cold
upgrade" firmware uploads through the network).
(8), encryption/hash calculation functions (RC4, MD5, SHA-1), and more.
Platform objects:
- Fd** manages flash memory file system and direct sector access;
- Pat "plays" patterns on up to five LED pairs;
- Button monitors MD line (setup button);
- Sys in charge of general device functionality;
*MiniMo is a registered trademark of Tibbo Technology.
* Fully supported with the exception of fd.copyfirmware; requires an externally
connected flash IC.
49
Serial Port and General-purpose I/O Lines
Ethernet Port Lines
LED Lines
I/O pin assignment
Pin #
Function
Description
GPIO0/P0.0/INT0
(1,2,3)
interrupt line 0.
GPIO1/P0.1/INT1
(1,2,3)

interrupt line 1;
for flash disk operation, connect to SI and SO of
external flash.
(1,2)
GPIO2/P0.2
(1,2)
GPIO3/P0.3

for flash disk operation, connect to CLK of
external flash, also connect to 5.1K pull-up
resistor to VCC (3.3V).
(1,2)
GPIO4/P0.4
Embedded Modules
50
for flash disk operation, connect to CS of

external flash.
6
(1,2)
GPIO5/P0.5

for Wi-Fi operation, connect to DI and DO of
GA1000.
(1,2)
GPIO6/P0.6

for Wi-Fi operation, connect to CLK of GA1000,
also to reset-generating logic (NAND gates).
(1,2)
GPIO7/P0.7

for Wi-Fi operation, connect to CS of GA1000,
also to reset-generating logic (NAND gates).
(1)
RX
RX, W1, and din input of the serial port.
TX
TX, W1, and dout output of the serial port.
11
GND
System ground.
12
MD
Mode selection pin.
13
RST
Reset input, active low. Proper external reset is a

must.
14
SE
Link status LED control line.
15
SR
Dual-function red status LED control line.
16
SG
Dual-function green status LED control line.
17
RX-

input signal pair.
18
RX+

input signal pair.
19
TX-

output signal pair.
20
TX+

output signal pair.
21
AVCC
"Clean" power output for magnetics circuitry.
22
VCC

current consumption 260mA.
10
(1)
Notes:
Serial Port
and General-purpose I/O Lines
3.4.1.1
The EM500 has eight general-purpose I/O lines GPIO0-7 grouped into a single 8-bit
GPIO port P0, plus one serial port.
GPIO0 and GPIO1 lines double as interrupt inputs INT0 and INT1.
The serial port has four I/O lines: RX, TX, CTS, and RTS. TX and RX lines belong
exclusively to the serial port and are separate from the GPIO lines. CTS and RTS
lines do not exist independently. Rather, either GPIO0/INT0 or GPIO1/INT1 can be
selected to serve as the CTS line, while any of the GPIO0-7 lines can be selected to
serve as the RTS line.
51

The serial port of the EM500 can work in one of the three modes: UART, Wiegand,
or clock/data. TX, RX, CTS, and CTS lines have different names and functions in the
Wiegand and clock/data modes. Serial port operation is described in detail in the
documentation for the serial (ser.) object found inside the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual". Additionally, see the Platform-dependent Programming Information section
inside the EM500 platform documentation (same manual).
In total, the EM500 has ten I/O lines (GPIO0-7, TX, RX). The simplified structure of
one such I/O line is shown on the circuit diagram below. All lines are "quasibidirectional" and can be viewed as open collector outputs with weak pull-up
resistors. There is no explicit direction control. To "measure" an external signal
applied to a GPIO line, set this line to HIGH first, then read the state of the pin. It is
OK to drive the pin LOW externally when the pin outputs HIGH internally.
the output transistor is closed. All I/O lines are 3.3V, CMOS, 5V-tolerant. The
maximum load current for each line is 10mA.
Ethernet
Port Lines
3.4.1.2
The EM500 has a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. The onboard electronics of the EM500
do not include Ethernet magnetics, so magnetics circuitry must be connected
externally to pins TX+, TX-, RX+, RX-, and AVCC. The AVCC pin outputs clean
power for the magnetics circuitry, which is very sensitive to noise.
Please, note the following:
Do not combine the AVCC with the VCC (main power) pin.
You can use either a standalone magnetics part, or an RJ45 jack with integrated
magnetics (recommended). Here is a circuit diagram based on the UDE RT7114A1A1A part:
Embedded Modules
52
It is important to make the PCB wire connections between the pins of the EM500
and RJ45 jack (magnetics circuitry) as short as possible. Making the wires too long
may cause the noise level generated by your PCB surpass the maximum radiated
emission limits stipulated by FCC/CE regulations. Additionally, longer Ethernet lines
on the PCB will make Ethernet operation less stable.
Note that the circuit above shows an RJ45 jack with two LEDs. Further information
on the use of these LEDs can be found in the LED Lines topic.
Flash and
EEPROM Memory
3.4.1.3
The EM500 has 512KBytes of internal flash memory and 208 bytes of EEPROM
memory (see Specifications and Ordering Info).
A portion of the internal flash memory is used to store the TiOS firmware. When you
binary into.
The rest of this flash memory is available to your Tibbo BASIC/C application. The
internal flash memory cannot be used as a flash disk. The fd. object (see "TIDE and
Tibbo BASIC Manual") requires an external flash IC.
As shown on the schematic diagram below, this flash IC is ATMEL AT45DB041. When
connected, this flash IC is used exclusively by the fd. object and provides 1MB of
storage.
The 5.1K pull-up resistor is needed to "sharpen" SPI clock signal. EM500's
bidirectional GPIOs allow interconnecting SI and SO lines (this saves one GPIO
line!).
53
LED Lines
3.4.1.4
The EM500 has three LED control lines -- SG, SR, SE. All lines have the same
internal structure and the LEDs should be connected as shown on the schematic
diagram below. The maximum load for each line is 10mA. For a small LED, a 330 Ohm
series resistor will provide sufficient brightness.
The SG and SR lines are used to control two status LEDs found on Tibbo products.
These LEDs can show various flashing patterns indicating current device state (see
Appendix 1: Status LEDs). On the EM500, there is an added twist: the same pair of
status LEDs also indicates current Ethernet link status through LED brightness.
When a "live" Ethernet cable is not plugged into the RJ45 jack, flashing patterns
displayed by the status LEDs are "dimmed". That is, LEDs turn on at around 20% of
their nominal brightness. When a "live" Ethernet cable is plugged into the RJ45 jack,
flashing patterns are displayed at full brightness.
Embedded Modules
54
This dual functionality was designed into the EM500 for an important reason: Many
popular RJ45 jacks have two internal LEDs. With the EM500, it is possible to use
these LEDs both for the module state indication, and for Ethernet link indication.
This eliminates the need for any additional LEDs.
The third LED control line -- SE -- is a separate line for Ethernet link indication. The
SE LED will be on when the Ethernet interface is in the linked state.
There is no indication of the Ethernet link speed on the EM500. That is, there is no
LED control line to indicate whether the link is established in the 10BaseT or
100BaseT mode. Many networked devices have such an LED, but its existence has
become meaningless: it is actually very difficult to find any old-style 10Mb Ethernet
equipment in active use these days.
Power,3.4.1.5
The EM500 should be powered from a stabilized DC power supply with a nominal
output voltage of 3.3V (+/- 5% tolerance). The module's current consumption is
approximately 260mA. Providing an adequate power supply is very important -- a
poorly built circuit may affect the EM500's operation. We recommend that you use a
switching power supply. One example of such a circuit is shown below.
Proper external reset is a must! Reset pulse should be active LOW. We strongly
advise against using low-cost RC circuits and other unreliable methods of generating
reset pulses. Reset should be applied for as long as the power supply voltage is
below 2.9V. We recommend using a dedicated reset IC, such as the MCP130-300
device from Microchip. This part has a trip point at ~2.95V -- perfect for the
EM500.
If the EM500 is to serve as a communications co-processor in a larger system that
has its own CPU (microcontroller) it is also OK to control the RST line through a
general-purpose I/O pin of this CPU. Reset pulses for the EM500 can then be
generated programmatically, by setting the I/O pin of the CPU to LOW and then to
HIGH.
This circuit can handle input voltages in the 9-24V range.
Notes:
55

aluminum capacitors. This really helps reduce the noise produced by the power
supply.
your circuit.
Max.
16.0
Module height
Max.
18.5
Module width
Max.
6.5
Module thickness
Min.
5.5
Lead length
Aver.
1.27
Pin pitch
s1
Max.
3.7
Module footprint dimension
s2
Max.
2.8
s3
Aver.
1.0
contained herein.
Embedded Modules
56

The EM500 "MiniMo"* device is only available in a single configuration and can be
order as "EM500".
Ethernet interface

built-in
Serial ports
1 port, CMOS-level.
UART capabilities

Number of I/O lines
8 lines (this does not include the TX and RX lines of

the serial port);
all 8 lines are combined into an 8-bit port;

I/O line
10mA
Flash memory
512 KBytes, 320KBytes are available to store a

compiled Tibbo BASIC/C application;
this memory cannot be used as a flash disk.
EEPROM memory
208 bytes, 200 bytes are available to store

application data

voltage (VCC pin)
DC 3.3V, +/- 5%
Required external reset

circuit trip voltage
2.9-3.0V

pin)
260mA
10-90%
(excl. leads)
18.5x16.0x6.5mm
Pin diameter
0.4mm
Packaging
*Minimo is a registered trademark of Tibbo Technology Inc.

57
Introduction
While occupying miniscule 19x17mm on your PCB, the EM1202 BASIC-programmable

embedded module retains most features of the much larger EM1000 device. These
include 100Base/T Ethernet, four serial ports, onboard flash, EEPROM, and 24 I/O
lines that can be used to interface with external LCD, keypad, buzzer, and card
readers.
Thanks to its miniature dimensions, the EM1202 can be conveniently used as a
network front-end in automation, security, and data collection systems.
Manual"). For convenient testing and evaluation Tibbo offers EM1202EV evaluation
board. The EM1202 can also support Wi-Fi communications (this requires GA1000
add-on board).
Hardware features
"cross" cables). Standard Ethernet magnetics are NOT integrated into the module.
Embedded Modules
58

- 24 lines that are combined into three 8-bit ports;
external buzzer.
Four control lines for status LEDs:
- 2 lines for Ethernet status LED control.
Software- controlled onboard PLL to select the clock frequency of the device:
network.
Platform objects:
externally);
- Pat "plays" patterns on up to five LED pairs (LEDs must be connected
externally);
59

I/O Pin Assignment and Pin Function
Ethernet Port Lines
Serial Ports
LED Lines
I/O pin assignment
Pin #
Function
Description
(1,2)
GPIO28
General-purpose I/O line 28 (does not belong to any

8-bit port).
(1,2)
GPIO27

8-bit port).
(1,2)
GPIO26

8-bit port).
(1,2)
GPIO25

8-bit port).
Embedded Modules
60
(1,2)
GPIO24

8-bit port).
(1,2)
GPIO7/P0.7
(1,2)
GPIO6/P0.6
(1,2)
GPIO5/P0.5
(1,2)
GPIO4/P0.4
GPIO3/P0.3
GPIO2/P0.2
GPIO1/P0.1
GPIO0/P0.0
14
<No
connection>
This pin must be left unconnected.
15
GND
System ground.
16
GPIO30

8-bit port).
17
VCC

current consumption 300mA (100BaseT, PLL on).
18
GPIO29/CO

8-bit port);
10
(1,2)
11
(1,2)
12
(1,2)
13
(1,2)
(1,2)
(1,2)

19
GPIO31

8-bit port).
20
SG
21
RST
22
SR
23
MD
Mode selection pin.
24
GPIO8/P1.0/
RX0
GPIO16/P2.0/
INT0
GPIO9/P1.1/
TX0
GPIO17/P2.1/
INT1
GPIO10/P1.2/
RX1
GPIO18/P2.2/
INT2
GPIO11/P1.3/
TX1
GPIO19/P2.3/
INT3
GPIO12/P1.4/
RX2
(1,2)
(1,2)
25
(1,2,3)
26
(1,2)
27
(1,2,3)
28
(1,2)
29
(1,2,3)
30
(1)
31
(1,2,3)
32
(1,2)

interrupt line 0.
interrupt line 1.
interrupt line 2.
interrupt line 3.
61

33
GPIO20/P2.4/
INT4
GPIO13/P1.5/
TX2
GPIO21/P2.5/
INT5
GPIO14/P1.6/
RX3
GPIO22/P2.6/
INT6
GPIO15/P1.7/
TX3
GPIO23/P2.7/
INT7
40
AVCC
"Clean" 2.5V power output for magnetics circuitry.
41
TX-

output signal pair.
42
EG
43
TX+
Ethernet port, positive line of the differential output

signal pair.
44
EY
45
RX-
Ethernet port, negative line of the differential input

signal pair.
46
AGND
Analog ground.
47
RX+

signal pair.
(1,2,3)
34
(1,2)
35
(1,2,3)
36
(1,2)
37
(1,2,3)
38
(1,2)
39
(1,2,3)
interrupt line 4.
interrupt line 5.
interrupt line 6.
interrupt line 7.
Notes:
General-purpose
I/O Lines
3.5.1.1
The EM1202 has 32 general-purpose I/O lines (GPIO0 - GPIO31). 24 of these lines
are combined into three 8-bit ports. All lines are 3.3V, CMOS, 5V-tolerant. Maximum
load current for each I/O line is 10mA.
Simplified structure of one I/O line of the EM1202 is shown on the circuit diagram
below. Each line has an independent output buffer control. When the EM1202
powers up all I/O lines have their output buffers tri-stated (in other words, all I/O
lines are configured as inputs). You need to explicitly enable the output buffer of a
certain I/O line if you want this line to become an output.
modules, such as serial ports. Majority of those lines need to be correctly configured
as inputs or outputs -- this won't happen automatically. Several lines -- such as TX
and RX lines of the serial port when in the UART mode -- are configured as outputs
and inputs automatically when the serial port (or some other hardware block) is
Embedded Modules
62
enabled. For details see Platform-dependent Programming Information inside the

EM1202 platform documentation ("TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
\
Ethernet
Port Lines
3.5.1.2
EM1202 do not include Ethernet magnetics, so magnetic circuitry must be
clean 2.5V power for the magnetics circuitry, which is very sensitive to noise.
Separate AGND analog ground is also provided. Please, note the following:
Do not combine AVCC with the VCC (main power) pin. This will apply wrong
voltage to the AVCC pin. Doing so appears to be causing no immediate permanent
damage to the EM1202, but the circuit will not work and the effects of prolonged
You can use either a standalone magnetics part (such as YCL-PH163112) or RJ45
connector with integrated magnetics (i.e. YCL-PTC1111-01G). Here is a connection
diagram for the YCL-PTC1111-01G jack with integrated magnetics.
63
It is important to make the PCB wire connections between the Ethernet port pins of
the EM1202 and external magnetics circuitry as short as possible. Making the wires
too long may cause the noise level generated by your PCB to surpass the maximum
radiated emission limits stipulated by FCC/CE regulations. Additionally, longer
Ethernet lines on the PCB will make your board more susceptible to the damage from
the ESD (electrostatic discharge). Follow these three recommendations:
Route TX+, TX-, RX+, RX- in such a way that they do not cross each other. Try
to avoid using vias (keep on the same board side).
Keep more or less uniform distance between "+" and "-" traces of each pair.
The EM1202 also has two Ethernet status LED control lines- see here for details.
Serial Ports
3.5.1.3
Square3.5.1.4
Wave Generator
Manual".
Flash and
EEPROM Memory
3.5.1.5
memory.
binary into.
Embedded Modules
64
Manual").
LED Lines
3.5.1.6
The EM1202 has four LED control lines -- SG, SR, EG, and EY. All lines have the
same internal structure and the LEDs should be connected to these lines as shown
on the schematic diagram below. Maximum load for each line is 10mA.
Power,3.5.1.7
output voltage of 3.3V (+/- 5% tolerance). Current consumption of the EM1202 is
approximately 230mA (PLL on, 100BaseT mode). Providing an adequate power supply
is very important -- poorly built circuit may affect EM1000 operation. We
The main clock frequency of the EM1202 is generated by an 11.0592MHz crystal
Naturally, with PLL on the EM1202 works 8 times faster and consumers more current
(230mA with PLL on against 110mA with PLL off). Main clock frequency also affects
the baudrates of serial ports when in the UART mode, as well as the frequency
produced by the square wave generator.
65

when PLL mode changes its output needs some time to stabilize. For this reason,
the PLL mode of the EM1202 can only be changed on reset. A special internal delay
circuit will hold the EM1202 in reset while PLL frequency stabilizes.
Unlike the EM1000, the EM1202 does not have a hardware pin to control the state
of the PLL. On power up, the PLL is always enabled. Your Tibbo BASIC/C application
can change the PLL mode programmatically. The application can check the current
PLL mode through the system (sys.) object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual"). If
the PLL mode needs to be changed, the application can set new mode and then
perform an internal reset (again, through the system object). The internal reset is
identical to the power-on or external reset with one difference: the PLL mode will
not default to "PLL on" but instead will be set as requested by the application prior
to the reset.
Notes:
your circuit.
Embedded Modules
66
L
W
H
I
p
Max.
Max.
Max.
Min.
Aver.
17.1
19.1
14.6
2.5
1.27
Module length
Module width
Module height (option without supercapacitor)
Lead length
Pin pitch
contained herein.


67

Model number
Description
EM1202-512K
This is an obsolete device with only 512KBytes of flash

memory
EM1202-1024K
EM1202 module with 1024KBytes of flash memory
EM1202
EM1202 module with 1024KBytes of flash memory
Ethernet interface

built-in
Serial ports
UART capabilities

Number of I/O lines
32 lines, all lines are 5V-tolerant;

24 of I/O lines are combined into five 8-bit ports;

I/O line
10mA

external buzzer
Clock frequency

Flash memory
512KBytes or 1024KBytes, entire memory minus

64KB is available to store Tibbo BASIC/C application
and data
EEPROM memory

application data

voltage (VCC pin)
DC 3.3V, +/- 5%

(VCC pin)

rising)
is dropping)

pin), not including
hardware consumed by an
add-on modules plugged
into the EM1000

10-90%
(excl. leads)
17.1x19.1x14.6mm
Embedded Modules
Pin diameter
0.4mm
Packaging
68
EM200
Important notices:
1. This device is also supplied with a non-programmable, fixedfunction, ready-to-use serial device server firmware. Refer to
the "Serial-over-IP Solutions Manual" for more information.
Introduction
The EM200 is a BASIC-programmable embedded module that can serve as a
networking coprocessor of your "connected" device. The firmware of the EM200,
called TiOS, features a virtual machine that executes your application written in
Tibbo BASIC/C. The EM200 has no pre-defined functionality whatsoever -programmability in Tibbo BASIC/C means that you can create your own unique
EM200 applications!
Each hardware faculty of the EM200 is supported by a sophisticated programming
"object" which you interact with from the Tibbo BASIC/C application. Together,
objects form a "platform" that defines EM200 capabilities from the programming point
of view.
The EM200 platform, along with the Tibbo BASIC/C language and TIDE software is
described in the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual".
Hardware features
Very compact dimensions (32.1 x 18.5 x 7.3 mm).
One 100/10BaseT Ethernet port. Standard Ethernet magnetics are NOT integrated
into the module.
One serial ports (CMOS-level):
- The port can work in the UART, Wiegand, or clock/data mode. Support of
Wiegand and clock/data interfaces is a unique feature of Tibbo devices.
- UART supports:
- baudrates of up to 115'200bps;
- none/even/odd/mark/space parity modes;
- full-duplex mode with optional flow control, half-duplex mode with
automatic direction control.
128KBytes of flash memory. First 64KB are used to store device firmware (TiOS).
The rest is available to your Tibbo BASIC/C application.
2KBytes of EEPROM memory.
9 general-purpose I/O lines.
The following lines are additionally available:
69

- 2 lines for Ethernet status LED control;
- 1 line to connect the "system" button.
- External reset input.
Device firmware can be upgraded through the serial port or Ethernet.
Tibbo BASIC/C application can be uploaded and debugged through the Ethernet.
The following data types and related functions are supported:
- Byte and char (occupy 1 byte);
- Integer (word) and short (occupy 2 bytes);
- String, can be up to 255 characters long;
The following function groups are supported:
- Conversion to and from strings: asc, chr, val, str, left, mid, right, len, instr,
etc. (16 function in total);
The following objects form the EM200 platform:
- Sockets (sock.) object -- supports up to 16 simultaneous UDP or TCP
connections, or HTTP sessions;
- Ethernet (net.) object -- controls Ethernet interface;
- Serial (ser.) object -- supports UART, Wiegand, and clock/data modes;
- Input/output (io.) object -- handles I/O lines;
- EEPROM (stor.) object -- facilitates access to the EEPROM memory;
- ROM data (romfile.) object -- provides access to the fixed ("ROM") data of
your Tibbo BASIC/C application;
- LED pattern (pat.) object -- "plays" patterns on Green and Red Status LEDs;
- System button (btn.) object -- handles special system (MD) button;
- System (sys.) object -- controls general device functionality.
Embedded Modules
70
The information on various hardware faculties of the EM200 can be found in the
following topics:
Ethernet Port Lines
Serial Port and General-purpose I/O Lines
LED Lines
I/O pin assignment
Pin #
Function
Description
EG
EY
RX+
RX-
3.3Vout
TX+
TX-
GPIO8
Ethernet port, positive line of the

differential input signal pair.
Ethernet port, negative line of the
differential input signal pair.
"Clean" 3.3V power for magnetics
circuitry.
Ethernet port, positive line of the
differential output signal pair.
Ethernet port, negative line of the
differential output signal pair.
GPIO7
10
GPIO6
71

11
GPIO1
12
GPIO0
13
VCC
14
GND
Positive power input, 5V nominal, +/5%, max. current consumption 50mA

System ground.
15
GPIO3/DTR(1)
General-purpose I/O line 3;

conventionally also DTR output line of
the serial port.
16
GPIO2/DSR(2)
General-purpose I/O line 2;

conventionally also DSR output line of
the serial port.
17
TX/W1out/dout(1)
TX, W1, and dout output of the serial

port.
18
RX/W1in/din(1)
RX, W1, and din input of the serial port.

(1)
19
GPIO4/CTS/W0&1in/cin
General-purpose I/O line 4; also CTS,

W0&1, and cin input of the serial port.
20
GPIO5/RTS/W0out/cout(1)
General-purpose I/O line 5; also RTS,

W0, and cout output of the serial port.
21
SG
22
SR
23
RST
24
MD
Mode selection pin.
Ethernet
Port Lines
3.6.1.1
Ethernet port of the EM200 is of 100/10BaseT type. Onboard electronics of the
EM200 do not include Ethernet magnetics, so magnetic circuitry must be connected
externally. You can use either a standalone magnetics part (such as YCL-PH163112)
or RJ45 connector with integrated magnetics (for example, YCL-PTC1111-01G).
Drawings below show circuit diagrams for both parts.
Please, note the following:
The 3.3Vout is an output that provides clean power for the magnetics circuitry,
which is very sensitive to noise.
Do not combine 3.3Vout with the VCC (main power) pin. This is counterproductive and will cause FCC/CE certification issues.
Embedded Modules
72
It is important to make the PCB traces connecting the Ethernet port pins of the
EM200 to the magnetics circuitry as short as possible. Making the wires too long
may cause the noise level generated by your PCB to surpass the maximum radiated
emission limits stipulated by the FCC and CE regulations. Additionally, longer
Ethernet lines on the PCB will make your board more susceptible to the ESD
(electrostatic discharge) damage.
73
Serial Port
and General-purpose I/O Lines
3.6.1.2
The EM200 features a serial port (RX, TX lines), plus nine general-purpose I/O lines
(GPIO0-8). All of the above lines are of CMOS type. Maximum load current for each
I/O line is 10mA.
The serial port of the EM200 can work in one of the three modes: UART, Wiegand,
or clock/data. All three modes are described in detail in the documentation for the
serial (ser.) object found inside the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual". Additionally, see
the Platform-dependent Programming Information" section inside the EM200 platform
documentation (same manual).
Simplified structure of EM200's I/O lines is shown on the circuit diagram below. All
lines are "quasi-bidirectional" and can be viewed as open collector outputs with
weak pull-up resistor. There is no explicit direction control. To "measure" an external
signal applied to a pin the OUT line must first be set to HIGH. It is OK to drive the
pin LOW externally when the pin outputs HIGH internally.
Flash and
EEPROM Memory
3.6.1.3
The EM200 has 128KBytes of flash memory and 2KBytes of EEPROM memory.
Half of the flash memory (64KB) is used to store the TiOS firmware. When you are
performing a firmware upgrade it is this memory you are saving the firmware binary
into.
The second half of the flash (64KB) is available to your Tibbo BASIC/C application.
area called "special configuration area". The EEPROM is accessed through the
storage (stor.) object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual"). Details on the special
configuration area are provided in the Platform-dependent Programming Information
section inside the EM200 platform documentation (same manual).
LED Lines
3.6.1.4
The EM200 has four LED control lines -- SG, SR, EG, and EY. All lines have the same
internal structure and the LEDs should be connected to these lines as shown on the
schematic diagram below. Maximum load for each line is 10mA.
Embedded Modules
74
Power,3.6.1.5
output voltage of 5V (+/- 5% tolerance). Current consumption of the EM200 is
approximately 220mA (in 100BaseT mode). Providing an adequate power supply is
very important -- poorly built circuit may affect EM200 operation. We recommend
that you use a switching power supply circuit. One (but not the only) example of
such circuit is shown below.
Proper external reset is a must! Reset pulse should be an active HIGH. We strongly
advise against using low-cost RC-networks and other unreliable methods of
generating reset pulse. Reset should be applied for as long as the power supply
voltage is below 4.6V. We recommend using a dedicated reset IC with brownout
detection, such as MAX810. Reset pulse length should be no less than 50ms,
counting from the moment the power supply voltage exceeds 4.6V.
If the EM200 is used to serve as a communications co-processor in a larger system
that has its own CPU it is also OK to control the RST line of the EM200 through a
general-purpose I/O pin of the "host" microcontroller. I/O pins of many
microcontrollers default to HIGH after the powerup and this means that proper reset
will be applied to the EM200 when the host device is switched on. All the host
microcontroller has to do is release the EM200 from reset at an appropriate time by
switching the state of the I/O line to LOW.
75
Notes:
U1 (MC35063) is a very popular power IC manufactured by ON Semiconductor.
R1 is very important. It is just 1 (one!) Ohm, but we really do not recommend the
user to omit it.
R2 and R3 are "1% tolerance" (high-precision) because they define the output
voltage of the power supply.
and heavy loads. R1 can be adjusted to achieve a better (cleaner) square
wave signal on a particular PCB layout. There are no recipes here -- just try
and see what works for your circuit.
Embedded Modules
L
W
H
I
m
d
p
Max.
Max.
Max.
Min.
Max.
Aver.
Aver.
32.1
18.5
7.3
2.2
0.5
28.0
1.27
76
Module length
Module width
Module height
Lead length
Lead "flash"
Distance between lead rows
Pin pitch
contained herein.

The EM200 has two sub-models in circulation- the EM200-00 and EM200-01. The
EM200-01 is a RoHS-compliant version of the EM200-00. There are no other
differences between these two versions. Currently, only the EM200-01 is being
manufactured.
Specifications
Ethernet interface
Serial ports
UART capabilities
Number of I/O lines

I/O line
Flash memory
EEPROM memory
Supported network
protocols(1)
Number of simultaneous
UDP or TCP (HTTP)
connections(1)
voltage (VCC pin)
Max. operating current
Device temperature during
operation(2)
(excl. leads)
Pin diameter
Packaging
100/10BaseT Ethernet, magnetics not built-in

1 port; UART, Wiegand(1), and clock/data(1) modes
space parity and 7/8 bits/char.; full-duplex UART
mode with optional flow control(1) and half-duplex
UART mode with automatic direction control(1); RX,
TX, RTS(1), CTS(1), DTR(1), and DSR(1) lines provided.
9 (TX and RX lines of the serial port are not included
into this count)
10mA
128KBytes, 64KB available for your Tibbo BASIC/C
application
2048 bytes, 2040 bytes available to store application
data
UDP(1), TCP(1), ICMP (ping)(1), and HTTP(1). Other
protocols (such as DHCP) are implemented as Tibbo
BASIC/C functions.
16(1)
DC 5V, +/- 5%
220mA
55 degrees C
10-90%
32.1x18.5x7.3mm
0.4mm
EM200-01: tube, 10 modules/tube
EM200-B-01: tray, 30 modules/tray
77
Notes:
1. Actually a feature of TiOS firmware.
2. Measured at 22 degrees C ambient temperature, in the non-enclosed
environment.
Boards
The following boards and board families are currently being offered by Tibbo:
EM1001
NB10x0 and IB100x Boards
DS1206N
EM1202EV
EM1206EV
EM120/EM200-EV
EM1001 BASIC/C-programmable Ethernet Board
Introduction
The EM1001 is Tibbo's most powerful and versatile BASIC-programmable Ethernet
board. The EM1001 is a close relative of the EM1000 Ethernet module. Two devices
have the same feature set, including the 10/100BaseT Ethernet port, four serial
ports, onboard flash disk, EEPROM, and the RTC with optional backup
supercapacitor. Like the EM1000, the EM1001 board can control a GA1000 Wi-Fi
add-on, as well as an external LCD, keypad, buzzer, and many other peripheral
components.
Unlike the EM1000, the EM1001 us a self-sufficient board: it has a 12V-to-3.3V
switching power regulator, RJ45 connector with magnetics, three LEDs, and the MD
button. Thus, the EM1001 does not require a host board to plug into. The EM1001 is
the host board. As such, the EM1001 is equally suited to low-volume production
Boards
78
devices and hobbyist projects alike.

The EM1001 is fully supported by TIDE software. The board shares the same
platform with the EM1000 module (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Hardware features
10/100BaseT auto-MDIX Ethernet port with RJ45/magnetics (MDIX feature means
automatic detection of "straight" and "cross" cables).
Optional Wi-Fi interface (requires the GA1000 add-on module).
1024KB flash memory for firmware, application, and data storage.
RTC with an optional onboard supercapacitor.
- 40 lines that are combined into five 8-bit ports;
external buzzer.
Three LEDs onboard:
- Green and red status LEDs;
- Yellow Ethernet status LED.
Control lines for external green and red status LEDs.
MD button onboard.
RST and MD control lines.
Reliable power-on/ brown-out reset circuit.
Power options:
- Through the switching power regulator: 8-20V supplied via the power jack or VIN
line;
- Direct 3.3V power: regulated 3.3V supplied via the 3.3V line.
Available current: when powered through the switching regulator, the EM1001 can
supply up to 1A of power through its 3.3V pin (1.3A without the GA1000).
Dimensions: 75x36x17.5mm (not including protruding RJ45 and power jack;
GA1000, when installed, adds 1.5mm to the combined device height).
79

network.
debugging hardware (such as a JTAG board) is required.
Platform objects:
- Wln handles the Wi-Fi interface (requires the GA1000 add-on module);
externally);
- Pat "plays" patterns on up to five LED pairs (2 LEDs onboard, additional LEDs
must be connected externally);
- Button monitors the MD line (button);
Boards
80
Wireless add-on port
Ethernet Port
Serial Ports
Real-time Counter
LED Lines
Power, Reset, PLL Control, and Mode Selection Lines
I/O pin assignment
81

Pin
#
Function
Description
(1,2)
GPIO0/P0.0
(1,2)
GPIO1/P0.1
(1,2)
GPIO2/P0.2
(1,2)
GPIO3/P0.3
(1,2)
GPIO4/P0.4
(1,2)
GPIO5/P0.5
(1,2)
GPIO6/P0.6
(1,2)
GPIO7/P0.7
(1,2)
GPIO8/P1.0/RX0

10
GPIO9/P1.1/TX0
(1,2)
11
(1,2)
12
(1,2)
13
(1,2)
14
(1,2)
15
(1,2)
16
(1,2)
17
(1,2,3)
18
(1,2,3)
19
(1,2,3)
20
(1,2,3)
21
(1,2,3)
22
(1,2,3)
23
(1,2,3)
24
(1,2,3)
25

GPIO10/P1.2/
RX1
GPIO11/P1.3/
TX1
GPIO12/P1.4/
RX2
GPIO13/P1.5/
TX2
GPIO14/P1.6/
RX3
GPIO15/P1.7/
TX3
GPIO16/P2.0/
INT0
GPIO17/P2.1/
INT1
GPIO18/P2.2/
INT2
GPIO19/P2.3/
INT3
GPIO20/P2.4/
INT4
GPIO21/P2.5/
INT5
GPIO22/P2.6/
INT6
GPIO23/P2.7/
INT7
GPIO40

any 8-bit port).
GPIO41

any 8-bit port).
(1,2)
26
(1,2)

interrupt line 0.
interrupt line 1.
interrupt line 2.
interrupt line 3.
interrupt line 4.
interrupt line 5.
interrupt line 6.
interrupt line 7.
Boards
27
82
GPIO42

any 8-bit port).
GPIO43

any 8-bit port).
29
GND
System ground.
30
GPIO44
GPIO25/P3.1
GPIO24/P3.0
GPIO27/P3.3
GPIO26/P3.2
GPIO29/P3.5
GPIO28/P3.4
GPIO31/P3.7
GPIO30/P3.6
GPIO33/P4.1
GPIO32/P4.0
GPIO35/P4.3
GPIO34/P4.2
GPIO37/P4.5
GPIO36/P4.4
GPIO39/P4.7
GPIO38/P4.6
47
MD
Mode selection pin. Connected in parallel with the

onboard MD button. Use an open collector circuit
to control this line as pressing the MD button
short-circuits the line onto the GND.
48
<TEST PIN>
Leave this pin unconnected.
49
RST
50
PM
PLL control line (HIGH- PLL ON, LOW- PLL OFF).
51
SR
Red status LED control line. Also connected to the

onboard LED. Maximum load on this line is 3mA.
Use a buffer (logic gate) if higher current is
desired.
52
SG
Green status LED control line. Also connected to

the onboard LED. Maximum load on this line is
3mA. Use a buffer (logic gate) if higher current
is desired.
53
GPIO46
(1,2)
28
(1,2)
(1,2)
31
(1,2)
32
(1,2)
33
(1,2)
34
(1,2)
35
(1,2)
36
(1,2)
37
(1,2)
38
(1,2)
39
(1,2)
40
(1,2)
41
(1,2)
42
(1,2)
43
(1,2)
44
(1,2)
45
(1,2)
46
(1,2)
(1,2)
83

54
GPIO45/CO
(1,2)

any 8-bit port);
55
GPIO48

any 8-bit port).
GPIO47

any 8-bit port).
57
DBGRX
RX line of debug serial port (details to be

published).
58
3.3V
Output of the onboard 3.3V regulator. Can supply

up to 1A of current to external devices (1.3A
without the GA1000).
(1,2)
56
(1,2)
This line can also be used to power the EM1001.

Use regulated 3.3V power source only!
59
DBGTX
TX line of debug serial port (details to be

published).
60
VIN
Switching regulator supply voltage in the 8-20V

range. The regulator generates 3.3V power for the
onboard circuitry, GA1000, and external devices
connected to the 3.3V line.
There is no need to use this input if the EM1001 is
powered directly through the 3.3V line.
This line is also connected to the positive terminal
on the power jack.
61 (4)
GND
System ground.
(4)
3.3V
3.3V power available on this pin. Do not connect

to the power source.
GPIO49

any 8-bit port).
64
---
No connection.
65
GPIO50

any 8-bit port).
66
---
No connection.
67
GPIO51

any 8-bit port).
68
---
No connection.
69
GPIO52

any 8-bit port).
GPIO53

any 8-bit port).
62
63
(1,2,4)
(1,2,4)
(1,2,4)
(1,2,4)
70
(1,2,4)
Notes:
2. This line can be mapped to serve as an RTS/Wout/cout line of a serial port
(provided that this does not interfere with any other function).
4. This pin is on the wireless add-on connector.
Boards
84
General-purpose
I/O Lines
4.1.1.1
CMOS, 5V-tolerant lines. Maximum load current for each I/O line is 10mA. 49 of
these lines are always available. Remaining 5 lines are located on the wireless addon connector and can be used if no wireless add-on module is installed.
40 of the I/O lines are combined into five 8-bit ports.
The simplified structure for one I/O line is shown on the circuit diagram below. Each
line has an independent output buffer control. When the EM1001 powers up, all I/O
lines have their output buffers tri-stated (in other words, all I/O lines are configured
as inputs). You need to explicitly enable the output buffer of a certain I/O line if you
want this line to work as an output.
modules, such as serial ports. The majority of those lines need to be correctly
configured as inputs or outputs -- this won't happen automatically. Several lines -such as TX and RX lines of the serial port when in the UART mode -- are configured
as outputs and inputs automatically when the serial port (or some other hardware
block) is enabled. For details see "Platform-dependent Programming Information
inside the EM1000 platform documentation ("TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Wireless
Add-on Port
4.1.1.2
The wireless add-on port of the EM1001 is a separate 10-pin connector.
This port carries 5 general-purpose I/O lines. When a wireless add-on module, such
as the GA1000 Wi-Fi add-on, is plugged into the EM1001 these lines are used for
interfacing to this add-on. In the absence of a wireless module these 5 lines may be
used as general-purpose input/output lines.
It should be noted that the GA1000 can be controlled through any five I/O lines of
the EM1001. Obviously, the lines on the wireless add-on port are the most
convenient for the task as the connector pinout matches that of the GA1000.
Nonetheless, it is always possible to connect the GA1000 by wires, in which case
any combination of I/O lines can be used for communicating with it.
For more details on Wi-Fi communications see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual" (wln.
object).
85
Ethernet
Port
4.1.1.3
The Ethernet port of the EM1001 is of 10/100BaseT type.

The connector is of the RJ45 type, pin assignment is as follows:
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
TX+
TXRX+
PoE+
PoE+
RXPoEPoE-
Serial Ports
4.1.1.4
Square4.1.1.5
Wave Generator
Manual".
Flash and
EEPROM Memory
4.1.1.6
The EM1001 has 1024KBytes of flash memory and 2KBytes of EEPROM memory.
binary into.
Boards
86
Manual").
Real-time
Counter and Backup Supercap
4.1.1.7
As a source of backup power, the EM1001 relies on a supercapacitor. Only EM1001S devices carry this supercapacitor (see Specifications and Ordering Info).
The supercapacitor has many advantages -- it charges instantly and has a virtually
unlimited lifespan. The disadvantage is that the supercapacitor is only able to
sustain the RTC for several days (about 6 days for the 4F supercapacitor of the
EM1001-S), which may appear insufficient. Remember, however, that the EM1001 is
usually connected to the network and can always synchronize its clock* with an
Internet time server or a master clock on the main server of your system.
Therefore, the role of the supercapacitor is to provide the backup power during
relatively short periods of power interruption, i.e. when the device is unplugged and
moved to another location, or when the device is powered off over the weekend.
Your Tibbo BASIC/C application can access the RTC through the RTC (rtc.) object,
which is documented in the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual".
*With the right application, that is.
LEDs and
LED Lines
4.1.1.8
The EM1001 has three LEDs onboard:
The red and green status LEDs.
The yellow Ethernet status LED.
The EM1001 also has two control lines -- SG and SR -- for connecting to external
green and red status LEDs. These external LEDs work in parallel with the onboard
LEDs. Since the maximum sink current of an I/O line is 10mA and the onboard LEDs
already consume around 7mA, externally connected LEDs must not consume over
3mA of current. Connect external SR and SG LEDS through buffers (logic gates) if
higher current is desired. SG and SR lines are active low, i.e. an LEDs must turn on
when its control line is at LOW. Take this into consideration when designing the LED
circuit.
Your Tibbo BASIC/C application can control red and green status LEDs, as well as up
to four externally connected LED pairs through the pattern (pat.) object, which is
documented in the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual".
87
Power,4.1.1.9
Reset, PLL Control, MD Button, and Mode Lines
The EM1001 consumes around 250mA @ 3.3V of current (PLL on, 100BaseT mode,
all onboard LEDs on).
There are two ways to power the EM1001.
Powering through the regulator
The onboard switching regulator has the 8-20V input range and delivers enough
current to power the EM1001 itself, the GA1000 Wi-Fi add on, PLUS external loads
with up to 1A of combined current.
To use the regulator, connect the power source to the power jack or GND and VIN
pins. The power jack and GND/VIN are wired in parallel, with no diodes or any other
circuitry between them.
The regulator has a single diode in front of it. The diode will protect the regulator if
the power is accidentally connected in reverse.
External loads can be powered through the 3.3V pin. When the board is powered
through the regulator, this pin serves as a power output. Up to 1A of current is
available with the GA1000 installed, 1.3A available if the GA1000 is not installed.
Using direct 3.3V power
It is also possible to power the EM1001 through the GND and 3.3V lines. In this case
the 3.3V pin serves as a power input and the regulator is bypassed. The 3.3V power
source should be regulated to at least +/-10%.
Board reset
circuit with brown-out detection. You can optionally connect a reset button or
some other reset-generating circuit to the RST pin. This will allow you to generate
"external" resets. The RST line has active HIGH polarity. If you are not using the
RST line you can leave it unconnected.
PLL
The main clock frequency of the EM1001 is generated by the 11.0592MHz crystal
Naturally, with PLL turned on the EM1001 works 8 times faster and consumers more
current (250mA @ 3.3V with PLL on vs. 130mA with PLL off). Main clock frequency
also affects the baudrates of serial ports when in the UART mode, as well as the
frequency produced by the square wave generator.
when the PLL mode changes its output needs some time to stabilize. For this
Boards
88
reason, the PLL mode of the EM1001 can only be changed on reset. A special
internal delay circuit will hold the EM1001 in reset while the PLL frequency stabilizes.
The state of the PM pin at power-up or after the external reset (i.e. reset pulse on
the RST line) defines whether the EM1001 will run with PLL on or off. To have the
PLL on, leave the PM pin unconnected. To disable PLL and run at lower clock
frequency ground the PM pin prior to turning on the power or resetting the board.
Your Tibbo BASIC/C application can also change the PLL mode programmatically.
The Tibbo BASIC/C application can check the current PLL mode through the system
(sys.) object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual"). If the PLL mode needs to be
changed the application must set the desired new mode and then perform an
internal reset (again, through the system object). The internal reset is identical to
the power-on or external reset with one crucial difference: the PLL mode is set
basing on the mode requested by the application, while the PM line state is
disregarded.
MD button and line
The function of the MD button/line is described in Appendix 2: Setup Button (MD
line). The EM1001 board has both the button and the MD line. The button is wired in
parallel with the MD line. Use an open collector circuit to control the MD line as
pressing the MD button short-circuits the line onto the GND.
89
contained herein.

Boards
Ethernet interface
10/100BaseT Ethernet, Auto-MDIX, with RJ45/

magnetics
Serial ports
4 ports, CMOS-level
UART capabilities
Baudrates up to 921'600bps; none/even/odd/

mark/space parity and 7/8 bits/character
Number of I/O lines
54 lines (including 5 on the wireless add-on

connector);
90

40 of I/O lines are combined into five 8-bit
ports;
Max. load current for each I/
O line
10mA

external buzzer
40 bit, increments at 128Hz
RTC backup power source ("S" version only)
Supercapacitor, supports RTC for approximately

6 days
Clock frequency

Flash memory
1024KBytes, the entire memory minus 64KB is

available for storing Tibbo BASIC/C application
and data
EEPROM memory
2048 bytes, 2040 bytes available for storing

application data
Switching regulator supply

voltage (supplied via the
power jack or VIN pin)
Direct system power
(supplied via the 3.3V pin
bypassing the switching
regulator)
Available current on the 3.3V
pin (when powering through
the voltage regulator)
unregulated, 8-20V input range, 12V nominal

(3.3V system power line)
3.0V on power-up (i.e. when the voltage is

rising)
2.9V on brown-out (i.e. when the voltage is
dropping)
Operating current when the

3.3V is supplied directly
through the 3.3V pin

10-90%
(excluding RJ45 and power
EM1001: 75x36x17.5mm
EM1001G: 75x36x19mm
regulated, 3.3V +/- 10%
1.0A if the GA1000 is used

1.3A if the GA1000 is not used
91

jack)
NB10x0 and IB100x Boards

The NB10x0 and IB100x boards offered by Tibbo allow you to quickly create a
BASIC-programmable communication, control, or data acquisition system from a set
of standard components. A pair of boards -- one network board ("NB"), and one
interface board ("IB") -- form a complete system, as shown on the drawing below.
Both boards have the same outline dimensions.
The network board acts as a "connected brain" of your system. It also carries a
3.3V switching power regulator. This 3.3V power is provided to the interface board
as well.
The Interface board implements all necessary I/O functionality. You can choose a
Boards
92
standard board manufactured by Tibbo or create your own interface board

containing just the right mix of I/O circuitry required for your project.
The network board and the interface board are joined together by an IC1000
interboard cable. The wiring of this cable is standard and allows you to connect any
"NB" board to any "IB" board. One IC1000 cable is provided with each "NB" board
(but not with "IB" boards).
Where the required I/O components cannot fit on the interface board alone, a
supplementary board ("SB") is used. The supplementary board sits on top of the
interface board and can be almost as large as the latter (see here for mechanical
spec). Connections (connectors) between the interface board and the
supplementary board are not standardized and are implemented as needed for a
particular "IB" + "SB" combination. There is no direct connection between the
supplementary board and the network board.
To indicate various system states, there are LB100x LED boards. Each LB100x board
accommodates up to 11 LEDs. A typical system uses two standard LED boards -the LB1000 on the "NB" side, and the LB1001 on the "IB" side. LED boards connect
to "NB" and "LB" boards by a flat LC1000 cable. Network and interface boards have
mounting holes for optionally attaching LB100x boards to them. A custom-made
"brass offset" part BP1000 is used for the purpose. LED boards can also be mounted
independently. Ordering any "NB" or "IB" board also gets you an LED board and
LC1000 cable, which will come attached to said "NB" or "LB" board.
Tibbo NB10x0 and IB100x boards can be used "as is" or with a stylish, industrialgrade housing -- the DS10xx series industrial controllers are based on these boards
as well. The NB1000 and IB1000 bords are also used in the EM1000-EV evaluation
kit.
NB10x0 Network Boards

At the moment, two models of the network board are being offered:
NB1000 -- Ethernet interface only
NB1010 -- Ethernet interface plus optional Wi-Fi and GPRS interfaces
93
NB10004.2.1.1
Board
The NB1000 board is based on the EM1000 embedded module. The board features
Ethernet network interface. If you require Wi-Fi or GPRS interfaces, use the NB1010
board instead.
The NB1000 product includes the LB1000 LED board as well. The NB1000 and the
LB1000 come assembled together and interconnected by the LC1000 cable.
Additionally, the NB1000 comes with the IC1000 interboard cable. Therefore, you
don't need to order the LB1000, LC1000, or IC1000 separately when purchasing the
NB1000 board.
Boards
94
Refer to the following topics to learn more about the NB1000:

Power Jack, Terminals, and Power Regulator
Ethernet Jack
Jumpers, Buttons, and LEDs
Buzzer
Power Jack, Terminals and Power Regulator

Power jack of the NB1000 accepts "small" power connectors with 3.5mm diameter.
Use 12VDC/1A APR-P0008 (APR-P0009, or APR-P0010) power adaptor supplied by
Tibbo or similar adaptor. On the power jack, the ground is "on the outside", as
shown on the figure below.
Another way to connect power is through the power terminals located next to the
power jack. Ground and "+" terminal positions are shown on the NB1000 drawing.
Acceptable supply power range is 10-18VDC (12VDC nominal).
The NB1000 carries an onboard 3.3V switching power regulator that provides
stabilized power to the NB1000 itself and to an IB100x interface board, connected
to the NB1000 via the IC1000 interboard cable.
95

Note, that the IC1000 interboard cable also has lines that carry "raw" input power
(Vin lines). The IB100x board you are using may have its own power supply.
Ethernet Jack
RJ45 Ethernet jack has the standard pin assignment:
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
TX+
TXRX+
<No connection>
<No connection>
RX<No connection>
<No connection>
Jumpers, Buttons and LEDs

PLL jumper
Leave this jumper open if you want the EM1000 onboard the NB1000 to run at full
speed (88.4736MHz). Close the jumper if you want the EM1000 to run at 1/8th the
full speed (11.0592MHz). Notice, that the jumper state is only recognized after the
power-up or external reset (caused by pressing the reset button). The PLL mode
can also be changed programmatically. For more information see Power, Reset, PLL
Control, and Mode Selection Lines topic of the EM1000 documentation.
MD jumper and mode button
The function of the mode button is described in Appendix 2: Setup Button (MD line).
On the NB1000 board, MD jumper is connected in parallel with the button.
US jumper
This jumper selects the serial port of the EM1000 that will be used for firmware
upgrades. When the jumper is opened, serial port 1 is used (TX0 (#17) and RX0
(#19) lines on the IC1000 interboard cable). Interface boards typically implement
serial port 1, thus making serial firmware upgrades possible.
When the US jumper is closed, debug serial port is used.
Reset button
This button is connected to the RST pin of the EM1000. Pressing this button causes
an "external" reset.
Ethernet Status LEDs
Boards
96
These are yellow and green LEDs connected to the EY and EG pins of the EM1000.

The NB1000 is intended to be used with the LB1000 board. This board provides:
Green and red LED pair.
Green and yellow LED pair.
LED bar comprising five yellow LEDs.
Green and red LED pair -- system status indication
These LEDs are controlled by the SG and SR pins of the EM1000. Further information
on status LEDs can be found in Appendix 1: Status LEDs.
Green and yellow LED pair -- Ethernet status indication
These LEDs are connected to the same EG and EY lines of the EM1000 that control
green and yellow LEDs on the NB1000 board itself.
LED bar -- wireless signal strength indication
These LEDs are controlled through three GPIO lines of the EM1000- GPIO46, GPIO47,
and GPIO48.
GPIO46 is the reset line of the LED bar. Clearing this line sets all five outputs to
LOW and this turns all LEDs ON. GPIO47 is a clock line- a positive (LOW-to-HIGH)
transition on this line "shifts in" the data on the GPIO48 line. The circuit that
controls the LEDs is shown below. LED numbers correspond to numbers shown on
the LB100x drawing.
If you want to switch an LED ON then set the data line LOW. The data bit for the
LED#1 (indicating the highest signal strength) is clocked in first. That's the short
explanation. In further detail, we can say:
GPIO 48 is the Data line; set it to the state that you wish the LED to be in, LOW
97

= ON, HIGH = OFF.
When you then pull GPIO 47 (Clock line) from its normal state (HIGH) to LOW and
then back to HIGH, the state of the Data line is read in and used for LED1.
If you want to turn on LED2 (for example) you have to set GPIO 48 to LOW,
toggle the clock once (HIGH-LOW-HIGH) which would set LED1 ON, set GPIO48 to
HIGH (because you want LED1 off) and then just toggle the clock again (HIGHLOW-HIGH). At this point, the state of LED1 would shift to LED2 (so LED2 would
light up).
So assuming that all LEDs are OFF and each row means that we have toggled
through one clock cycle:
Clock
cycle
Data
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LOW
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
LOW
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
HIGH
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
LOW
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
HIGH
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
As you can see, each clock cycle sets a new state for LED1 which directly
corresponds to the state of the Data line, and shifts all previous LED states.
Buzzer
The buzzer of the NB1000 is connected to the GPIO45/CO line of the onboard
EM1000.
Your application can control the buzzer through the "beeper" (beep.) object (see
"TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual"). Recommended value for the beep.divider property
is 21600.

Model number
Description
NB1000
The NB1000 board with the EM1000-1024K-S module,

IB1000 interboard connector, and LB1000 LED board
mounted on the NB1000 and connected to the latter
with the LC1000 cable.
If you wish to have Wi-Fi or GPRS ports on the NB board, please order the NB1010
product.
Ethernet interface
10/100BaseT Ethernet, Auto-MDIX
Supply voltage range
10-18VDC
10-90%
Boards
Board dimensions
76x85mm
Other details
See EM1000-1024K-S specification
98
NB10104.2.1.2
Board
Front (left) and back of the NB1010 board

The NB1010 board is functionally equivalent to the EM1000 embedded module. The
board features Ethernet, as well as optional Wi-Fi and GPRS network interfaces. If
99

you only need the Ethernet interface, then you may use the NB1000 board.
The NB1010 product includes the LB1000 LED board as well. The NB1010 and the
LB1000 come assembled together and interconnected by the LC1000 cable.
Additionally, the NB1010 comes with the IC1000 interboard cable. Therefore, you
don't need to order the LB1000, LC1000, or IC1000 separately when purchasing the
NB1010 board.
Read carefully the explanation about external antennas that should be used
when the NB1010 is ordered with Wi-Fi and/or GPRS options.
Refer to the following topics to learn more about the NB1000:

Power Jack, Terminals, and Power Regulator
Ethernet Jack
Jumpers, Buttons, and LEDs
Buzzer
Optional GPRS Interface
Power Jack, Terminals and Power Regulator

Power jack of the NB1010 accepts "small" power connectors with 3.5mm diameter.
Use 12VDC/1A APR-P0008 (APR-P0009, or APR-P0010) power adaptor supplied by
Tibbo or similar adaptor. On the power jack, the ground is "on the outside", as
Another way to connect power is through the power terminals located next to the
power jack. Ground and "+" terminal positions are shown on the NB1010 drawing.
Acceptable supply power range is 10-18VDC (12VDC nominal).
Boards
100
The NB1010 carries an onboard regulator that provides stabilized 3.3V power to the
NB1010 itself and to an IB100x interface board, connected to the NB1010 via the
IC1000 interboard cable.
Note, that the IC1000 interboard cable also has lines that carry "raw" input power
(Vin lines). The IB100x board you are using may have its own power supply.
Ethernet Jack
RJ45 Ethernet jack has the standard pin assignment:
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
TX+
TXRX+
<No connection>
<No connection>
RX<No connection>
<No connection>
Jumpers, Buttons and LEDs

PLL jumper
Leave this jumper open if you want the NB1010 to run at full speed (88.4736MHz).
Close the jumper if you want the NB1010 to run at 1/8th the full speed
(11.0592MHz). Notice, that the jumper state is only recognized after the power-up
or external reset (caused by pressing the reset button). The PLL mode can also be
changed programmatically.
MD jumper and mode button
The function of the mode button is described in Appendix 2: Setup Button (MD line).
On the NB1010 board, MD jumper is connected in parallel with the button.
US jumper
This jumper selects the serial port of the NB1010 that will be used for serial firmware
upgrades. When the jumper is opened, serial port 1 is used (TX0 (#17) and RX0
(#19) lines on the IC1000 interboard cable). Interface boards typically implement
serial port 1, thus making serial firmware upgrades possible.
101

When the US jumper is closed, debug serial port is used.
Reset button
Pressing this button causes an "external" reset.
Ethernet Status LEDs
Further information on Ethernet status LEDs can be found in Appendix 1: Status
LEDs.

The NB1010 is intended to be used with the LB1000 board. This board provides:
Green and red LED pair.
Green and yellow LED pair.
LED bar comprising five yellow LEDs.
Green and red LED pair -- system status indication
Green and yellow LED pair -- Ethernet status indication
Further information on Ethernet status LEDs can be found in Appendix 1: Status
LEDs.
LED bar -- wireless signal strength indication
Five yellow LEDs of the LED bar are intended primarily for the indication of the RF
signal strength (i.e. when the Wi-Fi and/or GPRS options are installed). These LEDs
are controlled through three GPIO lines 46, 47, and 48.
GPIO46 is the reset line of the LED bar. Clearing this line sets all five outputs to
LOW and this turns all LEDs ON. GPIO47 is a clock line- a positive (LOW-to-HIGH)
transition on this line "shifts in" the data on the GPIO48 line. The circuit that
controls the LEDs is shown below. LED numbers correspond to numbers shown on
the LB100x drawing.
Boards
102
If you want to switch an LED ON then set the data line LOW. The data bit for the
LED#1 (indicating the highest signal strength) is clocked in first. That's the short
explanation. In further detail, we can say:
GPIO 48 is the Data line; set it to the state that you wish the LED to be in, LOW
= ON, HIGH = OFF.
When you then pull GPIO 47 (Clock line) from its normal state (HIGH) to LOW and
then back to HIGH, the state of the Data line is read in and used for LED1.
If you want to turn on LED2 (for example) you have to set GPIO 48 to LOW,
toggle the clock once (HIGH-LOW-HIGH) which would set LED1 ON, set GPIO48 to
HIGH (because you want LED1 off) and then just toggle the clock again (HIGHLOW-HIGH). At this point, the state of LED1 would shift to LED2 (so LED2 would
light up).
So assuming that all LEDs are OFF and each row means that we have toggled
through one clock cycle:
Clock
cycle
Data
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LOW
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
LOW
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
HIGH
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
LOW
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
HIGH
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
As you can see, each clock cycle sets a new state for LED1 which directly
corresponds to the state of the Data line, and shifts all previous LED states.
103
Buzzer
The buzzer of the NB1010 is connected to the GPIO45/CO line.
is 21600.

The NB1010 can optionally accommodate the GA1000 Wi-Fi add-on module.
The following GPIO lines are used to control the GA1000:
GPIO line
49
Function
CS
(1 )
GA1000 pin
3
50
DO
51
RST
(2 )
52
DI
53
CLK
10
Notes:
1. "Data out" line of the NB1010, connects to the "data in" on the GA1000.
2. "Data in" line of the NB1010, connects to the "data out" on the GA1000.
Wi-Fi data communications is the responsibility of the sock. object (see see "TIDE
and Tibbo BASIC Manual"). Before such data communications can take place, the
Wi-Fi interface must be properly configured. This is jointly achieved by the wln.
object and WLN library (again, see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Optinal GPRS Interface

The NB1010 can optionally accommodate the GC864 GPRS module manufactured by
TELIT (www.telit.com).
The GPRS module is controlled through the serial port 4 of the NB1010. A dedicated
GPIO line 54 is used for multiplexing this serial port:
When the output buffer of the GPIO line 54 is disabled (default post-reset state),
or the line is at HIGH, the serial port 4 is switched to the interboard cable
connector (lines TX3 (#31), RX3 (#29), RTS3 (#7), and CTS3 (#39)).
When the output buffer of the GPIO line 54 is enabled and the line is LOW, the
serial port is switched to the GPRS module. In this state, your application can
communicate with the GPRS module through the serial port 4 (and use flow
control, too).
GPIO line 55 of the NB1010 is connected to the reset pin on the GPRS module. To
put the module in reset, enable this line and set it HIGH. For reliable reset, keep the
reset applied for at least 2 seconds. To release the module from reset, set the line
Boards
104
55 LOW. Note that the GC864 module module may take up to 1 minute to boot,
recognize the SIM card, and become operational.
GPIO line manipulation is performed using the io. object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual"). Another object -- ser. -- is responsible for serial port communications.
Actual data exchange via the GPRS module is the domain of the sock. object. Before
such data exchange can take place, the GPRS interface must be properly
configured. This is jointly achieved by the ppp. object and GPRS library (again, see
"TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Ordering
Info and Specifications
4.2.1.3
All NB1010 boards are equipped with 1024KBytes of flash memory.

NB1010 devices without "G", "C", or "GC" options are not being offered by Tibbo. If
you want to purchase Ethernet-only board (without any wireless options), then
order NB1000 instead.
Model number
Description
NB1010GC
The board with Wi-Fi and GPRS interfaces
NB1010C
The board with GPRS interface
External Antenna
The Wi-Fi interface works better when equipped with an antenna. In the absence of
Wi-Fi antenna, the Wi-Fi interface still works (relying on a small "chip" antenna on
the GA1000), but the operating range is reduced. The GPRS interface can't work
without the antenna at all. Therefore, consider purchasing necessary external
antennas as required by your application.
Ethernet interface
105

Wi-Fi interface
Optional, uses GA1000 add-on module
GPRS interface
Optional, uses TELIT GC864 GPRS module

(www.telit.com)
Serial ports
UART capabilities


I/O line
10mA
6Hz - 22'1184MHz, connected to buzzer
40 bit, increments at 128Hz
RTC backup power source
Supercapacitor, supports RTC for app. 6 days
Clock frequency

Flash memory

EEPROM memory

application data
Power supply voltage
10-18VDC
10-90%
Board dimensions
76x85mm
Pin diameter
0.64mm
IB100x Interface Boards

The following IB100x series interface boards are currently available:
IB1000 (4 RS232 ports)
IB1002 (4 RS232/422/485 ports)
IB1003 (4 isolated RS232/422/485 ports)
IB1004 + SB1004 (8 A/D inputs, 4 D/A outputs, 2 low-power relays, 1 RS232/485
port)
IB1005 + SB1005 (8 opto-isolated digital inputs, 6 high-power relays, 1 RS232/485
port)
IB1000,4.2.2.1
IB1002, and IB1003 (4 Serial Ports)
The IB1000, IB1002, and IB1003 interface boards provide 4 RS232 ports:
The IB1000 has 4 non-isolated RS232 ports.
The IB1002 has 4 non-isolated universal ports that can work in RS232, RS422, and
RS485 modes.
The IB1003 (shown below) has 4 electrically isolated universal ports that can work
in RS232, RS422, and RS485 modes.
Boards
106
These boards can optionally be used with the TB1000 terminal block adaptor.
Connectors and Headers

IB1000/2/3 boards carry two DB9-M connectors onboard. Two additional connectors
attach (via cables) to two 2x5 pin headers located on the boards.
107
DB-9M connectors
Pin #
RS232 mode
RS422 mode
RS485 mode
---
(IB1002/3 only)
(IB1002/3 only)
RTS- (output)
---
RX (input)
RX- (input)
RX- (input)
TX (output)
TX+ (output)
TX+ (output)
DTR (output)
TX- (output)
TX- (output)
SYSTEM GROUND
SYSTEM GROUND
SYSTEM GROUND
DSR (input)
RX+ (input)
RX+ (input)
RTS (output)
RTS+ (output)
---
CTS (input)
CTS+ (input)
---
---
CTS- (input)
---
Boards
108
Pin headers
Pin #
RS232 mode
RS422 mode
RS485 mode
(IB1002/3 only)
(IB1002/3 only)
---
RTS- (output)
---
RX (input)
RX- (input)
RX- (input)
TX (output)
TX+ (output)
TX+ (output)
DTR (output)
TX- (output)
TX- (output)
SYSTEM GROUND
SYSTEM GROUND
SYSTEM GROUND
DSR (input)
RX+ (input)
RX+ (input)
RTS (output)
RTS+ (output)
---
CTS (input)
CTS+ (input)
---
---
CTS- (input)
---
10
---
---
---
Serial Ports
The serial ports of the IB1000/2/3 are controlled by the EM1000 module (located on
the NB10x0 network board).
Tibbo BASIC/C application running on the EM1000 works with serial ports through a
"serial" (ser.) object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual"). The object takes care of
the data transmission through the TX line as well as data reception through the RX
line. When the flow control of a serial port is enabled (ser.flowcontrol= 1- ENABLED),
the serial object also handles RTS and CTS lines of this port automatically.
With flow control disabled, the CTS and RTS lines can be controlled by the
application as general-purpose I/O lines (GPIO). The DTR and DSR lines of ports are
always treated as GPIO, the serial object does not "touch" them. Actually, even TX
and RX lines of each port can be controlled as GPIO lines, but this is only possible
when the corresponding serial port is "closed" (ser.enabled= 0- NO). I/O line control
is effected through another object called the "I/O" (io.) object.
The IB1002 and IB1003 boards have universal RS232/422/485 ports. Two interface
selection lines -- HD/FD and RS_MODE -- are provided for each port and connected
to GPIO lines of the EM1000:
The HD/FD line selects half-duplex (LOW) or full-duplex (HIGH) mode for the serial
port.
The RS_MODE line selects "physical" signal mode: RS232 (LOW) or RS422/485
(HIGH).
To select RS232, RS422, or RS485 mode for a serial port, setup the HD/FC and
RS_MODE lines as shown in the table below. Ser.interface property of the serial
object must also be set correctly:
Mode
HD/FD
RS_MODE
ser.interface
RS232
HIGH
LOW
0- PL_SER_SI_FULLDUPLEX
RS422
HIGH
HIGH
0- PL_SER_SI_FULLDUPLEX
RS485
LOW
HIGH
1- PL_SER_SI_HALFDUPLEX
The RS485 mode is half-duplex, which means that only the transmission or reception
109

can occur at any given time. In this mode, the RTS line is used for direction control,
which is handled by the EM1000 automatically. The RTS line should be LOW for data
input, and HIGH for data output. This is achieved by setting the ser.dircontrol= 0PL_SER_DCP_LOWFORINPUT.
Do not forget that all lines of the EM1000 are configured as inputs by default. Any
line that should work as an output must be configured as such. This is done through
the io.enabled property of the i/o object. The only exceptions are the TX and RX
lines. The TX line automatically becomes an output, and the RX line automatically
becomes an output once the serial port is enabled (ser.enabled= 1- YES).
The HD/FD and RS_MODE lines have pull-up and pull-down resistors respectively. On
startup the HD/FD line defaults to HIGH (full-duplex mode), and the RS_MODE line
defaults to LOW (RS232 mode).
Serial port 1
Line
Corresponding EM1000 I/O
IC1000 cable line
RX (input)
GPIO8/RX0
17
TX (output)
GPIO9/TX0
19
CTS (input)
GPIO16/CTS0
33
RTS (output)
GPIO0/RTS0
DSR (input)
GPIO20/DSR0
41
DTR (output)
GPIO4/DTR0
HD/FD*
GPIO32
30
RS_MODE*
GPIO33
28
*IB1002 and IB1003 boards only

Serial port 2
Line
IC1000 cable line
RX (input)
GPIO10/RX1
21
TX (output)
GPIO11/TX1
23
CTS (input)
GPIO17/CTS1
35
RTS (output)
GPIO1/RTS1
DSR (input)
GPIO21/DSR1
43
DTR (output)
GPIO5/DTR1
11
HD/FD*
GPIO34
26
RS_MODE*
GPIO35
24

Serial port 3
Line
IC1000 cable line
RX (input)
GPIO12/RX2
25
TX (output)
GPIO13/TX2
27
CTS (input)
GPIO18/CTS2
37
RTS (output)
GPIO2/RTS2
DSR (input)
GPIO22/DSR2
45
DTR (output)
GPIO6/DTR2
13
Boards
HD/FD*
GPIO36
22
RS_MODE*
GPIO37
20
110

Serial port 4
Line
IC1000 cable line
RX (input)
GPIO14/RX3
29
TX (output)
GPIO15/TX3
31
CTS (input)
GPIO19/CTS3
39
RTS (output)
GPIO3/RTS3
DSR (input)
GPIO23/DSR3
47
DTR (output)
GPIO7/DTR3
15
HD/FD*
GPIO38
18
RS_MODE*
GPIO39
16
LED Control
The IB1000 works with the standard LB1001 LED board and controls the LEDs
through 8 general-purpose I/O (GPIO) lines of the EM1000 module (installed on the
NB10x0 network board). To turn the LED on, set the corresponding line LOW. Do not
forget to configure LED control lines as outputs. This is done through the io.enabled
property of the .io object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
LED #, color
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
IC1000 cable line
(LB1001)
#8, red
GPIO24
46
#7, green
GPIO25
44
#6, red
GPIO26
42
#5, green
GPIO27
40
#4, red
GPIO28
38
#3, green
GPIO29
36
#2, red
GPIO30
34
#1, green
GPIO31
32

Model number
Description
IB1000
The IB1000 board and LB1001 LED board mounted on

the IB1000 and connected to the latter with the
LC1000 cable. The TB1000 terminal block adaptor is not
included with this product.
IB1002

LC1000 cable. Also included is the TB1000 terminal
111

block adaptor.
IB1003

LC1000 cable. Also included is the TB1000 terminal
block adaptor.
Serial port lines
RS232 mode: RX, TX, CTS, RTS, DSR, DTR

RS422 mode (IB1002/3): RX+/-, TX+/-, CTS+/-,
RTS+/RS485 mode (IB1002/3): RX+/-, TX+/-
Baudrate
Up to 460800bps
10-90%
Board dimensions
76x85mm
IB10044.2.2.2
and SB1004 (Analog I/O)
Featuring 8 analog inputs and 4 analog outputs, the IB1004 + SB1004 board
combination is ideally suited for industrial (building) control and data acquisition
applications. Additional relays and the RS232/485 serial port further expand product
capabilities. To improve reliability and conversion precision, the A/D and D/A portions
each have their own power/ground domains that are fully isolated from the rest of
the circuitry.
Boards
112
The IB1004 is the main board in the pair, and is connected to an NB10x0 network
board by the IB1000 interboard cable. The SB1004 is a supplementary board, it
exists because a single IB1004 would not be able to accommodate all required
circuitry and terminal blocks. In the board pair, the IB1004 carries the A/D
converter, while the SB1004 contains the D/A converter, RS232/485 port, and 2
low-power relays.
The IB1004 and SB1004 are not meant to be used separately and should always be
ordered together.
The IB1004 product includes the LB1001 LED board. The IB1004 and the LB1001
come assembled together and interconnected by the LC1000 cable. Therefore, you
don't need to order the LB1001 and LC1000 separately when purchasing the IB1004
board.
All I/O lines of the IB1004 + SB1004 are grouped into four terminal blocks (two per
board), with 9 terminals in each block. The boards are controlled by the EM1000
module located on the NB10x0 board. More information on specific IB1004 + SB1004
functionality is found in the Detailed Information section.
To simplify testing and evaluation of the product use the TB1004 test board.
Terminal blocks
The IB1004 and the SB1004 have four terminal blocks in total, two on each board.
There are nine terminals in each terminal block.
All A/D inputs are grouped into terminal blocks 1 and 2.
All D/A outputs are on terminal block 3.
Relay outputs and the serial port are on terminal block 4.
113
Terminal block 1
Terminal #
9
Function
A/D channel 4, negative input (-)
A/D channel 4, positive input (+)
A/D GROUND (isolated from the rest of the device)
Terminal block 2
Terminal #
9
Function
Boards
5
114
Terminal block 3
Terminal #
Function
D/A channel 4, current output
D/A channel 4, voltage output
D/A GROUND (isolated from the rest of the device)
Terminal block 4
Terminal #
9
Function
Relay 2, normally opened line
Relay 2, normally closed line
Relay 2, common line
Serial port: TX (RS232); TX/RX+ (RS485)
Serial port: RX (RS232); TX/RX- (RS485)
SYSTEM (COMMON) GROUND
Control Lines
The following lines of the EM1000 module (located on the NB10x0 network board)
are used to control the IB1004 + SB1004.
In the tables below, "output" means an output of the EM1000, and "input" means an
input of the EM1000.
A/D converter control
For more information see A/D Converter.
Line
DI (input)
Function
Serial data in
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
IC1000
cable line
GPIO12
25
115

DO (output)
Serial data out
GPIO13
27
CLOCK (output)
Serial clock
GPIO2
GPIO40
GPIO32
30
GPIO33
28
(LOW idle state)

C/D (output)
Register selection:
HIGH - data register
LOW - control register
RFS (output)
Receive frame sync

(Active LOW)
TFS (output)
Transmit frame sync

(active LOW)
CHS0 (output)
Channel selection, bit 0
GPIO41
CHS1 (output)
GPIO42
10
CHS2 (output)
GPIO43
12
D/A converter control

For more information see D/A Converter.
Line
Function
Correspondin
g
IC1000 cable
line
EM1000 I/O
DATA (output)
Serial data out
GPIO11
CLOCK
(output)
Serial clock
GPIO1
23
3
WR (output)
Data latch strobe
GPIO34
26
GPIO35
24
(LOW idle state)

(active LOW)
EN (output)
Output enable:
HIGH (or input*) disabled
LOW - enabled
*GPIO line configured as input (default state)

Relay control
For more information see Relays.
Line
RELAY1
(output)
Function
Relay 1 control:
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
IC1000 cable
line
GPIO36
22
GPIO37
20
HIGH (or input*) - relay

off
LOW - relay on
RELAY2
(output)
Relay 2 control:
off
LOW - relay on

RS232/485 port control
Boards
116
For more information see RS232/485 Port.

Line
Function
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
GPIO8/RX0
IC1000 cable
line
17
RX (input)
Receive line of the serial

port
TX (output)
Transmit line of the serial

port
GPIO9/TX0
19
MODE
(output)
Mode selection:
GPIO44
14
GPIO0/RTS0
HIGH - RS485
LOW (or input*) - RS232
DIR
(output)
Direction control in RS485

mode:
HIGH - output
LOW - input

LED control
For all LED control lines:
HIGH (or input*) - LED off
LOW - LED on
For more information see LED Control.
LED #, color
IC1000 cable line
(LB1001)
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
#8, red
GPIO24
46
#7, green
GPIO25
44
#6, red
GPIO26
42
#5, green
GPIO27
40
#4, red
GPIO28
38
#3, green
GPIO29
36
#2, red
GPIO30
34
#1, green
GPIO31
32
The IB1004 + SB1004 include the following blocks:
A/D converter (8 channels, 24 bits, based on the 24-bit AD7712 converter).
D/A converter (4 channels, 14 bits, with separate voltage and current outputs,
based on the 14-bit AD7836 converter).
Two low-current mechanical relays (both normally-opened and normally-closed
terminals are provided).
RS232/485 port (RX/TX signals for the RS232, TX/RX+ and TX/RX- for the RS485).
Control lines for 8 LEDs on the LB1001 board.
117
A/D Converter
The A/D converter is based on the Analog Devices' 24-bit AD7712 chip and has 8
independent channels.
Each channel has two differential input lines. Maximum input range is +/-10V. The
range can be adjusted to 1/2, 1/4, ... 1/128 of that by programming the internal
gain of the A/D circuit to 2, 4, ...128. With the gain of 1 and with bipolar mode
selected , applying +10V to the A/D input produces the conversion result of "all 1's".
Applying -10V produces "all 0's". Applying 0V produces "1" followed by 0's (this is a
"middle" value). Of course, this explanation is idealized as it doesn't take into
account inevitable conversion errors.
The A/D converter is designed for relatively slow, but highly accurate
measurements. With recommended configuration (see below), the converter will
produce 250 measurements/second for any selected channel. Only one channel can
be selected at any given time.
The A/D converter has full galvanic isolation from the rest of the IB1004 + SB1004
circuitry: the power for the A/D section is generated by an isolated switching power
supply, all control lines use opto-couplers.
A/D inputs
The A/D converter inputs are available on terminal blocks 1 and 2.
Terminal block 1:
Terminal #
9
Function
Terminal block 2:
Terminal #
9
Function
Boards
118
A/D control lines

Nine lines of the EM1000 (located on the NB10x0 network board) control the A/D
converter. In the table below, "output" means an output of the EM1000, and "input"
means an input of the EM1000:
Line
Function
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
IC1000
cable line
DO (output)
Serial data out
GPIO13
27
DI (input)
Serial data in
GPIO12
25
CLOCK (output)
Serial clock
GPIO2
GPIO40
GPIO32
30
GPIO33
28
(LOW idle state)

C/D (output)
Register selection:
HIGH - data register
LOW - control register
RFS (output)
Receive frame sync

(Active LOW)
TFS (output)
Transmit frame sync

(active LOW)
CHS0 (output)
GPIO41
CHS1 (output)
GPIO42
10
CHS2 (output)
GPIO43
12
The A/D converter has a 24-bit configuration register, and a 24-bit data register
that contains the A/D conversion result. These registers are accessed through the
serial interface consisting of 5 I/O lines:
Two lines -- RFS and TFS -- are used for selecting the transaction type. Inactive
state for these signals is HIGH. The RFS line must be set LOW prior to the read
transaction and remain LOW for the entire transaction duration. The TFS line must
be set LOW prior to the write transaction and remain LOW for the entire
transaction duration.
The CLOCK line is used both for writing to and reading from the converter. The
inactive state for this line is LOW. Each read and write "transaction" consists of
24 clock pulses, after which the clock returns to the LOW state. Alternatively, the
IC can be programmed for 16-bit resolution, in which case each transaction will
consist of 16 pulses.
The DO line is for sending the data to the converter (writing to the configuration
register). Each data bit must be placed on the DO line while the CLOCK is LOW.
This means that the first, most significant bit, of data must be placed on the DO
line before the first clock pulse of the transaction. Switching the CLOCK from LOW
to HIGH will latch the bit into the converter.
The DI line serves double purpose. Before the RFS line is brought LOW, the DI
input indicates whether new measurement data is ready. The DI line is HIGH while
the converter is not ready, and goes LOW when the new data becomes available.
After the RFS line is brought LOW, the DI is used to receive the data from the
converter (read the data register). The most significant bit of the readout is
present on the DI line right after the RFS becomes LOW. The converter will output
next data bit on every HIGH to LOW transition on the CLOCK line. We recommend
that your application records the data while the CLOCK line is HIGH.
119

The C/D line defines whether the data is exchanged with the configuration register
(C/D is LOW), or data register that contains the conversion result (C/D is HIGH).
The C/D line must remain stable (HIGH or LOW) for the entire duration of the
transaction.
Read and write "transactions" are illustrated on the diagram below.
The A/D converter has 8 inputs and three control lines -- CHS2, CHS1, and CHS0 -are used to select the channel. Only one channel can be selected at any given
time.
Preparing to communicate with the A/D converter
Before you start exchanging data with the A/D converter you need to configure
certain GPIO lines of the EM1000 as outputs. These lines are CLOCK, DO, C/D, TFS,
RFS, CHS0, CHS1, and CHS2. In other words, all lines except DI must be configured
as outputs.
Writing to the configuration register
Follow these steps to write to the configuration register:
Set the C/D line LOW to indicate that the configuration register access will take
place.
Set the TFS line LOW to indicate that this will be a write operation (RFS must
remain HIGH).
Place the value of the most significant bit of the configuration word on the DO
line.
Set the CLOCK line HIGH.
Set the CLOCK line LOW. This will conclude the first clock pulse.
Boards
120
Generate 23 additional clock pulses, every time setting the next bit on the DO line
while the CLOCK is at LOW.
Set the TFS line HIGH. The write is complete.
A/D converter initialization
If you refer to the data sheet for the AD7712 you will find that there are many
configuration options. Without resorting to reprinting the data sheet, we provide the
following brief info:
bit2
3
bit2
2
bit2
1
bit2
0
bit1
9
bit1
8
bit1
7
bit1
6
bit1
5
bit1
4
bit1
3
bit1
2
MD
2
MD
1
MD
0
G2
G1
G0
CH
PD
WL
BO
BU
bit1
1
bit1
0
bit9
bit8
bit7
bit6
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
FS1
1
FS1
0
FS9
FS8
FS7
FS6
FS5
FS4
FS3
FS2
FS1
FS0
The MD2-0 field is set to 000 for normal operation or 001 for self-calibration.
There are also other configuration modes available, but they are not supported by
the IB1004.
The G2-0 field defines the gain of the A/D. The signal measured by the A/D is preamplified according to this gain. Writing 000 will select the gain of 1, 001- the gain
of 2,... 111- the gain if 128.
The CH field selects the channel and has to be set to 1 for the IB1004 to work
properly. This channel selection should not be confused with the IB1004 input
channel selector described above.
The PD power down bit should be at 0.
The WL word length bit should be at 0 for 16-bit resolution (sufficient for most
applications), or at 1 for 24-bit resolution.
The BO burnout current bit should be at 0.
The B/U bit should be at 0 to select bipolar operation.
The FS11-0 filter selection bits that should be set according to the requirements
of your application. We often use the value of 4E Hex. Read page 10 of the IC's
datasheet and you will find out that this corresponds with the data rate of 250Hz
(times/second) and the effective resolution of 15 bits. We choose this as a good
compromise between the speed and resolution. We choose the resolution of 15
bits because the D/A portion of the product has the resolution of 14 bits.
To initialize the A/D converter, write the desired configuration word on startup. For
the 15-bit effective resolution described above write the hex value of 22004E. This
will set up the converter and kick-off a self-calibration process (see below).
Optional self-calibration
The A/D converter will operate at a better precision if you calibrate it first. Set bits
MD2-0 of the configuration register to 001 to start self-calibration. Self-calibration,
as the name implies, is an automatic process that does not require any external
intervention. The calibration takes time. To determine when the calibration is over,
poll the DI line after writing to the configuration register:
121

Once the TFS line goes HIGH marking the end of the write transaction, the DI line
starts indicating the status of the converter.
The DI line will be HIGH while the converter is still busy.
The DI line will become LOW when the calibration is finished.
There is no need to set MD2-0= 000 after the calibration -- this happens
automatically. So, in effect, your entire A/D converter setup may consist of writing
22004E Hex (or other suitable configuration word) and waiting for the DI to become
LOW.
Changing channels
Follow these steps to change the channel:
If the desired channel is not selected yet, select it by manipulating control lines
CHS2-0. Code 000 selects the channel 1, 001- channel 2, ... 111- channel 8.
After the channel change, discard the results of the first conversion. This is
because the channel change may result in the wrong measurement. The second
measurement will contain correct data. Alternatively, your program can wait the
time equal to two A/D measurement periods. Conversion period is related to the
filter setting. For the filter set at 250Hz, the conversion period is 1/250Hz=4ms.
So, the application needs to wait for 8ms before correct data for the newly
selected channel becomes available.
Receiving A/D conversion result
The data register of the A/D converter is updated at the conversion rate (for our
recommended setting, 1/250Hz=4ms). So, the new measurement result is available
every 4ms. You are always reading the most recent conversion result.
The readout can only start when the A/D converter is ready. Starting the read
transaction when the converter is not ready will produce invalid data (you will read
"all zeroes" or "all ones"). Follow this algorithm to perform the read:
While the RFS line is at HIGH, read the state of the DI line. If the line is HIGH,
then the A/D converter is not ready and you need to wait.
Keep polling the DI line until it becomes LOW. This will indicate that the read
transaction can be started.
Set C/D line HIGH to indicate that the data register access will take place.
Set the RFS line LOW to indicate that this will be a read operation (TFS must
remain HIGH).
Set the CLOCK line HIGH and record the state of the DI line -- this is the value of
the most significant bit.
Set the CLOCK LOW -- this concludes the first clock cycle.
Perform 23 or 15 more clock cycles (depending on the value you set in the WL bit
of the configuration register), every time recording the state of the DI line when
the CLOCK is it HIGH.
Set the RFS line HIGH. The read is complete.
Remember that the "effective resolution" discussed above has nothing to do
with the number of bits you are supposed to read from the converter. This
number is either 24 or 16, depending on the WL bit of the configuration
register.
Boards
122
Clock speed limitations

The A/D converter is optically isolated from the rest of the device, so there are
opto-couplers on all interface lines. Opto-couplers are relatively slow devices. This
imposes a limit on how fast the clock line can be toggled. The minimum clock period
is 200us. Both half-periods must be at least 100uS long. This means, that the
conversion result can be obtained in 200uS*24=4.8ms or 200uS*16=3.2ms.
D/A Converter
The D/A converter is based on the Analog Devices' 14-bit AD7836 chip and has 4
independent output channels with 14-bit resulution. Each of the four channels have
independent voltage and current output lines (both can be used at the same time if
needed).
Each channel has two outputs: one voltage and one current output. The voltage
outputs have +/-10V range (20mA max load). Writing all 1's (14 of them) into the D/
A channel produces the maximum positive level on the voltage output (+10V
nominal), writing all 0's produces the maximum negative level on the voltage output
(-10V nominal). Writing a "middle" binary value of "10000000000000" (that's 1
followed by 13 zeroes) produces a 0V output. Of course, this explanation is idealized
as it doesn't take into account inevitable conversion errors.
The output current range on the current output is 0-20mA. An external 4-15V
power source is required for current outputs to work. Writing all 1's into the D/A
channel results the maximum output current. Writing a middle value
(10000000000000B) results in zero current. Writing any value below that still
produces zero current. Hence, the actual resolution of the current output is not 14,
but 13 bits.
The D/A converter has full galvanic isolation from the rest of the IB1004 + SB1004
circuitry: the power for the D/A section is generated by an isolated switching power
supply, all control lines use opto-couplers.
D/A outputs
All D/A-related lines are available on a 9-pin terminal block #3:
Terminal #
Function
123

2
D/A GROUND (isolated from the rest of the device)
D/A control
Four lines of the EM1000 (located on the NB10x0 network board) control the D/A
converter. In the table below, "output" means an output of the EM1000, and "input"
means an input of the EM1000:
Line
Function
Correspondin
g
IC1000 cable
line
EM1000 I/O
DATA (output)
Serial data
GPIO11
CLOCK
(output)
Serial clock
GPIO1
23
3
WR (output)
Data latch strobe
GPIO34
26
GPIO35
24
(LOW idle state)

(active LOW)
EN (output)
Output enable:
HIGH (or input*) disabled
LOW - enabled

The D/A converter control cycle consists of the following steps. First, a 16-bit data
word is serially clocked into the D/A circuit. Bits 15 and 14 of the data word select
the output channel, remaining 14 bits carry desired output value. The word is sent
most significant bit first.
Two lines -- CLOCK and DATA -- are used for sending the data word to the D/A
converter. Inactive state for the CLOCK line is LOW. Each write transaction consists
of 16 clock pulses. With each LOW-to-HIGH transition on the CLOCK line, the state
of the DATA line is latched into the D/A converter. The process is illustrated below.
Once all 16 bits have been clocked in, the negative pulse on the WR line sets new
data and the new analog value appears on the outputs of the corresponding D/A
channel (provided that the EN lines is at low).
Boards
124
The EN line is used for enabling the analog outputs of the D/A converter. The
system powers up with EN line pulled HIGH internally. This disables the D/A
converter and produces 0V (0mA) on its outputs. Taking the EN line LOW will enable
the D/A. Before that, your application should write the desired value into each D/A
channel. Failure to do so will result in the unknown voltage (current) output levels
once the EN line is set LOW.
Remember that you need to configured all four control lines of the EM1000 as
outputs.
Clock speed limitations
The D/A converter is electrically isolated from the rest of the device, so there are
opto-couplers on all interface lines. Opto-couplers are relatively slow devices. This
imposes a limit on how fast the clock line can be toggled. The minimum clock period
is 200us. Both half-periods must be at least 100uS long. The minimum pulse width
on the WR line is also 100uS. This means that the new value can be output to the
converter in 200uS*16+100=3.3ms.
Relays
The IB1004 + SB1004 has two low-power mechanical relays.
These relays can only handle relatively light loads -- they are rated for 24V/1A. If
your load is inductive in nature, then the power the relays can handle may actually
be several times lower.
Relay outputs
Relay outputs are on terminal block #4. Both normally closed and normally opened
lines are provided for each relay.
Terminal #
9
Function
125

6
Serial port: RX (RS232); TX/RX+ (RS485)
Serial port: TX (RS232); TX/RX- (RS485)
Relay control
Two lines of the EM1000 (located on the NB10x0 network board) control the relays.
On power up, all EM1000 lines are configured as inputs and pulled up internally,
keeping relays off. To turn the relay on, set the corresponding control line LOW.
Naturally, you need to configure these GPIO lines as outputs in order to be able to
control the relays.
Line
RELAY1
(output)
Function
Relay 1 control:
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
IC1000 cable
line
GPIO36
22
GPIO37
20

off
LOW - relay on
RELAY2
(output)
Relay 2 control:
off
LOW - relay on
RS232/485 Port
There is a simple serial port that supports both RS232 and RS485 modes. The port
operates through two signal terminals. In the RS232 mode, these are RX and TX, in
the RS485 mode -- RX/TX+ and RX/TX-. There is no provision for flow control (RTS
and CTS lines are not present), or RS422 interface.
The serial port can be used, for instance, to connect to another IB100x board. In
the RS232 mode, the serial port can also be used to update the firmware of the
EM1000 module located on the NB10x0 board.
Port lines
Serial port lines are on terminal block #4:
Terminal #
9
Function
Boards
2
126
Serial port control

Four lines of the EM1000 module (located on the NB10x0 board) control the serial
port:
Line
Function
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
GPIO8/RX0
IC1000 cable
line
17
RX (input)

port
TX (output)

port
GPIO9/TX0
19
MODE
(output)
Mode selection:
GPIO44
14
GPIO0/RTS0
HIGH - RS485
DIR
(output)

mode:
HIGH - output
LOW - input

Do not forget to configure the TX, MODE, and DIR lines as outputs. A pull-down
resistor on the MODE line ensures that the system boots up with the RS232 port
selected.
LED Control
The IB1004 works with a standard LB1001 board and controls the LEDs through 8
general-purpose I/O (GPIO) lines of the EM1000 module (installed on the NB10x0
network board). To turn the LED on, set the corresponding line LOW. Remember to
configure all LED control lines as outputs.
LOW - LED on
LED #, color
IC1000 cable line
(LB1001)
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
#8, red
GPIO24
46
#7, green
GPIO25
44
#6, red
GPIO26
42
#5, green
GPIO27
40
#4, red
GPIO28
38
#3, green
GPIO29
36
#2, red
GPIO30
34
#1, green
GPIO31
32
127


Use the following model numbers to order the IB1004 and SB1004 boards. Normally,
you will want to order both boards "in parallel":
IB1004
The IB1004 board and LB1001 LED board mounted

on the IB1004 and connected to the latter with
the LC1000 cable. Also included is the TB1004 test
board.
SB1004
The SB1004 supplementary board. Order this board

"in parallel" with the IB1004.
Note: the IB1004 and SB1004 plug into each other. No soldering is required to
interconnect them.
A/D channels
8 channels, 24-bit resolution
D/A channels
4 channels, voltage and current output, 14-bit

resolution
Relays
2 relays, 24V/1A
Serial port lines
RS232 mode: RX, TX

RS485 mode: RX+/-, TX+/-
Baudrate
Up to 460800bps
10-90%
Dimensions
76x85mm
IB10054.2.2.3
and SB1005 (Digital I/O)
Featuring 8 opto-isolated inputs and 6 relay outputs, the IB1005 + SB1005 board
combination is perfect for automation, security, access control, and monitoring
applications. An additional RS232/485 port further expands product capabilities.
Boards
128
The IB1005 is the main board in the pair, and is connected to an NB10x0 network
board by the IB1000 interboard cable. The SB1005 is a supplementary board, it
exists because a single IB1005 would not be able to accommodate all required
circuitry and terminal blocks. In the board pair, the IB1005 carries isolated digital
inputs and the RS232/485, while the SB1005 contains all relays.
The IB1005 and SB1005 are not meant to be used separately and should always be
ordered together.
The IB1005 product includes the LB1001 LED board. The IB1005 and the LB1001
come assembled together and interconnected by the LC1000 cable. Therefore, you
don't need to order the LB1001 and LC1000 separately when purchasing the IB1005
board.
All I/O lines of the IB1005 + SB1005 are grouped into four terminal blocks (two per
board), with 9 terminals in each block. The boards are controlled by the EM1000
module located on the NB10x0 board. More information on specific IB1005 + SB1005
functionality is found in the Detailed Information section.
To simplify testing and evaluation of the product use the TB1005 test board.
Terminal Blocks
The IB1005 and the SB1005 have four terminal blocks between them. There are nine
terminals in each block.
The serial port and sensor input lines are grouped into terminal blocks 1 and 2.
All relay outputs are on terminal blocks 3 and 4.
129
Terminal block 1
Terminal #
9
Function
Sensors 3 and 4, positive line (+)
Sensor 4, negative line (-)
Terminal block 2
Terminal #
9
Function
Sensor 8, positive line (+)
Boards
5
Vin (connected to the power input of the NB10x0)
130
Terminal block 3
Terminal #
Function
Terminal block 4
Terminal #
Function
Control Lines
The following lines of the EM1000 module (located on the NB10x0 network board)
are used to communicate with the IB1005 + SB1005.
In the tables below, "output" means an output of the EM1000, and "input" means an
input of the EM1000.
Opto-isolated inputs
For more information see Opto-isolated Inputs.
Line
Function
Correspondin
g
I1
(input)
Data line for input 1
GPIO17/
W0&1 input for Wiegand reader 1
W0&1in1/
IC1000
cable line
EM1000 I/O
35
131

Clock input for clock/data reader 1
cin1
GPIO10/
W1 input for Wiegand reader 1
W1in1/
Data input for clock/data reader 1
din1
GPIO18/
W0&1in2/
cin2
GPIO12/
W1in2/
Data input for clock/data reader 2.
din2
I5
(input)
GPIO40
I6
(input)
GPIO41
I7
(input)
GPIO42
10
I8
(input)
GPIO43
12
C1
(output)
Channels 1 and 2 mode:
GPIO1
GPIO2
I2
(input)
I3
(input)
I4
(input)
21
37
25
LOW - separate use or clock/data i/

f
HIGH - Wiegand i/f
C2
(output)

f
HIGH - Wiegand i/f
Relay control
For all relay control lines:
HIGH (or input*) - relay off
LOW - relay on
For more information see Relays.
Line
Function
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
IC1000 cable
line
RELAY1 (output)
Relay 1 control
GPIO32
30
RELAY2 (output)
Relay 2 control
GPIO33
28
RELAY3 (output)
Relay 3 control
GPIO34
26
RELAY4 (output)
Relay 4 control
GPIO35
24
RELAY5 (output)
Relay 5 control
GPIO36
22
RELAY6 (output)
Relay 6 control
GPIO37
20

RS232/485 port control
For more information see RS232/485 port.
Line
Function
Corresponding
IC1000 cable
Boards
EM1000 I/O
GPIO8/RX0
line
17
RX (input)

port
TX (output)

port
GPIO9/TX0
19
MODE
(output)
Mode selection:
GPIO44
14
GPIO0/RTS0
132
HIGH - RS485
DIR
(output)

mode:
HIGH - output
LOW - input

LED control
LOW - LED on
For more information see LED Control.
LED #, color
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
IC1000 cable line
(LB1001)
#8, red
GPIO24
46
#7, green
GPIO25
44
#6, red
GPIO26
42
#5, green
GPIO27
40
#4, red
GPIO28
38
#3, green
GPIO29
36
#2, red
GPIO30
34
#1, green
GPIO31
32
The IB1005 includes the following blocks:
Opto-isolated inputs (8 in total, 4 can be used to connect two Wiegand or clock/
data readers).
Six high-current mechanical relays (both normally-opened and normally-closed
terminals are provided).
RS232/485 port (RX/TX signals for the RS232, TX/RX+ and TX/RX- for the RS485).
Control lines for 8 LEDs on the LB1001 board (the board must be ordered
separately).
133
Opto-isolated Inputs
The IB1005 features 8 opto-isolated input channels. Channels 1-4 are combined into
two pairs. Channels of each pair have separate negative inputs and common
positive inputs. These channels can be activated with voltages as low as 2V and
accept voltages of up to 15V. Each channel pair can work as two independent
sensor inputs or accept the data from an external Wiegand or clock/data card
reader.
Channels 4-8 are independent and have separate negative and positive lines. These
channels can be activated with voltage levels as low as 5V and accept voltages as
high as 50V.
Sensor Inputs
All inputs are on terminal blocks 1 and 2.
For terminal block 1:
Terminal #
9
Function

Terminal #
9
Function
Vin (connected to the power input of the NB10x0)
Working with inputs

The state of inputs is available on 8 general-purpose I/O (GPIO) lines of the EM1000
module (located on the NB10x0 network board). The EM1000 can check GPIO line
state through the I/O (io.) object -- see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual" for details.
Line
Function
Correspondin
IC1000
Boards
g
134
cable line
EM1000 I/O
I1
(input)
35
GPIO17/
W0&1in1/
cin1
GPIO10/
W1in1/
Data input for clock/data reader 1
din1
GPIO18/
W0&1in2/
cin2
GPIO12/
W1in2/
Data input for clock/data reader 2.
din2
I5
(input)
GPIO40
I6
(input)
GPIO41
I7
(input)
GPIO42
10
I8
(input)
GPIO43
12
C1
(output)
GPIO1
GPIO2
I2
(input)
I3
(input)
I4
(input)
21
37
25

f
HIGH - Wiegand i/f
C2
(output)

f
HIGH - Wiegand i/f
When sufficient voltage is applied to the sensor input, the corresponding GPIO line
of the EM1000 is turned LOW, otherwise the line is HIGH.
As was explained above, channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 form two input pairs that can
optionally accept data from Wiegand or clock/data readers. These channels are
wired into the serial ports 1 and 2 of the EM1000. The serial ports of the module
have a unique ability to decode the Wiegand and clock/data streams so processing
the reader data is very simple. More info can be found in the documentation for the
"serial" (ser.) object ("TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
As the serial object documentation explains, accepting Wiegand data requires
additional logic circuit to be connected to the EM1000. This circuit is located on the
IB1005 board. Two control lines -- C1 and C2 (one for each input pair) -- enable
Wiegand-compatible operation of the channels. For Wiegand readers, set the control
line HIGH. For clock/data readers or independent operation of channels of the signal
pair, set the line to LOW.
Note that C1 and C2 lines have to be configured as outputs.
135
Relays
The IB1005 + SB1005 have 6 mechanical relays. These relays are rated for
30VDC/16A or 250VAC/15A. If your load is inductive in nature, then the actual
power the relays can handle may be several times lower.
Relay outputs
Relay outputs are on terminal blocks 3 and 4. Both normally closed and normally
opened lines are provided for each relay.
Terminal #
Function

Terminal #
Function
Relay control
Six lines of the EM1000 (located on the NB10x0 network board) control the relays.
On power up, all EM1000 lines are configured as inputs and pulled up internally,
keeping relays off. To turn the relay on, set the corresponding control line LOW.
Naturally, each relay line must be configured as output.
For all relay control lines:
HIGH (our input*) - relay off
LOW - relay on
Line
RELAY1 (output)
Function
Relay 1 control
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
IC1000 cable
line
GPIO32
30
Boards
RELAY2 (output)
Relay 2 control
GPIO33
28
RELAY3 (output)
Relay 3 control
GPIO34
26
RELAY4 (output)
Relay 4 control
GPIO35
24
RELAY5 (output)
Relay 5 control
GPIO36
22
RELAY6 (output)
Relay 6 control
GPIO37
20
136
RS232/485 Port
There is a simple serial port that supports both RS232 and RS485 modes. The port
operates through two signal terminals. In the RS232 mode, these are RX and TX, in
the RS485 mode -- RX/TX+ and RX/TX-. There is no provision for flow control (RTS
and CTS lines are not present), or RS422 interface.
The serial port can be used, for instance, to connect to another IB100x board. In
the RS232 mode, the serial port can also be used to update the firmware of the
EM1000 module located on the NB10x0 board.
Serial port lines
Serial port lines are on terminal block 1:
Terminal #
9
Function
Serial port control

Four lines of the EM1000 module (located on the NB10x0 board) control the serial
port.
Line
Function
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
GPIO8/RX0
IC1000 cable
line
17
RX (input)

port
TX (output)

port
GPIO9/TX0
19
MODE
(output)
Mode selection:
GPIO44
14
GPIO0/RTS0
HIGH - RS485
DIR
(output)

mode:
137

HIGH - output
LOW - input
Do not forget to configure the TX, MODE, and DIR lines as outputs. A pull-down
resistor on the MODE line ensures that the system boots up with the RS232 port
selected.
LED Control
The IB1005 works with a standard LB1001 board and controls the LEDs through 8
general-purpose I/O (GPIO) lines of the EM1000 module (installed on the NB10x0
network board). To turn the LED on, set the corresponding line LOW. All LED control
lines have to be configured as outputs.
LOW - LED on
LED #, color
IC1000 cable line
(LB1001)
Corresponding
EM1000 I/O
#8, red
GPIO24
46
#7, green
GPIO25
44
#6, red
GPIO26
42
#5, green
GPIO27
40
#4, red
GPIO28
38
#3, green
GPIO29
36
#2, red
GPIO30
34
#1, green
GPIO31
32

Use the following model numbers to order the IB1005 and SB1005 boards. Normally,
you will want to order both boards "in parallel":
IB1005
The IB1005 board and LB1001 LED board mounted

on the IB1005 and connected to the latter with
the LC1000 cable. Also included is the TB1005 test
board.
SB1005
The SB1005 supplementary board. Order this board

"in parallel" with the IB1005.
Note: the IB1005 and SB1005 plug into each other. No soldering is required to
interconnect them.
Opto-isolated inputs
8 channels:
Boards
138
- channels 1-4: 2V-15V input range, can be used

to connect card readers
- channels 5-8: 5-50V input range
Relays
6 relays, 30VDC/16A or 250VAC/15A
Serial port lines
RS232 mode: RX, TX

RS485 mode: RX+/-, TX+/-
Baudrate
Up to 460800bps
10-90%
Dimensions
76x85mm
LB100x LED Boards

The following LED boards are currently supplied as standard.
LB1000 (for NB10x0 network boards).
LB1001 (for IB100x interface boards).
LB10004.2.3.1
The LB1000 is a standard LED board supplied with NB10x0 network boards. Table
below shows LED arrangement for this board. LED numbers correspond to the
numbers shown on the mechanical drawing for the LB1000. LED control is described
in the External LED Control topic of the NB1000 documentation.
LED
#
Color
Series
Resistor
value
(Ohm)
Function
#8
Green
0(1)
Status LED, connected to the SG line of the

EM1000(3)
#7
Red
0(1)
Status LED, connected to the SR line of the

EM1000(3)
#11
---
---
<not installed>
#6
Green
220
Ethernet status LED, connected to the EG line of

the EM1000
#5
Yello
w
220
Ethernet status LED, connected to the EY line of

the EM1000
#10
---
---
<not installed>
(2)
#4
Yello
w
220
Signal strength bar, #1 (the lowest level).
#3(2)
Yello
w
220
Signal strength bar, #2.
#9(2)
Yello
w
220
139

#2(2)
Yello
w
220
#1(2)
Yello
w
220
Signal strength bar, #5 (the highest strength).
Note 1. This resistor's value is 0 because there is another resistor connected in

series with the EM1000's I/O line and located on the NB10x0 board.
Note 2. This LED is controlled through an additional "LED bar" circuit, described in
the External LED Control topic.
Note 3. Further information on status LEDs can be found in Appendix 1: Status
LEDs.
LB10014.2.3.2
The LB1001 is a standard LED board supplied with IB100x interface boards. The LEDs
on the board are arranged into 4 groups, each group consisting of one green and
one red LED. Although the LB1001 connects to IB100x boards, the actual control of
the LEDs is effected from the EM1000 module installed on the NB10x0 board. To turn
a certain LED on, set the corresponding general-purpose I/O (GPIO) line LOW. The
line has to be configured as output. I/O line control is described in detail in the
documentation for the "I/O" (io.) object found inside the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual". These LED's can also be used to play patterns generated by the
("pattern") .pat object. Correct "mapping" is required for this to work -- see object
documentation for details.
Table below shows LED arrangement for this board. LED numbers correspond to the
numbers shown on the mechanical drawing for the LB1001.
LED
#
Color
Resistor
value
(Ohm)
#8
Red
0(1)
Controlled by the GPIO24 of the EM1000 (pin 46

on the interboard connector header).
#7
Green
0(1)

#11
---
---
<not installed>
#6
Red
0(1)

#5
Green
0(1)

#10
---
---
<not installed>
(1)
Function
#4
Red

#3
Green
0(1)

#9
---
---
<not installed>
(1)
#2
Red

#1
Green
0(1)

Boards
140
Note 1. This resistor's value is 0 because there is another resistor connected in

series with the EM1000's GPIO line and located on the NB10x0 board.
Cable data
The following standard cables are supplied:
IC1000 interboard cable
LC1000 LED board cable
IC10004.2.4.1
Interboard Cable
NB10x0 and IB100x boards are interconnected by a 50-wire cable called the
"interboard cable". This cable can be ordered as IC1000. There is a 50-pin header on
each board to receive the cable end. The header type is 2x25, pitch=2.54mm.
Connector pin assignment is shown below. The IC1000 length is approximately 40mm
(as measured between the connectors). This cable is supplied with each NB10x0
board (but not with IB100x boards).
141
Note 1: indicated pin functions correspond to the pin functions of the EM1000
module (installed on the NB10x0 board). To save space, "GPIO" and "P" were
omitted. For example, "17/2.1" actually means "GPIO17/P2.1". "I1" means "INT1".
Note2: not all pin functions are shown. For example, pin #2 also has "W0out/cout0"
functionality which is not shown on the diagram above. Refer to EM1000
documentation for complete pin function description.
LC10004.2.4.2
LED Board Cable
The LB100x LED boards connect to the network board ("NB") or interface board
("IB") via the LC1000 cable. There is a connector on the LB100x, as well as "NB" and
"IB" boards. Connector pin assignment is shown below. LED numbers correspond to
the numbers shown on the mechanical drawing of the LB100x. Pin #1 position of the
connector is also shown on the drawing.
Pin #
Function
Description
VCC
3.3V power from the

"NB" ("IB").
VCC
3.3V power from the

"NB" ("IB").
LED8
Cathode (-) of LED #8.
LED7
LED11
LED6
LED5
LED10
LED4
10
LED3
11
LED9
12
LED2
13
LED1
14
GND
System ground.
Important note: For correct operation, a current-limiting resistor must be connected

in series with each LED. Most I/O lines of the EM1000 (installed on the NB1000
network board) already have a current-limiting resistor, so the resistor onboard the
IB100x is not always necessary. In this case, the 0 Ohm resistor is used.
Documentation for specific LB100x boards provides necessary info.
Mechanical data
The following drawings are provided in this section:
NB10x0 and IB100x board dimensions
SB100x board dimensions
LB100x board dimensions
Boards
142
NB10x04.2.5.1
and IB100x Board Dimensions
The NB10x0 and IB100x have the same outline dimensions. Both types of boards also
feature identical 50-pin headers for the IC1000 interboard cable, as well as
mounting holes for the LB1000 LED board. The only difference is that on the "IB"
boards the 50-pin header is on the right, while the LB1000 mounting holes are on
the left. On the "NB" boards, the pin header is on the left, while the mounting holes
are located on the right.
Max.
76.0
Board width
143

H
T
g
d
m1
m2
m3
m4
m5
m6
m7
Aver.
Aver.
Min.
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
85.0
1.6
5.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
22.0
8.5
50.3
3.2
6.0
Board height
Board thickness
No-component zone width
Mounting hole diameter
Distance to the board mounting hole
Distance to the LB100x mounting hole
LB100x mounting hole dimension
LB100x mounting hole, copper area diameter
contained herein.
SB100x4.2.5.2
Board Dimensions
The supplementary board ("SB") has the same height as the interface board ("IB").
The "SB" is narrower -- its maximum width is limited to 67mm. The limit is due to
the interboard connector protruding from the side of the "IB". The "SB" does not
have to have the maximum width -- it can be as short as permitted by the design.
Boards
W
H
T
g
d
m1
m2
c
G
Max.
Aver.
Aver.
Min.
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
Max.
Aver.
67.0
85.0
1.6
5.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
19.0
18.5
Board width
Board height
Board thickness
No-component zone height
Header & interboard cable connector height
Gap between the IB100x and SB100x boards*
144
145

* This is the standard gap; it will "happen" automatically when the boards are used
inside the DS10xx housing.
contained herein.
LB100x4.2.5.3
Board Dimensions
The LB100x LED board accommodates up to 11 LEDs. What LEDs are actually
installed depends on the board version. See LB100x LED Boards for description of
standard boards offered by Tibbo. The LB100x connects either to an NB10x0 board
or IB100x board. The LC1000 flat cable is used for this.
The LB100x can be mounted independently or attached to the "NB" ("IB") board. A
custom-made "brass offset" part BP1000 is used for the purpose in the latter case.
The BP1000 ensures precise 3.5mm gap between the LB100x and the "NB" ("IB")
board.
Boards
W
H
T
m1
m2
m3
m4
m5
m6
m7
m8
G
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
Aver.
Max.
Aver.
Aver.
Max.
Aver.
25.0
75.0
1.6
3.7
50.3
3.0
24.6
12.5
5.0
2.6
6.5
3.5
Max.
3.0
146
Board width
Board height
Board thickness
Distance between board mounting holes
Distance from the board mounting hole to the LED edge
Distance from the LED edge to the center of the first LED
Distance between LEDs
Distance from the board surface to the LED center
LED height with respect to the board surface
Gap between the LB100x and the bottom side of the NB10x0
(IB100x)
LED diameter
147

contained herein.
DS1206N
Introduction
The DS1206N is a BASIC-programmable board designed primarily for serial-over-IP
and serial control applications. Being small enough to fit inside your product, the
board offers a rapid development alternative to using modules, which require making
new host PCB.
The DS1206N features a multi-channel serial port. The board has a single serial port
connector and is priced as a single-port product, yet it packs four independent
serial channels. Have no use for those DSR and DTR lines? Turn them into RX and TX
of an additional serial channel. Don't want CTS and RTS either? That's one more
channel! In total, there are 15 different configurations to choose from.
The board is supplied in three versions offering various serial port and power options
(see below).
The DS1206N is fully supported by TIDE software and a dedicated DS1206 platform
that covers all hardware facilities of the board (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual"). This product ships preloaded with a fully functional serial-over-IP
application. Written in Tibbo BASIC/C, the application is compatible with Tibbo
Device Server Toolkit software, comes with full source codes, and can be modified
by the user.
Available models
The board is supplied in three modifications.
The DS1206N-RS is, essentially, a DS1206 device without a housing. The board has
a proper RS232 port (RS232 transceiver IC and DB9M connector), as well as the
power regulator ("12V"-to-3.3V). There is also a power switch that controls "12V"
power output on pin 9 of the DB9M connector.
The DS1206N-TM is different from the "-RS" version in that it has a TTL serial port
and no power switch. The port is accessible through a 12-pin connector on the PCB.
The power regulator of the board can be used to supply 3.3V power to the attached
serial device as well.
Boards
148
Finally, the DS1206N-TS is like the "-TM" version but has no "12V"-to-3.3V power
regulator. Instead, an attached serial device is supposed to provide stabilized 3.3V
power to the board.
Available models and their features
DS1206NRS
DS1206NTM
DS1206NTS
(RS232)
(TTL
master)
(TTL slave)
Setup button
YES
Status LEDs
YES
RS232 transceiver & DB9M

connector
YES
NO
TTL interface connector
NO
YES
Power switch
YES
NO
Power jack and "12V"-to-3.3V

regulator
YES
NO
Hardware features
Superior upgrade to the EM1202EV board.
"cross" cables).
Up to 3.5 serial channels:
- DS1206N-RS: RS232 port (DB9M connector);
- DS1206N-TM and "-TS": TTL serial port (pin header);
- DS1206N-TM and "-TS": half-duplex mode with direction control;
- Flexible mapping with 15 different options, such as:
- A single channel: RX, TX, CTS, RTS, DSR, and DTR lines;
- 3.5 channels: RX, TX, RX2, TX2, RX3, TX3, and RX4 lines.
- DS1206N-RS: optional "12V" power output on DB9M connector (softwarecontrollable);
- DS1206N-TM: optional "12V" power input from the serial port (instead of supplying
power through the power jack).
512KB or 1024KB flash memory for firmware, application, and data storage.
Four LEDs:
- Green and red status LEDs on top of the device;
- Link and speed Ethernet status LEDs on the RJ45 jack.
149

Power:
- DS1206N-RS and "-TM": onboard regulator, 10-24V input range (12V nominal);
- DS1206N-TS: direct 3.3V input (must be regulated to +/- 5%).
Board dimensions: 52.6x38.0mm.
network.
Also available as a DS1206 (DS1206N board with housing).
Platform objects:
- Ser in charge of serial channels;
- Pat "plays" patterns on green and red status LEDs;
- Button monitors the setup button;
DS1206N Hardware
Boards
150
Click on one of the links provided below to learn more about the DS1206N:
Power arrangement
Ethernet port
Multi-channel Serial Port
Status LEDs
Setup button
Power 4.3.1.1
Arrangement
The DS1206N-RS and "-TM" devices have "12V"-to-3.3V switching regulator
onboard. Conventionally, the power is supplied through the power jack. The Power
Jack of the DS1206N accepts "small" power connectors with 3.5mm diameter. Use
APR-P0011, APR-P0012, or APR-P0013 power adaptor supplied by Tibbo or similar
adaptor with 12V nominal output voltage. Adaptor current rating should be at least
500mA. On the power jack, the ground is "on the outside", as shown on the figure
below.
Alternatively, the DS1206N-RS can be powered through pin 9 of the DB9M (RS232)
connector, while the DS1206N-TM can be powered through pin 2 of the TTL
interface connector. Two internal diodes combine power jack and pin 9 (pin 2)
inputs into a single line, which goes to the internal regulator of the DS1206N.
On the DS1206N-RS, pin 9 of the DB9M connector can also be used to provide "12V"
power to an attached serial device. "12V" actually means "input power on the power
jack", which is not necessarily stabilized. The power line of the jack passes through
a software-controlled switch and is then connected to pin 9 through a Schottky
diode (shown on the diagram below). Therefore, the voltage on pin 9 is close to the
input voltage on the power jack.
151
Tibbo serial-over-IP application supplied with the DS1206N has a dedicated

"PS" ("Power on pin 9") setting to control the power switch. To turn the power
switch on from within your Tibbo BASIC/C application, enable (configure as output)
line PL_IO_NUM8_PWROUT and then set this line to HIGH. Additional programming
information can be found in "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual" (see i.o object and
DS1206 platform documentation).
If you want to use pin 9 to power an attached serial device, then you must power
the DS1206N-RS itself through the power jack. We know you understand this, but
we still had to mention it.
The DS1206N-TS board does not have "12V"-to-3.3V regulator at all. 3.3V power
required for board operation must be supplied by the external device through pin 1
of the TTL interface connector.
The DS1206N-TM and "-TS" boards do not have the power switch.
Ethernet
Port
4.3.1.2
Ethernet port of the DS1206N is of 10/100BaseT type.

Connector is of RJ45 type, pin assignment is as follows:
#1
#2
#3
#4
TX+
TXRX+
<No connection>
Boards
#5
#6
#7
#8
152
<No connection>
RX<No connection>
<No connection>
The Ethernet port of the DS1206N incorporates two Ethernet status LEDs.
Multi-channel
4.3.1.3 Serial Port
The DS1206N has four serial ports internally. The DS1206N-RS has an RS232 port
with DB9M connector, while "-TM" and "-TS" devices have TTL serial port available
through a TTL interface connector, which is a standard pin header with 2mm pitch.
The DS1206N-RS implements three outputs and four inputs. Each of the three
outputs can be used as a TX line of a serial port, or as a control output such as
RTS or DTR. Each of the four input lines can be used as an RX line of a serial port,
or as a control input such as CTS or DSR.
With three outputs and four inputs, the DS1206N can be said to offer 3.5 serial
"channels". We say "3.5 channels" and not "four channels" because one channel will
only have RX line and no TX line (remember, there are four inputs but only three
outputs).
TTL interface connector pin assignment is as follows:
Pin
Name
DS1206N-TM
DS1206N-TS
#1
3.3V
Output to external device
Input from external device
#2
Power
Power input/output
Not used
#3
GND
Ground
#4
RST
Reset input, active low, use open collector driving circuit
#5
MD
Setup line input, active low, use open collector driving circuit
#6-12
Lines of TTL serial port, see mapping table below
For more information on serial ports and I/O lines of the DS1206N see ser. and io.
object manuals ("TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Serial-over-IP application offered by Tibbo defines 15 "mapping options", or ways in
which available I/O lines are utilized. These are presented in the table below:
Mappi
ng
Available signals
Pins on the DB9M connector of the

DS1206N-RS
Miss
ing
153

optio
n
#
2
line
Optio
n0
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
---
---
Optio
n1
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR + RX/tx
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n2
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n3
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
CT
S3
rts3
Optio
n4
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
DS
R3
dtr3
Optio
n5
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n6
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
CT
S2
rts2
Optio
n7
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
DS
R2
dtr2
Optio
n8
RX/TX + RX/TX +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n9
RX/TX/CTS/rts +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
CT
S
rts
Optio
n 10
RX/TX/DSR/dtr +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
DS
R
dtr
Optio
n 11
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
CT
S4
RT
S4
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 12
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R4
DT
R4
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 13
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S4
RT
S4
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 14
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
DS
R4
DT
R4
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Mappi
ng
optio
n
Available signals
#
1
2
#1
1
#1
0
#9
#8
#7
#6
Miss
ing
line
Pins on the TTL connector of the

DS1206N-TM and "-TS"
"Available signals" column shows a particular combination of I/O lines for each
option. For example, option 0 defines the standard serial port arrangement with RX,
TX, CTS, RTS, DSR, and DTR lines. Option 2 gives you one channel with RX, TX,
CTS, and RTS lines, one more channel with just RX and TX lines, and yet another
channel with a single RX line. The TX line is "missing" because, once again, there are
only three outputs available. This is why this line is shown in grey lowercase (tx).
Notice that on the DS1206N, pin 9 of the RS232 port can be used to power the
DS1206 or provide power to an attached serial device. See Power Arrangement for
details.
Boards
154
Flash and
EEPROM Memory
4.3.1.4
The DS1206N has 512K or 1024KBytes of flash memory and 2KBytes of EEPROM
memory.
binary into.
Manual").
the DS1206 platform documentation (same manual).
L Max. 52.6 Board length

W Max. 38.0 Board width
l
Aver 2.6
Distance from the front edge of the PCB to the front surface of
.
the RJ45 jack, power jack, setup button
H Max. 17.2 Board height with components installed on the top side of the
board
t
Aver 1.6
PCB thickness
.
d1 Aver 3.6
.
d2 Aver 5.0
LED diameter
.
d3 Max. 3.5
Setup button diameter
155

m
1
m
2
m
3
m
4
n1
Aver
.
Aver
.
Aver
.
Aver
.
Aver
.
n2 Aver
.
n3 Aver
.
n4 Aver
.
n5
n6
n7
n8
n9
n1
0
h1
h2
h3
h4
p
26.0 Horizontal distance between the mounting holes (first pair)

31.0 Horizontal distance between the mounting holes (second pair)
14.0 Distance from the front edge of the PCB to the first pair mounting
holes
45.0 Distance from the front edge of the PCB to the second pair of
mounting holes
11.0 PCB outline dimension
29.0 PCB outline dimension
40.5 Distance from the front edge of the PCB to the LEDs
47.0 Distance from the front edge of the PCB to the horizontal
centerline of the TTL interface connector (present on the
DS1202N-TM and "-TS" only)
Aver 50.1 PCB outline dimension
.
.
Aver 9.0
Horizontal distance between LEDs
.
Aver 15.0 Distance from the vertical centerline of the PCB to the vertical
.
centerline of the power jack (present on the DS1206N-RS and "TM" only)
Max. 5.1
Power jack width (the power jack is present on the EM1206N-RS
and "-TM" only)
.
centerline of the setup button
Max. 7.5
Power jack height (the power jack is present on the DS1206N-RS
and "-TM" only)
Aver 5.5
Distance from the bottom surface of the PCB to the center of the
.
setup button
Max. 2.5
Height of the tallest component on the bottom side of the PCB
Aver 6.2
Distance from the bottom surface of the PCB to the centerline of
.
the DB9M connector (present on the DS1206N-RS only)
Aver 2.0
TTL pin header pin pitch (present on the DS1206N-TM and "-TS"
.
only)
contained herein.

All DS1206B boards are equipped with 1024KBytes of flash memory.
Boards
156
"RS" version: "true" RS232 port on the DB9M connector, power jack and "12V"-to3.3V power regulator, optional "12V" power on pin 9 of the DB9M (softwarecontrollable).
"TM" version: TTL serial port on the pin header connector, power jack and "12V"to-3.3V power regulator.
"TS" version: TTL serial port on the pin header connector, direct 3.3V power
input.
"TM" and "TS" versions are not standard and cannot be ordered from our online
store. Contact Tibbo if you wish to order DS1206B devices in "TM" or "TS"
configurations.
Model number
Description
DS1206N-RS
DS1206N device with 1024KBytes of flash memory, "RS" version
DS1206N-TM
DS1206N device with 1024KBytes of flash memory, "TM" version
Ethernet interface
Serial ports
One serial port with 3.5 serial channels (four inputs

and three outputs), optional "12V" power output on
pin 9
DS1206N-...-RS: RS232 port on the DB9M
connector
DS1206N-...-TM, DS1206N-...-TS: TTL serial port
on the pin header connector
UART capabilities

Clock frequency

Flash memory

and data
EEPROM memory

application data
DS1206N-...-RS, DS1206N-...-TM: DC 10-24V (12V

nominal)
DS1206N-...-TS: DC 3.3V (+/- 5%)
-5 to +70 degrees C
10-90%
52.6x38.0mm
Board dimensions
157
EM1202EV
Introduction
The EM1202EV is a BASIC-programmable board designed primarily for serial-over-IP
and serial control applications. Being small enough to fit inside your product, the
board offers a rapid development alternative to using modules, which require making
new host PCB. The EM1202EV can also be used to evaluate and test the EM1202
module it is based on.
The EM1202EV features a multi-channel serial port. The board has a single serial
port connector and is priced as a single-port product, yet it packs four independent
The board is supplied in three versions offering various serial port and power options
(see below).
The EM1202EV is fully supported by TIDE software and a dedicated DS1202 platform
that covers all hardware facilities of the board (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual"). The EM1202 platform can be used with the board as well. This product
ships preloaded with a fully functional serial-over-IP application. Written in Tibbo
BASIC/C, the application is compatible with Tibbo Device Server Toolkit software,
comes with full source codes, and can be modified by the user.
Available models
The board is supplied in three modifications.
The EM1202EV-RS is, essentially, a DS1202 device without its housing. The board
has a proper RS232 port (RS232 transceiver IC and DB9M connector), a power jack
and a power regulator ("12V"-to-3.3V), a pair of status LEDs on top of the board,
and a setup button.
The EM1202EV-TM is different from the "-RS" version in that it has a TTL serial port
Boards
158
and no status LEDs on top of the board. The port is accessible through a 12-pin
connector on the PCB. The power regulator of the board can be used to supply 3.3V
power to the attached serial device as well.
Finally, the DS1206N-TS is like the "-TM" version but has no power jack and no
"12V"-to-3.3V power regulator. Instead, an attached serial device is supposed to
provide stabilized 3.3V power to the board.
Available models and their features
EM1202EVRS
EM1202EVTM
EM1202EVTS
(RS232)
(TTL
master)
(TTL slave)
Setup button
YES
Status LEDs (on top of the board)
YES
NO
RS232 transceiver & DB9M

connector
YES
NO
NO
YES
TTL interface connector

Power jack and "12V"-to-3.3V
regulator
YES
NO
Hardware features
Based on the EM1202 BASIC-programmable embedded module.
"cross" cables).
Up to 3.5 serial channels:
- EM1202EV-RS: RS232 port (DB9M connector);
- EM1202EV-TM and "-TS": TTL serial port (pin header);
- EM1202EV-TM and "-TS": half-duplex mode with direction control;
Up to six LEDs:
- EM12-2EV-RS: Green and red status LEDs on top of the device;
- Green and red status LEDs on the RJ45 jack;
Power:
- EM1202EV-RS and "-TM": onboard regulator, 10-24V input range;
159

- EM1202EV-TS: direct 3.3V input (must be regulated to +/- 5%).
Board dimensions: 52.6x38.0mm.
network.
Also available as a DS1202 (EM1202EV-RS board with housing).
ser-defined arrays and structures.
Platform objects:
EM1202EV Hardware
Click on one of the links provided below to learn more about the EM1202EV:
Power arrangement
Ethernet port
Boards
160
Multi-channel Serial Port

Status LEDs
Setup button
Power 4.4.1.1
Arrangement
The EM1202EV-RS and "-TM" devices have "12V"-to-3.3V switching regulator
onboard. The power is supplied through the power jack. The power jack of the
EM1202EV accepts "small" power connectors with 3.5mm diameter. Use APR-P0011,
APR-P0012, or APR-P0013 power adaptor supplied by Tibbo or similar adaptor with
12V nominal output voltage. Adaptor current rating should be at least 500mA. On
the power jack, the ground is "on the outside", as shown on the figure below.
Stabilized 3.3V power used by the EM1202EV-RS and "-TM" is also available on pin
12 of the TTL interface connector. This can be used to provide power to an
attached serial device.
The EM1202EV-TS board does not have "12V"-to-3.3V regulator at all. 3.3V power
required for board operation must be supplied by the external device through pin 12
of the TTL interface connector.
Ethernet
Port
4.4.1.2
Ethernet port of the EM1202EV is of 10/100BaseT type.

#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
TX+
TXRX+
<No connection>
<No connection>
RX<No connection>
161

#8
<No connection>
The Ethernet port of the EM1202EV incorporates four LEDs (two status LEDs and
two Ethernet status LEDs). The EM1202EV-RS has another pair of status LEDs
located on top of the board. Two status LED pairs work in parallel.
Multi-channel
4.4.1.3 Serial Port
The EM1202EV has four serial ports internally. The EM1202EV-RS has an RS232 port
with DB9M connector, while "-TM" and "-TS" devices have TTL serial port available
through a TTL interface connector, which is a standard pin header with 2mm pitch.
The EM1202EV implements three outputs, four inputs, and one "spare" input (CD).
Each of the three outputs can be used as a TX line of a serial channel, or as a
control output such as RTS or DTR. Input lines can be used as an RX line of a serial
channel, or as a control input such as CTS or DSR. The spare input cannot work as
an RX line. This input is not used by the serial-over-IP application supplied by Tibbo
and will be largely omitted from further discussion. Your Tibbo BASIC/C application
can always use this extra input if you require it.
With three outputs and four inputs, the EM1202EV can be said to offer 3.5 serial
outputs).
DB9M connector pin assignment:
Pin
Name
EM1202EV-RS
#1
CD
Spare input*
#2-4, 69
Lines of the RS232 port, see mapping table below
#5
GND
Ground
*Not used in Tibbo serial-over-IP application. Your Tibbo BASIC/C program can use
this line if needed.
TTL interface connector pin assignment:
Pin
Name
EM1202EV-TM
#1
CD
Spare input*
EM1202EV-TS
Boards
#2-8
162
Lines of TTL serial port, see mapping table below
#9
MD
Setup line input, active low, use open collector driving circuit
#10
RST
Reset input, active low, use open collector driving circuit
#11
GND
Ground
#12
3.3V
Output to external device
Input from external device
*Not used in Tibbo serial-over-IP application. Your Tibbo BASIC/C program can use
this line if needed.
Serial-over-IP application offered by Tibbo defines 15 "mapping options", or ways in
which available I/O lines are utilized ("spare" input is not used or shown). These are
presented in the table below:
Mappi
ng
optio
n
Available signals

EM1202EV-RS
Miss
ing
#
2
#3
#8
#7
#6
#4
#9
line
Optio
n0
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
---
---
Optio
n1
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR + RX/tx
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n2
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n3
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
CT
S3
rts3
Optio
n4
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
DS
R3
dtr3
Optio
n5
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n6
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
CT
S2
rts2
Optio
n7
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
DS
R2
dtr2
Optio
n8
RX/TX + RX/TX +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n9
RX/TX/CTS/rts +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
CT
S
rts
Optio
n 10
RX/TX/DSR/dtr +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
DS
R
dtr
Optio
n 11
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
CT
S4
RT
S4
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 12
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R4
DT
R4
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 13
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S4
RT
S4
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 14
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
DS
R4
DT
R4
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Mappi
ng
optio
Available signals
#
6
#5
#4
#3
#7
#8
#1
Miss
ing
line
163

n
Pins on the TTL connector of the

EM1202EV-TM and "-TS"
Additional Information on Serial Port Lines

This topic contains information related to programming of the EM1202EV. It assumes
that you are familiar with Tibbo BASIC/C and the concept of "platforms". Everything
you need to know regarding this can be found in "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual".
You can create Tibbo BASIC/C applications for the EM1202EV using two different
platforms -- the "DS1202" platform and "EM1202" platform. The DS1202 platform can
be used because the EM1202EV is, essentially, a DS1202 device without the plastic
housing. The EM1202 platform can be used because the board is based on the
EM1202 module.
Generally speaking, the EM1202 platform offers "more". It addresses every hardware
faculty of the EM1202. The DS1202 platform is much more limited and only includes
features that can be used when the EM1202 module is mounted on the EM1202EV
board (inside the DS1202 device).
The biggest difference between the two platforms is in how the I/O lines are wired.
The EM1202 platform defines 32 I/O lines. Half of these are not used on the
EM1202EV, and the remaining lines are interconnected. Each line of the serial port
(save for the "spare" line discussed previously) is connected to two GPIO lines of
the EM1202. This was done to ensure more flexible mapping (see Multi-Channel
Serial Port). Care should be taken to avoid enabling both outputs of the same serial
port line simultaneously! This can permanently damage the EM1202. We suggest
that you use GPIO8/P1.0/RX0 - GPIO14/P1.6/RX3 for actual input/output and use
GPIO16/P2.0/INT0 - GPIO19/P2.3/INT3 as interrupt inputs only.
The DS1202 platform "looks" at the same hardware differently and defines fewer I/O
lines. Each of the physical line pair is represented by a single GPIO line. GPIO lines of
the EM1202 that are unused are not defined at all.
GPIO lines of the EM1202

platform -- two lines are
connected to each serial port
line, except in the case of
the "spare" input
GPIO lines of the

DS1202 platform
DB9M pin
and its
conventional
function ("RS")
TTL
connector
pin ("-TS",
"-TM")
GPIO8/P1.0/
RX0
GPIO16/P2.0/
INT0
PL_IO_NUM_0_RX
0_INT0
#2 (RX
input)
#6
GPIO9/P1.1/
TX0
GPIO20/P2.4/
INT4
PL_IO_NUM_1_TX
0_INT4
#3 (TX
output)
#5
GPIO10/
P1.2/RX1
GPIO17/P2.1/
INT1
PL_IO_NUM_2_RX
1_INT1
#8 (CTS
input)
#4
GPIO11/
P1.3/TX1
GPIO21/P2.5/
INT5
PL_IO_NUM_3_TX
1_INT5
#7 (RTS
output)
#3
GPIO12/
GPIO18/P2.2/
PL_IO_NUM_4_RX
#6 (DSR
#7
Boards
P1.4/RX2
INT2
2_INT2
input)
GPIO13/
P1.5/TX2
GPIO22/P2.6/
INT6
PL_IO_NUM_5_TX
2_INT6
#4 (DTR
output)
#8
GPIO14/
P1.6/RX3
GPIO19/P2.3/
INT3
PL_IO_NUM_6_RX
3_INT3
#9 (RI
input)
#2
---
GPIO23/P2.7/
INT7*
PL_IO_NUM_7_INT
7
#1 (CD
input)*
#1*
164
* Spare input (see above).
Flash and
EEPROM Memory
4.4.1.4
The EM1202EV has 1024KBytes of flash memory and 2KBytes of EEPROM memory.
binary into.
Manual").
the EM1202 and DS1202 platform documentation (same manual).
L Max. 52.6 Board length

W Max. 38.0 Board width
165

l
H
t
d1
d2
d3
m
1
m
2
m
3
m
4
n1
n2
n3
n4
n5
n6
n7
n8
n9
n1
0
h1
h2
h3
h4
p
Aver 2.6
Distance from the front edge of the PCB to the front surface of
.
the RJ45 jack, power jack, setup button
Max. 17.2 Board height with components installed on the top side of the
board
Aver 1.6
PCB thickness
.
Aver 3.6
.
Aver 5.0
LED diameter (these LEDs are present on the EM1202EV-RS only)
.
Max. 3.5
Setup button diameter
Aver 26.0 Horizontal distance between the mounting holes (first pair)
.
Aver 31.0 Horizontal distance between the mounting holes (second pair)
.
Aver 14.0 Distance from the front edge of the PCB to the first pair mounting
.
holes
Aver 45.0 Distance from the front edge of the PCB to the second pair of
.
mounting holes
.
.
Aver 40.5 Distance from the front edge of the PCB to the LEDs (present on
.
the EM1202EV-RS only)
Aver 47.0 Distance from the front edge of the PCB to the horizontal
.
centerline of the TTL interface connector (present on the
EM1202EV-TM and "-TS" only)
.
.
Aver 9.0
Horizontal distance between LEDs (present on the EM1202EV-RS
.
only)
.
centerline of the power jack (present on the EM1202EV-RS and "TM" only)
Max. 5.1
Power jack width (the power jack is present on the EM1202EV-RS
and "-TM" only)
.
centerline of the setup button
Max. 7.5
Power jack height (the power jack is present on the EM1202EV-RS
and "-TM" only)
Aver 5.5
Distance from the bottom surface of the PCB to the center of the
.
setup button
Max. 2.5
Height of the tallest component on the bottom side of the PCB
Aver 6.2
Distance from the bottom surface of the PCB to the centerline of
.
the DB9M connector (present on the EM1202EV-RS only)
Aver 2.0
TTL connector pin pitch (connector present on the EM1202EV-TM
.
and "-TS" only)
contained herein.
Boards
166

All EM1202EV boards are equipped with 1024KBytes of flash memory.

"RS" version: "true" RS232 port on the DB9M connector, power jack and "12V"-to3.3V power regulator.
"TM" version: TTL serial port on the pin header connector, power jack and "12V"to-3.3V power regulator.
"TS" version: TTL serial port on the pin header connector, direct 3.3V power
input.
"TM" and "TS" versions are not standard and cannot be ordered from our online
store. Contact Tibbo if you wish to order DS1206B devices in "TM" or "TS"
configurations.
Model number
Description
EM1202EV-RS
EM1202EV device with 1024KBytes of flash memory, "RS" version
EM1202EV-TM
EM1202EV device with 1024KBytes of flash memory, "TM" version
Ethernet interface

built-in
Serial ports
One serial port with 3.5 serial channels (four inputs

and three outputs)
DS1206N-...-RS: RS232 port on the DB9M
connector
DS1206N-...-TM, DS1206N-...-TS: TTL serial port
on the pin header connector
UART capabilities

Clock frequency

Flash memory

167

EEPROM memory

application data
DS1206N-...-RS, DS1206N-...-TM: DC 10-24V (12V

nominal)
DS1206N-...-TS: DC 3.3V (+/- 5%)
-5 to +70 degrees C
10-90%
52.6x38.0mm
Board dimensions
EM1206EV
The EM1206EV Evaluation Board offers a convenient way to test the EM1206 BASIC/
C-programmable Ethernet module.
The board features the following components:
The EM1206 and RJ203 modules (assembled together and soldered into the
EM1206EV board).
Connector for a wireless add-on module, such as the GA1000 Wi-Fi device
(purchased separately).
Power jack and a switching power regulator.
Multi-channel RS232 port with three RS232 outputs and four RS232 inputs.
Expansion connector with GND, 3.3V (Vcc), 12V (Vin), and 8 TTL I/O lines.
Eight yellow LEDs to indicate the status of I/O lines (see RS232 port and
Expansion Connector topic).
Four jumpers to select between RS232 port and expansion connector (see RS232
Boards
168
port and Expansion Connector topic).

Two buttons: setup (connected to the MD line of the EM1206), and reset
(connected to the RST line).
Green and red status LEDs (connected to SG and SR lines of the EM1206). Further
information on status LEDs can be found in Appendix 1: Status LEDs.
Buzzer (connected to the CO line of the EM1206).
Supercapacitor (backup power source) for the RTC of the EM1206.
Board structure is further illustrated by this block diagram:
Wireless Add-on Connector

This connector is used to plug in an optional wireless add-on, such as the GA1000
Wi-Fi module, as well as other add-on modules that may be released by Tibbo in the
future.
The connector has 10 pins, as shown on the drawing below. Apart from the ground
and Vcc (3.3V) lines, there are eight I/O lines that are connected directly to port 1
(GPIO lines 8-15) of the EM1206.
169

Pin
EM1206 line
GA1000 line
#1
GND
GND
#2
Vcc (3.3V)
Vcc (3.3V)
#3
GPIO15/P1.7
CS
#4
GPIO10/P1.2
---
#5
GPIO13/P1.5
DO
#6
GPIO9/P1.1
---
#7
GPIO11/P1.3
RST
#8
GPIO8/P1.0
---
#9
GPIO12/P1.4
DI
#10
GPIO14/P1.6
CLK
It should be noted that GPIO lines 8-15 can be used for any desired I/O purpose,
not just to control a wireless add-on board. You can use this connector for your
own control purposes.
Main and Backup Power

The power jack of the EM1206EV accepts "small" power connectors, 3.5mm in
diameter. Use APR-P0011, APR-P0012, or APR-P0013 power adaptor supplied by
Tibbo or a similar adaptor with 12V nominal output voltage. Adaptor current rating
should be at least 500mA. On the power jack, the ground is "on the outside", as
Alternatively, you can power the board through the Vin line on the expansion
connector. Two onboard diodes combine power jack and Vin inputs into a single line,
which goes to the switching regulator. Clean 3.3V output produced by the regulator
is used to power the EM1206EV board itself, the EM1206 module, and optionally an
add-on board plugged into the wireless add-on connector. This 3.3V power is
available on the expansion connector as well.
The following drawing illustrates this power arrangement:
Boards
170
The EM1206 module features an RTC and a dedicated VCCB input for providing
backup power when the EM1206EV is off. On the EM1206EV, the backup power
comes from a supercapacitor located on the bottom side of the board. The
supercapacitor charges almost instantly and, in the absence of main power,
supports the RTC for about a week.
Notice that the supercapacitor is not connected to the Vcc line directly. The
VCCB pin "expects" the backup power to have a nominal voltage of 2.5V. See
the Real-time Counter topic of the EM1206 manual for details.
Multi-channel RS232 Port and Expansion Connector

The EM1206 module has four serial ports (four pairs of RX and TX lines). Each of
those lines can also be used as general-purpose I/O. Hence, each line can serve as
a CTS, RTS, DSR, or DTR line; or play another role which is unrelated to the function
of the serial port.
The I/O lines of the EM1206 module are bi-directional: each line can be programmed
to work as an output or input line. On the RS232 port of the EM1206EV, however,
each line has a fixed direction defined by the RS232 transceiver IC. The IC used on
the EM1206EV board implements three outputs and four inputs. Therefore, only
seven I/O lines of the EM1206 are connected to the RS232 port of the EM1206EV
board.
171
Out of these seven lines, each of the three outputs can be used as a TX line of a
serial port, or as a control output such as RTS, DTR, etc. Each of the four input
lines can be used as an RX line of a serial port, or as a control input such as CTS,
DSR, CD, etc. It can be said that the RS232 port of the EM1206EV offers 3.5 serial
outputs).
Note that all four inputs of the serial port are connected to the EM1206 module
through jumpers. Jumpers are necessary to select between the RS232 port inputs
and expansion connector terminals. Putting a jumper "up" selects an input from the
RS232 transceiver, putting a jumper "down" selects an expansion connector line.
All eight lines are available on the expansion connector as TTL signals. When the
expansion connector is used, any of these eight lines can be used as an input or
output.
You can conveniently see the state of I/O lines on a bank of yellow LEDs. An LED is
ON when a corresponding TTL line is HIGH. Notice that the RS232 transceiver IC
inverts the signal on each line. For example, if the GPIO1/P0.1/TX/INT1 pin of the
EM1206 is HIGH then the TX pin on the DB9M collector is LOW.
For more information on serial ports and I/O lines of the EM1206 see ser. and io.
object manuals ("TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Serial-over-IP application offered by Tibbo defines 15 "mapping options", or ways to
utilize the available I/O lines. These are presented in the table below:
Mappi
ng
optio
n
Available signals
Pins on the DB9M connector

#
2
#3
#8
#7
#6
#4
#1
Miss
ing
line
Optio
n0
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
---
---
Optio
n1
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR + RX/tx
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX
TX
CT
RT
RX3
TX
RX
tx4
Boards
n2
RX/TX + RX/tx
Optio
n3
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
Optio
n4
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
RX
TX
CT
S
Optio
n5
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
Optio
n6
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
Optio
n7
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
Optio
n8
172
RX3
TX
3
CT
S3
rts3
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
DS
R3
dtr3
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
CT
S2
rts2
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
DS
R2
dtr2
RX/TX + RX/TX +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n9
RX/TX/CTS/rts +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
CT
S
rts
Optio
n 10
RX/TX/DSR/dtr +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
DS
R
dtr
Optio
n 11
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
CT
S4
RT
S4
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 12
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R4
DT
R4
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 13
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S4
RT
S4
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 14
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
DS
R4
DT
R4
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Mappi
ng
optio
n
Available signals
R
X
TX
RX
2/
TX
2/
RX
3/
TX
3/
RX
4
TX4
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
Terminal blocks of the expansion connector

(as marked on the EM1206EV)
only three outputs available on the RS232 port. This is why this line is shown in grey
lowercase (tx). This line, of course, is present and available on the expansion
connector.
173
EM120/EM200-EV
The EM120/200-EV Evaluation Board offers a convenient way of testing the EM120
(which is no longer supported as a programmable device) and EM200 embedded
modules. The board features the following components:
A socket for EM120 or EM200 installation
Power jack and a switching power regulator (12VDC-->5VDC, adaptor current
rating must be no less than 500mA)
RJ45 connector and 10/100BaseT Ethernet Magnetics (EM120 and EM200 do not
have built-in magnetics)
DB9M RS232 connector and RS232 transceiver (supported signals are RX, TX,
RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR)
Setup button (connected to the MD line of EM120/EM200)
Two Ethernet LEDs and two status LEDs (connected to LED lines of EM120/200).
Five additional LEDs connected to lines P0, P1, P6-8 of the EM120/EM200
15-pin expansion connector provides access to EM120/EM200's serial and generalpurpose I/O pins (therefore, all I/O lines on this connector are of TTL type)
Power Jack
Power Jack of the EM120/EM200-EV accepts "large" power connectors with 5.5mm
diameter. Use APR-1014, APR-1015A, or APR-1018A power adaptor supplied by
Tibbo or similar adaptor with 12V nominal output voltage. Adaptor current rating
Boards
Ethernet Port Pin Assignment

RJ45 Ethernet connector has the following pin assignment:
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
TX+
TXRX+
<No connection>
<No connection>
RX<No connection>
<No connection>
RS232 Port Pin Assignment

DB9M RS232 connector has the following pin assignment:
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
<No connection>
RX (input)
TX (output)
DTR (output)
Ground
DSR (input)
RTS (output)
CTS (input)
<No connection>
174
175
Expansion Connector Pin Assignment

15-pin expansion connector has the following pin assignment:
P0
P1
P6
P7
P8
GND
VCC
RST
MD
DTR
RTS
TX
RX
CTS
DSR
Connected to pin P0 of EM120/EM200

Ground
+5V from the EM120/EM200-EV board. Available "spare" current about
50mA
Reset (active high) from the EM120/EM200-EV board. The signal is
generated by an onboard reset IC. The same signal is applied to pin RST of
EM120/EM200
Connected to the download/setup button on the EM120/EM200-EV board.
The signal is connected to pin MD of EM120/EM200
Connected to pin P3(DTR) of EM120/EM200
Connected to pin P5(RTS) of EM120/EM200
Connected to pin TX of EM120/EM200
Connected to pin RX of EM120/EM200
Connected to pin P4(CTS) of EM120/EM200
Connected to pin P2(DSR) of EM120/EM200
Output signals that are present both on the DB9M and expansion connectors (DTR,
RTS, TX) need not be switched. So, for example, the TX (output) line from the
EM120/EM200 is connected to the RS232 transceiver IC and to the expansion
connector. For input signals (RX, CTS, DSR) there must be a way to disconnect the
RS232 transceiver IC from the EM120/EM200. Three jumpers (combined with pins
RX, CTS, DSR of the expansion connector) serve this purpose.
For example, when the RX jumper is closed the RX pin of the EM120/EM200 receives
a signal from the RS232 transceiver. When the jumper is opened you can use the RX
pin on the expansion connector to supply a TTL RX signal from your own external
board. Figure below illustrates this.
Maximum load for all CMOS-type lines (P0, P1, ... RX, TX...) is 10mA.
Development Systems
176
Development Systems
The following development systems are currently being offered by Tibbo:
EM1000EV
EM1000TEV
EM500EV
EM1000EV
The EM1000-EV Evaluation System offers a convenient way of testing the EM1000
BASIC/C-programmable embedded module. The board features the following
components:
Metal base.
The NB1000 network board with the EM1000 module (EM1000-512K-ST) installed
on a socket.
The IB1000 interface board with four RS232 ports.
The IC1000 interboard cable interconnecting the NB1000 and the IB1000.
The LB1000 LED board, which is connected to the NB1000 by the LC1000 LED
board cable.
The LB1001 LED board, which is connected to the IB1000 by the LC1000 cable.
177
The EM1000-EV requires 12VDC/0.5A power adaptor.
EM1000TEV
The EM1000-TEV development system has been designed to aid you in developing
data terminals, data collection devices, and control equipment based on the EM1000
embedded module. Hence, the abbreviation: "TEV" stands for "terminal evaluation".
The EM1000-TEV includes the following boards:
TEV-MB0 motherboard with EM1000-512K-ST module. The EM1000 can optionally
have a GA1000 Wi-Fi slave module installed on top of it.
TEV-KB0 keypad board with 16 keys and 4 LEDs.
TEV-LBx display board. Three different display boards are currently supplied:
- TEV-LB0 (shown): carries 128x64, black/white WINSTAR WG12864A LCD panel
(SAMSUNG S6B0108 controller);
- TEV-LB1: carries 128x96, 4-bit RITDISPLAY RGS13128096 OLED panel
(SOLOMON SSD1329 controller);
- TEV-LB2: carries 176x220 AMPIRE AM176220 TFT panel (HIMAX HX8309
Development Systems
178
controller).
TEV-IBx interface boards. Four boards can be installed at the same time, and two
board kinds are currently supplied:
- TEV-IB0: RS232/422/485 serial port board (each EM1000-TEV system has two
of them);
- TEV-IB1: 3 x opto-input/ 3 x relay output board (each EM1000-TEV system
has two of them). Opto-inputs can optionally be used to connected a Wiegand
or clock/data reader.
You can choose what display board will be installed on your EM1000-TEV. See
Ordering Info for details.
The EM1000-TEV is supplied with a sophisticated Tibbo BASIC/C "terminal" demo
application that demonstrates the use of all hardware facilities of this development
system. The application implements a hypothetical data collection terminal complete
with onscreen setup menus, browser interface, event log, etc. The latest version of
the application can be obtained from Tibbo website.
TEV-MB0
The TEV-MB0 is a motherboard that has the EM1000 module (EM1000-512K-ST)
installed on it. The EM1000 is installed on a socket. Schematic diagram of the TEVMB0 board can be found on Tibbo website.
The TEV-MB0 motherboard also features the following:
A switching regulator with 5V output. 5V power is provided on all connectors to
other boards of the EM1000-TEV system.
A switching regulator with 3.3V output. 3.3V power is provided on all connectors
to other boards of the EM1000-TEV system and also powers the EM1000.
MD button and jumper. Connected to the MD input of the EM1000. See Appendix
2: Setup Button (MD line) for details.
RESET button. This is a master reset for the EM1000 module.
Status LEDs -- for details see Appendix 1: Status LEDs.
U/S jumper. Leave it opened.
PLL jumper. Powering up with this jumper closed causes the EM1000 to run with
the PLL off. For normal operation leave this jumper opened.
TEV-KB0
The TEV-KB0 board carries 16 keys and 4 green LEDs. The keys are arranged as a
4x4 matrix, with 4 scan lines and 4 return lines. Each scan line additionally controls
one green LED. Schematic diagram of the TEV-KP0 board can be found on Tibbo
website.
TEV-LBx Board Connector
The TEV-KB0 board is connected to the TEV-MB0 motherboard through a 2x12-pin
connector. Each two pins of the connector are combined together for better
electrical contact. Therefore, the connector effectively has 12 lines.
179
Pin #
1
Function
VIN (12V)
Keypad
5V
3.3V
GND
GPIO24*
Scan1, LED1
GPIO25*
Scan2, LED2
GPIO26*
Scan3, LED3
GPIO27*
Scan4, LED4
GPIO28*
Return1
10
GPIO29*
Return2
11
GPIO30*
Return3
12
GPIO31*
Return4
* I/O pins of the EM1000 module

Required initialization code in Tibbo BASIC/C application
This section assumes that you are familiar with Tibbo BASIC/C and TIDE software.
These are documented in the "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual".
For correct board operation, click Project-> Settings, and select "EM1000" or
"EM1000G" platform. Additionally, click Customize to open a Customize Platform
dialog. In the dialog, double-click the Keypad (kp.) Object line and choose
"Enabled".
The following initialization code should also be added to your project:
Development Systems
180
kp.scanlinesmapping="24,25,26,27"
kp.returnlinesmapping="28,29,30,31"
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_24
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_25
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_26
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_27
io.enabled=YES
kp.enabled=YES
All key-related events are served in the event handler for the on_kp() event. The
key_code argument carries the code of the key. Keycodes of each key are indicated
in parentheses on the drawing above. For example, key <5> has the code of 12Hex.
Each scan line of the keypad also controls one LED. To turn the LED on, set the
corresponding scan line LOW. This will not affect the operation of the keypad.
TEV-LBx Boards
The TEV-LBx boards carry display panels. Three boards are currently supplied by
Tibbo:
TEV-LB0: carries 128x64, black/white WINSTAR WG12864A LCD panel (SAMSUNG
S6B0108 controller).
TEV-LB1: carries 128x96, 4-bit RITDISPLAY RGS13128096 OLED panel (SOLOMON
SSD1329 controller).
TEV-LB2: carries 176x220 AMPIRE AM176220 TFT panel (HIMAX HX8309
controller).
You can choose what display board will be installed on your EM1000-TEV. See
Ordering Info for details.
TEV-LBx Board Connector
The TEV-LBx boards are connected to the TEV-MB0 motherboard through a 2x20pin connector. Each two pins of the connector are combined together for better
181
Pin #
1
Function
VIN (12V)
5V
3.3V
GND
GPIO48*
GPIO47*
GPIO46*
GPIO39/P4.7*
GPIO38/P4.6*
10
GPIO37/P4.5*
11
GPIO36/P4.4*
12
GPIO35/P4.3*
13
GPIO34/P4.2*
14
GPIO33/P4.1*
15
GPIO32/P4.0*
16
GPIO44*
17
GPIO43*
18
GPIO42*
19
GPIO41*
20
GPIO40*
* I/O pins of the EM1000 module
Development Systems
182
TEV-LB0
5.2.3.1
The TEV-LB0 board carries a 128x64, black/white WINSTAR WG12864A LCD panel.
This panel is based on a SAMSUNG S6B0108 controller (there are two controllers on
one panel). The WG12864A does not have the contrast control, so the contrast
control circuit is added externally. Additionally, there is a control line for the LCD
panel's backlight. The image displayed on the panel is not visible unless the
backlight is turned on.
Related datasheets, as well as the schematic diagram for the TEV-LB0 board can be
found on Tibbo website.
Interconnection between the EM1000 and the panel/ contrast control/
backlight control
Pin #(1)
EM1000 I/O line
Panel
GPIO48
CTRST_SET (2 )
GPIO47
BL(3 )
GPIO46
EN
GPIO39/P4.7
D7
GPIO38/P4.6
D6
10
GPIO37/P4.5
D5
11
GPIO36/P4.4
D4
12
GPIO35/P4.3
D3, CTRST3(2 )
13
GPIO34/P4.2
D2, CTRST2(2 )
14
GPIO33/P4.1
D1, CTRST1(2 )
15
GPIO32/P4.0
D0, CTRST0(2 )
16
GPIO44
RST
17
GPIO43
D/I
18
GPIO42
R/W
19
GPIO41
CS2
20
GPIO40
CS1
(1)
Pin number on the TEV-LB0 connector.
(2)
The line of the contrast control circuit, not the LCD panel itself.
(3)
Backlight control line.

For correct panel operation, click Project-> Settings, and select "EM1000" or
dialog. In the dialog, double-click the Display Panel Type line and choose "Samsung
S6B0108 (Winstar WG12864A)".
lcd.iomapping="44,46,40,41,43,42,4" 'RST,EN,CS1,CS2,DI,RW,data_bus
183

io.num=PL_IO_NUM_46
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_44
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_40
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_41
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_42
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_43
io.enabled=YES
lcd.width=128
lcd.height=64
lcd.rotated=NO
lcd.inverted=NO
lcd.enabled=YES
set_lcd_contrast(11)
The set_lcd_contrast() procedure should be called after the panel initialization. The
procedure sets the contrast level in 16 steps -- the contrast control hardware only
has 4 data lines. Therefore, the contrast level of 16 is equal to the contrast level of
0.
Here is the suggested code for this function:
Sub Set_lcd_contrast(level As Byte)

'Contrast control shares the data bus with the LCD. Initialize LCD first,
'then set the contrast (before LCD initialization the bus may be driven
'by the LCD)
'enable port, output data
io.portnum=PL_IO_PORT_NUM_4
io.portenabled=255
io.portstate=level
'generate strobe for the data register (on the LCD PCB)
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_48
io.enabled=YES
io.state=HIGH
io.state=LOW
'disable port
io.portenabled=0
End Sub
Use the following code to turn on the backlight:
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_47 'backlight
io.enabled=YES
io.state=LOW
Development Systems
184
TEV-LB1
5.2.3.2
The TEV-LB1 board carries a 128x96, 4-bit RITDISPLAY RGS13128096 OLED panel.
This panel is based on a SOLOMON SSD1329 controller.
Interconnection between the EM1000 and the panel
Pin #(1)
EM1000 I/O line
Panel
GPIO48
---
GPIO47
---
GPIO46
---
GPIO39/P4.7
D7
GPIO38/P4.6
D6
10
GPIO37/P4.5
D5
11
GPIO36/P4.4
D4
12
GPIO35/P4.3
D3
13
GPIO34/P4.2
D2
14
GPIO33/P4.1
D1
15
GPIO32/P4.0
D0
16
GPIO44
RST
17
GPIO43
D/C
18
GPIO42
R/W
19
GPIO41
20
GPIO40
CS
(1)

dialog. In the dialog, double-click the Display Panel Type line and choose "Solomon
SSD1329 (Ritdisplay RGS13128096)".
185
lcd.iomapping="44,43,42,41,40,4" 'RST,DC,WR,RD,CS,data_bus
'(W is marked "R/W" on the schematic diagram, RD is marked "E")
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_40
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_41
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_42
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_43
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_44
io.enabled=YES
lcd.width=128
lcd.height=96
lcd.rotated=NO
lcd.inverted=NO
lcd.enabled=YES
TEV-LB2
5.2.3.3
The TEV-LB2 board carries a 176x220 AMPIRE AM176220 TFT panel. This panel is
based on a HIMAX HX8309 controller. There is also a control line for panel's
backlight. The image displayed on the panel is not visible unless the backlight is
turned on.
Interconnection between the EM1000 and the panel/ backlight control
Pin #(1)
EM1000 I/O line
Panel
GPIO48
---
GPIO47
BL(2 )
GPIO46
---
GPIO39/P4.7
D7
GPIO38/P4.6
D6
10
GPIO37/P4.5
D5
11
GPIO36/P4.4
D4
12
GPIO35/P4.3
D3
13
GPIO34/P4.2
D2
Development Systems
14
GPIO33/P4.1
D1
15
GPIO32/P4.0
D0
16
GPIO44
RST
17
GPIO43
DC
18
GPIO42
WR
19
GPIO41
RD
20
GPIO40
CS
(1)
(2)
Backlight control line.
186

dialog. In the dialog, double-click the Display Panel Type line and choose "Himax
HX8309 (Ampire AM176220)".
lcd.iomapping="44,43,42,41,40,4" 'RST,DC,WR,RD,CS,data_bus
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_44
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_43
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_42
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_41
io.enabled=YES
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_40
io.enabled=YES
lcd.width=176
lcd.height=220
lcd.rotated=NO
lcd.inverted=NO
lcd.enabled=YES
Use the following code to turn on the backlight:
io.num=PL_IO_NUM_47
io.enabled=YES
io.state=LOW
187
TEV-IBx Boards
The TEV-IBx are interface boards. Two boards are currently supplied by Tibbo:
TEV-IB0: RS232/422/485 serial port board (each EM1000-TEV system has two of
them);
TEV-IB1: 3 x opto-input/ 3 x relay output board (each EM1000-TEV system has
two of them). Opto-inputs can optionally be used to connected a Wiegand or
clock/data reader.
TEV-IBx Board Connector
The TEV-IBx boards are connected to the TEV-MB0 motherboard through a 2x10-pin
connector. Each two pins of the connector are combined together for better
Each EM1000-TEV system has four interface boards and each board is controlled
through one of the four serial ports of the EM1000 module.
Pin
#
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
VIN (12V)
5V
3.3V
GND
Port 4
GPIO8/RX0*
GPIO10/RX1*
GPIO12/RX2*
GPIO14/RX3*
GPIO9/TX0*
GPIO11/TX1*
GPIO13/TX2*
GPIO15/TX3*
GPIO16/INT0/
CTS0*
GPIO17/INT1/
CTS1*
GPIO18/INT2/
CTS2*
GPIO19/INT3/
CTS3*
GPIO0/RTS0*
GPIO1/RTS1*
GPIO2/RTS2*
GPIO3/RTS3*
GPIO20/INT4/
DSR0*
GPIO21/INT5/
DSR1*
GPIO22/INT6/
DSR2*
GPIO23/INT7/
DSR3*
10
GPIO4/DTR0*
GPIO5/DTR1*
GPIO6/DTR2*
GPIO7/DTR3*
* I/O pins of the EM1000 module. Not all pin functions are shown. See EM1000
documentation for full description.
Development Systems
188
TEV-IB0
5.2.4.1
The TEV-IB0 implements one RS232/422/485 serial port. The port is built around
SIPEX SP334 multi-protocol transceiver IC. A small PIC10F200 microcontroller from
MICROCHIP is also used. This microcontroller replaces discreet logic that would be
needed to control the SP334 in different operating modes. Related datasheets,
assembly program for the microcontroller, as well as the schematic diagram for the
TEV-IB0 board can be found on Tibbo website.
Two switches are provided on the board for protocol selection. Switch 1 selects
between RS232 and RS422/485 signal levels. Switch 2 selects half-duplex or fullduplex mode of operation. Note that these switches only control the operation of
the SP334. Serial ports of the EM1000 must be correctly preset for desired
communication mode as well.
For your convenience, each TEV-IB0 board is supplied with a TB100 terminal block
adaptor.
DB-9M connector pin assignment
Pin #
RS422 mode
RS485 mode
RS232 mode
---
RTS- (output)
---
RX (input)
RX- (input)
RX- (input)
TX (output)
TX+ (output)
TX+ (output)
DTR (output)
TX- (output)
TX- (output)
SYSTEM GROUND
SYSTEM GROUND
SYSTEM GROUND
DSR (input)
RX+ (input)
RX+ (input)
RTS (output)
RTS+ (output)
---
CTS (input)
CTS+ (input)
---
---
CTS- (input)
---

Correct preset of serial ports falls outside the scope of this manual. This section will
only remind you that you need to set a correct serial port mode matching the mode
selected by the switches of the TEV-IB0. For RS232 or RS422 mode, set
ser.interface=PL_SER_SI_FULLDUPLEX. For the RS485 mode set
ser.interface=PL_SER_SI_HALFDUPLEX.
Do not forget that all lines of the EM1000 are configured as inputs by default. Any
189

line that should work as an output should be configured as such. This is done
through the "I/O" (io.) object. The only exception is the TX line that becomes an
output automatically once the serial port is enabled.
TEV-IB1
5.2.4.2
The TEV-IB1 board contains three relays and three optically isolated inputs.
Common, normally closed, and normally opened lines of each relay are available on
the terminal block. Six status LEDs located on the board indicate the state of relays
and opto-inputs.
The relays can switch loads of up to 24V/1A. This rating is for non-inductive loads
only! For inductive loads, the maximum allowed current falls to about 200mA. Status
LEDs 4-6 indicate the state of relays. An LED will be ON when a corresponding relay
is activated.
Each optically isolated input has a pair of (+) and (-) contacts with a 330 Ohm
series resistor and a LED of the photo-couple between them. The input is activated
at a differential voltage of around 4V, and can accept input voltages as high as
24V. Both (+) and (-) inputs are isolated from the rest of the system. Status LEDs
1-3 indicate the state of inputs. An LED will be ON when the current is flowing
through a corresponding input and the input is "triggered".
You can use inputs 1-3 to connect to external sensors. Alternatively, inputs 1 and 2
can be used to attach a Wiegand or clock/data card reader. See below for details.
Related EM1000 I/O lines
Function
EM1000 I/O line(2)

TX
RTS
Relay2(3 )
DTR
Relay3(3 )
RX
Input1(4 )
CTS
Input2(4 )
DSR
Input3(4 )
Pin #(1)
(1)
Relay1(3 )
Pin number on the TEV-IB1 connector.
(2)
There are four ports, so lines are independent for each port. For example, "TX"
means "TX0" for port 1, "TX1" for port 2, etc.
(3)
Set GPIO line of the EM1000 LOW to activate the relay (do not forget to
configure this line as an output).
(4)
The GPIO line of the EM1000 will be LOW when the current is flowing through the
input.
Terminal block
Development Systems
Terminal #(1)
Function
Relay1, common
Relay1, normally closed
Relay1, normally opened
Relay2, common
Relay3, common
10
Input1, positive line (+)
11
Input1, negative line (-)
12
13
14
15
190
Connecting a card reader

Ability to handle a Wiegand or clock/data reader output is a unique feature of the
serial ports of the EM1000. For more information, see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual" ("Serial" (ser.) object documentation).
When connecting a clock/data reader, attach the reader's DATA output to the
positive line of the input 1 of the TEV-IB1 board. Attach the CLOCK output to the
positive line of the input 2. Combine negative lines of inputs 1 and 2 together and
connect them to the ground line of the reader. Leave JP4 jumper opened.
When connecting a Wiegand reader, attach the reader's W0 output to the positive
191

line of the input 1 of the TEV-IB1 board. Attach the W1 output to the positive line
of the input 2. Combine negative lines of inputs 1 and 2 together and connect them
to the ground line of the reader. Close the jumper JP4.
Most Wiegand readers have open-collector outputs, which means you may need to
install pull-up resistors on their W0 and W1 outputs.
The function of the JP4 is to combine the signals W0 and W1 -- this is required for
the EM1000's serial port operation in Wiegand mode.
Jumpers JP1-3 should be left open.
Ordering Info
The EM1000-TEV has several versions available. The numbering scheme is as
follows:
The following is included into each EM1000-TEV:

The TEV-MB0 board with the EM1000-512K-ST or EM1000-1024K-ST module (see
EM1000 Ordering Info for details).
Additionally, the GA1000 Wi-Fi module and antenna are installed if option "G" is
specified.
The TEV-KB0 keypad board.
The TEV-LBx display board of your choice.
Two TEV-IB0 boards, installed on ports 1 and 2.
Two TEV-IB1 boards, installed on ports 3 and 4.
Two TB100 terminal block adaptors.
One 12V/1A power adaptor.
One WAS-1499 "straight" Ethernet cable. Good for crossover connections as well,
since the EM1000 supports Auto-MDIX.
One WAS-P0005(B) serial cable. Can be used for firmware upgrades through the
serial port.
Additionally, any board or accessory from the EM1000-TEV system can be
purchased separately.
Development Systems
192
Model number
Description
EM1000-TEV-512K-L0
EM1000-TEV with the "512K" EM1000 module and the

TEV-LB0 display board
EM1000-TEV-1024KG-L2
EM1000-TEV with the "1024K" EM1000 module, the

GA1000 Wi-Fi slave module and antenna, and the TEVLB2 display board
EM500EV
The EM500EV (with IB0 interface board)

The EM500EV Evaluation System offers a convenient way of testing the EM500
BASIC/C-programmable Embedded module. The EM500EV consists of two boards:
EM500EV-MB0 motherboard with EM500 module.
Either the "IB0" or "IB1" interface board:
- The EM500EV-IB0 board implements the RS232 interface with RX, TX, CTS, RTS,
193

DSR, and DTR lines.
- The EM500EV-IB1 board provides a connector for the GA1000 Wi-Fi add-on
module, 1024KBytes of flash memory, and a limited RS232 interface (RX, TX, CTS,
RTS).
Tibbo offers a fully functional serial-over-IP application that can be tested on the
EM500EV. Written in Tibbo BASIC, the application is compatible with Tibbo Device
Server Toolkit software, comes with complete source code, and can be modified by
the user.
EM500EV-MB0
The EM500EV-MB0 motherboard comes with the EM500 module (installed on a

socket). A schematic diagram of the EM500EV-MB0 board can be found on Tibbo
website.
It is physically possible to plug the EM500 module into the EM500EV-MB0 in
reverse. Doing so may irreversibly damage the device.
Plug the EM500 as shown on the picture above.
The TEV-MB0 motherboard also features the following:

A power jack and a switching regulator with 3.3V output. This 3.3V power is
supplied to the EM500 and is also provided on the interface board connector (see
below).
An MD button, which is connected to the MD input of the EM500.
Green and red dual-function status LEDs. The term "dual-function" refers to the
fact that these LEDs are also used for Ethernet link status indication.
Development Systems
194
Interface board interface

The EM500EV-IB0 RS232 interface board is connected to the EM500EV-MB0 through
a 16-pin connector. Connector pin assignment is as follows:
Pin #
Function
Vcc output (3.3V)
GND
RX (1)
TX (1)
GPIO0/P0.0/INT0 (1)
GPIO1/P0.1/INT1 (1)
GPIO2/P0.2 (1)
GPIO3/P0.3 (1)
GPIO4/P0.4 (1)
10
GPIO5/P0.5 (1)
11
GPIO6/P0.6 (1)
12
GPIO7/P0.7 (1)
13
MD (1)
14
RST (1)
15
GND
16
VIN (12V)
(1)
Directly connected to the corresponding pin of the EM500.
EM500EV-IB0
The EM500EV-IB0 RS232 interface board implements one RS232 serial port. The port
is built around SIPEX SP3243 RS232 transceiver IC. RS232 interface lines are
available on a standard DB-9M connector:
Pin # (DB-9M)
R232 line (DB-9M)
EM500 control line
CD (input)
GPIO4/P0.4
RX (input)
RX
TX (output)
TX
DTR (output)
GPIO3/P0.3
SYSTEM GROUND
DSR (input)
GPIO1/P0.1/INT1
195

7
RTS (output)
GPIO2/P0.2
CTS (input)
GPIO0/P0.0/INT0
---
EM500EV-IB1
The EM500EV development system with the IB1 interface board.

Notice the orientation of the GA1000 module.
The EM500EV-IB1 features a connector for the GA1000 Wi-Fi add-on module,
1024KBytes of flash memory, and a serial port with limited functionality (RX, TX,
CTS, and RTS lines only).
Connection to the GA1000 is implemented according to the schematic diagram C
presented in the Connecting GA1000 to Tibbo Devices topic.
Connection to the flash memory is implemented according to the schematic diagram
presented in the Flash and EEPROM Memory topic (of the EM500 documentation).
RS232 interface lines are available on a standard DB-9M connector:
Development Systems
Pin # (DB-9M)
R232 line (DB-9M)
EM500 control line
---
---
RX (input)
RX
TX (output)
TX
---
---
SYSTEM GROUND
---
---
RTS (output)
GPIO2/P0.2
CTS (input)
GPIO0/P0.0/INT0
---
196
Ordering Info
Model number
Description
EM500EV
Development system, includes:

The EM500EV-MB0 motherboard with the EM500
module on a socket.
The EM500EV-IB0 interface board.
One 12V/0.5A power adaptor.
No cables or other accessories are supplied with this
development system.
EM500EV-G
Development system, includes:

The EM500EV-MB0 motherboard with the EM500
module on a socket.
The EM500EV-IB1 interface boards.
Wi-Fi antenna with cable.
One 12V/0.5A power adaptor.
No cables or other accessories are supplied with this
development system.
EM500-IB0
EM500-IB1
To have both the IB0 and IB1 boards, order the complete development system
with one of the IB boards, and in addition order the second IB board
separately.
197
Tibbo Project System (TPS) is a highly configurable and affordable modularized

automation platform.
The TPS comprises three major components:
Tibbits
Tibbits (as in "Tibbo Bits") are blocks of prepackaged I/O functionality housed in
brightly colored rectangular shells.
Want an ADC? There is a Tibbit for this. 5V power supply? Got that! RS232/422/485
port? We have this, and many other Tibbits, too.
Tibbo Project PCB (TPP)
Tibbo Project PCBs are motherboards that accommodate Tibbits. Each TPP carries a
CPU, an Ethernet port, memory, status LEDs, buzzer, and a number of installation
sockets for Tibbit blocks. Depending on the size, each TPP can fit up to 12 or 28
Tibbits.
TPPs come in two flovors: TPP2 and TPP3 boards run Tibbo OS (TiOS) and execute
applications written in Tibbo BASIC or Tibbo C (or both). The LTPP3 board runs
Linux.
Tibbo Project Box (TPB)
Most projects require an enclosure. Designing one is a tough job. Making it beautiful
is even tougher, and may also be prohibitively expensive. Not to worry -- your
system can be assembled in a Tibbo Project Box.
There is a Box for every TPP size. You can also choose a TPB with an LCD display
and sensor keys.
Tibbo Project Boxes can be ordered unassembled (as part kits) or fully assembled.
We also offer an optional retail packaging for TPBs, as well as vibration protection
and DIN rail mounting kits.
TPP + Tibbits [+ TPB] = Tibbo Project System (TPS)
Combine a Tibbo Project PCB (TPP) with at least one Tibbit, and you get a Tibbo
Project System (TPS). A TPS may or may not be housed in a Tibbo Project Box
(TPB).
Configure your TPS online
http://tibbo.com/tps-configurator/
For your convenience we've created an online configurator that allows you to
198
choose the TPP board, "plug in" Tibbits, and save your custom configuration under a
unique name. The configurator will make sure your design is valid, i.e. Tibbit
combinations are used correctly, the total power consumption is within the available
power budget, etc.
The configurator will also let you select options: whether the system should be
shipped unassembled or assembled and in commercial packaging or not. You will be
able to specify if your need the vibration protection kit, DIN rail mounting kit(s),
and/or Wi-Fi.
You can immediately view and order validated configurations at our online store:
http://tibbo.com/buy/tps/tpc.
The TPS: General View
Shown above is a typical Tibbo Project System in a housing (Tibbo Project Box).
To be exact, the above image depicts a size 3 system. We also offer size 2 systems
that are approximately half as wide.
The internal structure of the Tibbo Project System can be found in the TPB
Structure topic.
199
Tibbits
Tibbits (as in "Tibbo Bits") are blocks of prepackaged I/O functionality, designed to
simplify your testing, prototyping, product development, and integration.
Tibbits implement a wide variety of I/O functions. Want an ADC? There is a Tibbit
for this. 5V power supply? Got that! RS232/422/485 port? We have this, and many
other Tibbits, too.
Tibbits are housed in color-coded rectangular shells. Their pins have a classic 2.54
(0.1") pitch, so they can be installed on prototyping boards. You can use Tibbits
with virtually all popular microcontrollers (PIC, Atmel, ARM,...).
Tibbits are divided into Tibbit modules ("M" devices) and Tibbit connectors ("C"
devices). There are also hybrid ("H") Tibbits that combine the two. Tibbit
connectors have convenient hooks that additionally secure them on the board's
edge.
Tibbits are an integral part of the Tibbo Project System. They plug into Tibbo
Project PCBs and fit in our Tibbo Project Box enclosures. Connector Tibbits actually
form two walls of a Tibbo Project Box, as you can clearly see on the general view
image.
Tibbit Form Factors & Colors

Tibbits are divided into Tibbit modules ("M" devices) and Tibbit connectors ("C"
devices). There are also hybrid ("H") Tibbits that combine the two.
"M" and "C" devices can have single ("1") or double ("2") width. They can also be
short ("S") or tall ("T").
Tibbit connectors have convenient hooks that additionally secure them on the
board's edge.
M1 "Narrow" Tibbits
M2 "Wide" Tibbits
C1 "Narrow" Tibbits
C2 "Wide" Tibbits
H1 "Hybrid" Tibbits
H2 "Hybrid" Tibbits
200
M1 "Narrow"
6.2.1.1Tibbits
M1 Tibbits are single-width modules occupying one "M" socket on the standard tile.
Their footprint is roughly 7 x 14 "squares" (one "square" is 2.54 x 2.54 mm).
M1 devices have four I/O lines for interfacing with the outside world. We found four
to be the magic number. it is just right for a wide variety of I/O functions.
M1s can be short (M1S) or tall (M1T). Most M1 devices fit into "short" 12.5mm
shells, selected few are 17.5mm "tall".
Each M1 module's color will tell you if it is an...
Input
Output
Input/
Power
Blank
module
module
Output
supply
module
M1 Tibbits can incorporate up to four status LEDs.
I/O pins
M1 modules have 2 rows of 6 pins:
201
Pins 8-11 are control lines A-D. They are for interfacing to our embedded modules
or other microcontrollers. On Tibbo Project PCBs these pins are connected to the
main CPU.
Pins 2-5 are I/O lines facing the outside world. On Tibbo Project PCBs they go to
Tibbit connector sockets (i.e. connect to C1 and C2 devices).
Pins 6 and 12 are the GROUND and +5V power pins. Most Tibbit Modules consume
(take) 5V power. There are also power supply Tibbits that generate 5V power from
a variety of sources. Those output 5V through pin 12. As an example of power
Tibbits see Tibbits #10 and #23.
Pins 1 and 7 are for the additional +15V and -15V voltages. These are optional and
only needed by few Tibbits. A special power supply Tibbit #12 generates +/-15V
from the main 5V power.
202
M2 "Wide"
Tibbits
6.2.1.2
M2 Tibbits are double-width modules occupying two "M" sockets on the standard
tile. They are roughly 14 x 14 "squares" (one "square" is 2.54 x 2.54 mm).
With double the size comes the doubled internal space and I/O capacity. M2s have
eight I/O lines. They are used for "grander things" that just wouldn't fit into the M1
form factor.
Like M1s, M2 devices can be short (M2S) or tall (M2T).
The color coding scheme is identical to that of M1 Tibbits:
Input
Output
Input/
Power
Blank
module
module
Output
supply
module
M2 Tibbits can incorporate up to eight status LEDs.
I/O pins
M2 modules have 4 groups of 6 pins arranged into 2 rows:
203
Pins 14-17 and 20-23 are control lines A-H. They are for interfacing to our
embedded modules or other microcontrollers. On Tibbo Project PCBs these pins are
connected to the main CPU.
Pins 2-5 and 8-11 are I/O lines facing the outside world. On Tibbo Project PCBs
they go to Tibbit connector sockets (i.e. connect to C1 and C2 devices).
Pins 12 and 24 are the GROUND and +5V power pins. Most Tibbit Modules consume
(take) 5V power. There are also power supply Tibbits that generate 5V power from
a variety of sources. Those output 5V through pin 12. As an example of power
Tibbits see Tibbits #10 and #23.
Pins 1 and 13 are for the additional +15V and -15V voltages. These are optional
and only needed by few Tibbits. A special power supply Tibbit #12 generates +/15V from the main 5V power.
Pins 6, 7, 18 and 19 are unused and should be left unconnected.
Notice that each pin row has a "missing pin" in this middle. This separates a row into
two groups of 6 pins.
204
C1 "Narrow"
6.2.1.3Tibbits
C1 devices are single-width "connectors". They occupy one "C" socket on the
standard tile and install alongside "M" Tibbits. C1s have the equal width and height
with M1T devices. Tibbit "connectors" have hooks that hold on to the host board's
edge thus adding mechanical stability.
Some C1s are really just connectors of the power jack, terminal block, etc. variety.
Others "sense" the outside world: temperature, humidity, vibration, and so on.
C1 Tibbits are always orange. C1s never have status LEDs.
I/O pins
C1 Tibbits have a single row of 4 pins:
All four pins are I/O lines that connect directly to four I/O lines of the adjacent "M"
socket.
There are no dedicated ground or power pins. Many C1s don't need ground and
power anyway -- they house connectors and nothing else.
If an attached external device needs ground and/or power then these must come
from the adjacent "M" Tibbit. Ground and power are also necessary for "sensor" C1s.
205

For example, Tibbit #28 is the ambient light sensor. it houses active circuitry which
requires 5V power. Two of this device's pins are I2C clock and data, the third pin is
+5V power, and the remaining pin is ground. This C1 device must be used in
conjunction with Tibbit #00-3, which passes through 2 lines of the I2C interface,
and also provides power and ground.
C2 "Wide"
Tibbits
6.2.1.4
With double the width of C1s, C2 Tibbits are wide enough to house DB9 connectors
and 9-row terminal block banks. They occupy two "C" sockets on the standard tile.
C2s have the equal width and height with M2T devices. Tibbit "connectors" have
hooks that hold on to the host board's edge thus adding mechanical stability.
C2 Tibbits are always orange. C2s never have status LEDs.
I/O pins
C2 Tibbits have a single row of 11 pins:
206
Pins 1-4 and 8-11 are I/O lines that connect directly to the I/O lines of two
adjacent "M" sockets. A single C2 may connect to one M2 Tibbit or two M1 Tibbits.
Pin 5 is the +5V power pin. Most C2 devices only house connectors and do not
require any power. Still, we are sure there will be uses for this power pin in the
future.
Pin 6 is the ground pin.
Pin 7 is the +15V power pin. Again, this is reserved for the future use.
Since C2 devices have dedicated ground and power lines they are not dependent on
"M" Tibbits for power and ground, as C1s are. There is no provision for connecting 15V power though. If any C2 device needs -15V then this must be supplied by the
adjacent "M" device.
207
H1 "Hybrid"
Tibbits
6.2.1.5
H1 Tibbits are merged M1T and C1 devices. They occupy the combined space of
one M1 and one C1 Tibbit.
The H1 form factor is used when it is unsafe or undesirable to interconnect M1 and
C1 Tibbits via a Tibbo Project PCB (or any other host board).
Examples of such cases are high-voltage and high-frequency (radio) circuits.
H1 devices can have up to four status LEDs on the M1 side.
I/O pins
H1 devices have no pins on their C1 "section":
Pins on the M1 section have the standard positioning, except not all of the pins 1-5
may or may not be present. This is because the M1 and C1 sections of hybrid
devices are interconnected directly.
208
H2 "Hybrid"
Tibbits
6.2.1.6
H2 Tibbits are merged M2T and C2 devices. They occupy the combined space of
one M2 and one C2 Tibbit.
The H2 form factor is used when it is unsafe or undesirable to interconnect M2 and
C2 Tibbits via a Tibbo Project PCB (or any other host board).
Examples of such cases are high-voltage and high-frequency (radio) circuits.
H3 devices can have up to eight status LEDs on the M2 side.
I/O pins
H2 devices have no pins on their C2 "section":
Pins on the M2 section have the standard positioning, except not all of the pins 111 may or may not be present. This is because the M2 and C2 sections of hybrid
209

devices are interconnected directly.
Tibbit Power Lines

By now you know that the main supply voltage for Tibbits is +5V, and that some
Tibbits also need +15V and -15V power. You also know that C1 Tibbits have no
standard ground and +5V pins, while C2s do not have a provision for -15V power.
Finally, you know that some Tibbits do not require any power. This section
continues with the explanation of Tibbit power lines.
The diagram above shows five Tibbits. Two of them are #10 (+5V power supply),
one is #01 (four-line RS232 port), another one is #12 (+15/-15V power supply), and
the last one is #13 (the ADC converter).
Notice how all five Tibbits have diodes in their power lines. On power consuming
Tibbits (#01, #13) these diodes prevent damage to Tibbits if power is accidentally
applied in reverse. On power generating Tibbits (#10, #12) the diodes allow you to
bank power sources. By having two power supply Tibbits (#10) you can either
combine their current output or increase reliability (by having several redundant
power sources).
Power, of course, can also be applied to the power rails externally (i.e. from a lab
power supply). Our own TPP2 and TPP3 boards have power terminals for direct 5V
power input. The boards do not have direct inputs for +15V and -15V. So, although
TPP2 and TPP3 have +15V and -15V power rails, the only way to have power on
them is to insert the Tibbit #12. You only have to do it if there are any Tibbits in
your system that require these optional voltages. On the above diagram, Tibbit #13
does require +/-15V.
One additional point. Power supply Tibbits that provide +5V power generate it from
external power sources. For example, Tibbit #10 takes DC input in the 9-18V range,
while Tibbit #23 implements PoE (power-over-Ethernet) power supply. Both take
external power and convert it into +5V. Tibbit #12, however, generates +15/-15V
voltages form the 5V power rail.
210
Tibbit Sockets and Tiles

As long as you follow electrical specifications for Tibbits you can use and
interconnect them in any way you like. This manual teaches a structured approach
based on Tibbit sockets and tiles. This is the approach used by the Tibbo Project
System.
We will use the term Tibbit socket (or simply socket) to denote a landing space for
a Tibbit. "Socket" here does not mean a physical socket into which a Tibbit can be
plugged. Rather, it describes a space on the board that can accommodate a Tibbit
device. This is not to say that actual physical sockets aren't there. In fact, Tibbits
are installed on physical sockets most of the time. Our TPP2 and TPP3 boards offer
a pair of physical sockets for each Tibbit socket.
More strictly, we will use the term Tibbit socket to describe landing spaces for
single-width C1 or M1 devices. Of course, Tibbits sockets for M1 and C1 are
different.
The following diagram depicts a fragment of the TPP3 board. The diagram shows a
single tile with Tibbit sockets (S5), (S6), (S7), and (S8).
211
Tibbit socket for "M" Tibbits occupies 7 x 14 board "squares" (one "square" is 2.54 x
2.54 mm) and has two 6-pin physical sockets. M2 devices require two Tibbit sockets
next to each other. On the picture above (S5) and (S7) are "M" sockets. Note how
there is an arrow with the M2 mark. This arrow indicates that an M2 device will
occupy both S5 and S7 spaces.
Tibbit socket for "C" Tibbits occupies 7 x 4.5 board "squares". C2 devices take two
Tibbit sockets. On the picture above (S6) and (S8) are "C" sockets. Notice how this
socket pair shares a single 11-pin physical socket. This is because C2 devices have
11 pins.
A pair of "M" sockets and a pair of "C" sockets together form a tile, as shown on the
picture above. The diagram above on the right illustrates how the pins of M1, M2,
C1, and C2 modules plug into the tile sockets.
A single tile can accommodate Tibbits of difference sizes and in various
combinations:
Up to two C1 + up to two M1 devices
Up to two C1 and one M2 device
One C2 device and up to two M1 devices
Up to two H1 hybrid Tibbits
212
Electrical Connections on a Tile

The diagram below shows electrical connections on a tile. Again, if you are making
your own board or using a prototype board you can connect Tibbits in any way you
like (as long as it doesn't cause them to smoke and burn). The diagram illustrates
our own structured approach to building things with Tibbits.
GND, +5V, +15V, and -15V rails were already explained in Tibbit Power Lines.
Eight control lines of the tile -- four per "M" socket -- go to the TPP's CPU.
"C" sockets and "M" sockets are interconnected directly (see eight short black
lines).
A word on the naming of control lines. "M" sockets (these are (S5) and (S7) on the
diagram above) have control lines A, B, C, and D. M1 Tibbits have a matching set of
control lines A-D. M2 Tibbits have eight control lines A-H. When you plug an M2
device into the tile, its control lines correspond to the control lines of the tile as
follows:
213

M2
Tibbit
Corresponding control
line on a tile
First "M" socket*, A
First "M" socket*, B
First "M" socket*, C
First "M" socket*, D
Second "M" socket**, A
Second "M" socket**, B
Second "M" socket**, C
Second "M" socket**, D
* (S5) on the diagram

** (S7) on the diagram
Tibbits with "Special Needs"

Most Tibbits happily work with simple control (GPIO) lines of the CPU. Some,
however, require dedicated I/O functionality from the CPU lines:
[SER] Tibbits that require TX and RX UART lines
[INT] Tibbits that require an interrupt line
[POE] Tibbits that require PoE power lines
[CAN] Tibbits that require CAN functionality
[AUD] Tibbits that require audio functionalily
[MMC] Tibbits that require MMC (SD) functionality
[SER] Tibbits
6.2.5.1That Require UART Functionality
Some Tibbits, such as #01 (four-line RS232 port) and #02 (universal RS232/422/485
port) are designed to work with UART lines of the CPU. Of course, nothing "bad" will
happen if you just connect them to regular GPIO lines. After all, UART
communications at low baud rates can even be emulated with regular CPU pins. The
intended use of these Tibbits, however, is with TX and RX UART lines of the CPU.
TX and RX control lines, when present on a Tibbit, are always mapped onto the
control lines A and B, respectively:
214
TPP2 and TPP3 boards offer four "M" sockets with UART lines.
[INT] Tibbits
That Require an Interrupt Line
6.2.5.2
Some Tibbits require an interrupt line. For example, on Tibbits #01 (simple RS232
port), #02 (universal RS232/422/485 port) the interrupt is used to detect state
changes on the CTS line. This is necessary for the RTS/CTS flow control. Obviously,
an RS232 port doesn't always need the flow control, so the interrupt line may not
be necessary. Other Tibbits, such as #08 (Wiegand and clock/data reader port)
must be wired to the interrupt line, or they won't be able to do their job.
The INT line, when present on a Tibbit, is always mapped into the control line D:
215
The TPP2 features six "M" sockets with interrupt lines, while the TPP3 has eight
such sockets.
[POE] Tibbits
6.2.5.3That Require PoE Power Lines
Tibbit #23 implement PoE (power-over-Ethernet) power supplies. By definition, PoE
power comes from the Ethernet cable. Therefore, PoE Tibbits must be wired in such
a way as to receive PoE power input from the RJ45 jack.
TPP2 and TPP3 both have a single socket which can receive PoE power.
[CAN] Tibbits
6.2.5.4That Require CAN functionality
To be documented.
216
[AUD] Tibbits
6.2.5.5That Require Audio Functionality
To be documented.
[MMC] 6.2.5.6
Tibbits That Require MMC (SD) Functionality
To be documented.
Combining "C" and "M" Tibbits

"M" and "C" Tibbits were designed to work together and complement each other. A
single tile can accommodate Tibbits of all possible form factors.
Narrow "M" Tibbits can be mixed with wide "C" devices and vice versa, but there are
rules for this. All such combinations can only take place within the space of a single
tile. Under no circumstances should Tibbits be arranged in ways that share them
between tiles. In other words, Tibbits can't cross tile borders.
The four possible combinations are:
C1 + M1
C2 + M2
C2 + Two M1s
Two C1s + M2
There is also a generous degree of interchangeability. For example, Tibbit #02
(universal RS232/422/485 port) can be wired to Tibbit #19 (DB9 connector). The
#02 can also be used with #20 ("nine terminal blocks" device). Who knows -- maybe
this, and not the DB9, is what's need in your project! This is the main reason why
Tibbits were split into "modules" and "connectors".
C1 + M1
6.2.6.1
C1 and M1 devices are interconnected by four interface lines:
As was explained, C1 devices do not have dedicated ground and power lines.
Sometimes, such lines are just not necessary. For example, Tibbit #27 (IR receiver/
transmitter) works fine without the ground and power:
217
Some C1 devices, such as #18 (power input) do need to be connected to the

system ground. Tibbit #18 was designed to be used with power supply Tibbits #09
and #10. These "M" devices provide ground on their pin 5, and this solves the
problem. Incoming supply voltage (Vin) is routed through pin 1:
Several C1 Tibbits implement various sensors: temperature, humidity, pressure, etc.

These need both the ground and +5V power lines, which are provided by the "M"
Tibbit #00-3. This Tibbit propagates ground through pin 5 and outputs +5V power
through pin 4:
218
C2 + M2
6.2.6.2
C2 and M2 devices are interconnected by eight interface lines.
C2 Tibbits have dedicated ground, +5V, and +15V pins. Here is the illustration of
how the ground line gets used. Tibbit #19 incorporates the DB9 connector, which
requires the ground line. Since C2 devices have ground pins, there is no need to
waste one of the available eight interface lines, so all lines can be put to good use
and this comes handy for Tibbit #02 (RS232/422/485 port) that utilizes all eight
lines.
C2 + Two
M1s
6.2.6.3
Some C2 devices can be connected to two M1 Tibbits simultaneously. The most
obvious example is "C" Tibbit #20 (nine terminal blocks). This is a very generic Tibbit
that mixes well with various "M" devices. For example, "M" Tibbits #03-1 (two
219

relays) can surely be connected to the outside world through the terminal block
connector:
Two C1s
+ M2
6.2.6.4
This possibility exists but there is little practical use for it...
220
Tibbit LEDs and Their Colors

"M" Tibbits have LED indicators. M1 devices have up to four LEDs. M2s can have as
many as eight "lights".
LEDs on most Tibbits indicate the state of their control lines. This is why the
number of LEDs matches the number of control lines on narrow and wide Tibbits.
This is not a rule -- LEDs exist to provide sensible and useful indication of Tibbit
states, so they do not "belong" to control lines per se. For example, there are
"power good" LEDs on power supply Tibbits (#09, #10, #23, etc.). They indicate the
presence of the required voltage on the power line.
We use different LED colors to indicate the direction of the corresponding signal:
Red LEDs are used for output lines (and power "flowing" out).
Green LEDs are used for input lines (and power "flowing" in).
Yellow LEDs are used for lines that work both as inputs and outputs.
Terms output and input should be interpreted with respect to the main CPU of the
host board. Therefore, "in" means "from the outside world and into the board". "Out"
means "from the board towards the outside world".
As an example, consider Tibbit #14 (DAC, shown above). This Tibbit is based on the
MCP4728 IC from Microchip. It communicates with the main CPU via the I2C
interface lines SCL and SDA. There are also two additional interface lines LDAC and
BUSY. LED colors are:
SCL: this is the clock line of the I2C interface. Red LED is used because this line is
an output.
SDA: this is the data line of the I2C interface. Yellow LED is used because the
data line is bi-directional.
LOAD: this is the control line manipulated by the CPU. Hence, the LED color is red.
BUSY: this is the status line from the DAC IC. Hence, the LED color is green.
The same logic applies to "power good" LEDs. If the LED is on the power line that
provides power to the main CPU/board (power flowing in) then the color of this LED
will be green. If this is the power line that takes power from the main CPU/board
(power flowing out) then the color of this LED will be red.
221
Example: Tibbit #12 (+/-15V power supply). This Tibbit takes power from the +5V
supply rail and generates voltages for +15V and -15V power rails. Four LED
indicators on the module are:
5V power good -- the LED is red because this power is provided by (is flowing out
of) the system.
SDWN -- the LED is red because this is a shutdown line that is controlled by the
main CPU.
+15V and -15V -- these LEDs are green because the Tibbit provides the
corresponding voltages to the board (+15V and -15V power is flowing into the
board).
LEDs connected to the control lines are usually wired to light up when the control
line state is LOW. On the contrary, "power good" LEDs indicate the presence of
voltage on power lines (a "HIGH" state of sorts).
LEDs of Tibbit devices are usually buffered. That is, they do not impose any
significant load on the lines they are connected to.
There are no LEDs on "C" Tibbits.
Labeling
Each Tibbit device has a label which states this Tibbit's number and function.
A small 2D barcode (micro QR type) encodes the Tibbit number as well. This number
is a 4-digit code. First three digits in the code represent Tibbit number, and the
fourth digit indicates the device version (some Tibbits have more than one version
available).
For example, if the code is 0032 then this is Tibbit #03, version 2:
222
Available Tibbits
#00-1, M1S: Four Direct I/O lines
#00-2, M1S: Three direct I/O lines and ground
#00-3, M1S: Two direct I/O lines, +5V power, ground
#01, M1S: Four-line RS232 port [SER, INT]
#02, M2S: RS232/422/485 port [SER, INT]
#03-1, M1S: Two low-power relays (configuration 1)
#03-2, M1S: Two low-power relays (configuration 2)
#04-1, M1S: Two isolated inputs
#04-2, M1S: Three isolated inputs, common (-)
#04-3, M1S: Three isolated inputs, common (+)
#04-4, M1S: Four opto-inputs, common ground
#05, M1S: RS485 port
#06, M2T: Two high-power relays
#07, M1S: Two solid state relays
#08, M1S: Wiegand and clock/data reader port [INT]
#09, M1S: Low-power 5V supply, 12V input
#10, M1T: Medium-power 5V supply, 12V input
#11, M1S: Four open collector outputs
#12, M1S: Low-power +15/-15V power supply
#13, M1S: Four-channel ADC
#14, M1S: Four-channel DAC
#15, H1S: High-voltage AC solid state relay
#16, M1S: Three PWMs with OC outputs
#17, M1S: Three PWMs with power outputs
#18, C1: Power input
#19, C2: DB9 connector
#20, C2: Nine terminal blocks
#21, C1: Four terminal blocks
#23, M2T: Isolated PoE [POE] (can be used as generic isolated power supply with
48V input)
#24, M1S: Thermocouple temperature meter
#25, M2T: High-power 5V supply, 24V/48V input
#26, M1S: IR command processor
#28, C1: Ambient light sensor
#29, C1: Ambient temperature meter
#30, C1: Ambient humidity/temperature meter
#31, M1S: PIC coprocessor
#35, C1:Barometric pressure sensor
#36, C1: 3-axis accelerometer
223

#37, C1: RF connector
#38, C1: Pushbutton
#39-1~4, C1: Large LED (four colors)
#40-1~4, M1S: Digital potentiometer (four nominals)
#41, C1: 8-bit port
#42, M1S: RTC and NVRAM with backup
#47, H2: GPRS modem
#48, H2: Audio in/out
#49, C2: SD card socket
#57, M1S: FPGA Tibbit
#00-1, M1S:
Four Direct I/O Lines
6.2.9.1
Function: Four directly exposed I/O lines of the microcontroller

Form factor: M1S
Category: Blank module
Special needs: --Power requirements: 5V/20mA
Mates with: #19, #20, #21 (limited use)
See also: #00-2, #00-3
Details
224
Sometimes you just want to work with CPU I/O lines directly -- no logic or circuitry
in between. This Tibbit is (basically) four wires that connect its control lines to I/O
lines. Complement it with terminal block Tibbit #20 (nine terminal blocks) or #21
(four terminal blocks) and you have four CPU lines "exposed" and ready to be used.
Note that a CPU I/O line has the voltage swing from 0-3.3V when the line is enabled
(io.enabled= 1- YES). The voltage may be close to 5V when the line is disabled
(io.enabled= 0- NO). This is because the CPU has weak pull-up resistors connected
to 5V.
Combining this Tibbit with #21 is potentially limited in use because #00-1 doesn't
have dedicated ground or power lines, and Tibbit #21 doesn't have them, either.
Need ground (and power)? Consider replacing #21 with #20 (it has ground and
power), or turn to using Tibbit #00-2 (it provides ground) or #00-3 (it provides
ground and power).
LEDs
Four yellow LEDs are connected to four control lines of the CPU (through buffering
gates). LEDs light up for the LOW state of control lines.
#00-2, M1S:
Three Direct I/O Lines and Ground
6.2.9.2
Function: Three directly exposed I/O lines of the microcontroller plus the ground
line
Form factor: M1S
Mates with: #19, #20, #21
See also: #00-1, #00-3
225
Details
As with Tibbit #00-1, this device allows you to work with CPU lines directly. The
only difference is that one of the lines is replaced by the ground (GND) line.
The GND line may be necessary when using this Tibbit with "C" device #21 (four
terminal blocks). #21 doesn't have its own dedicated ground, so if the ground is
necessary (and it usually is) then it must come from the neighboring "M" device,
such as this Tibbit.
to 5V.
LEDs
Three yellow LEDs are connected to three control lines of the CPU (through
buffering gates). LEDs light up for the LOW state of control lines.
#00-3, M1S:
Two Direct I/O Lines, +5V Power, Ground
6.2.9.3
Function: Two directly exposed I/O lines of the microcontroller plus the +5V output
and ground lines
Form factor: M1S
Mates with: #19, #20, #21, #28, #29, #30, #35, #36, #38, #39, #41
See also: #00-1, #00-2
226
Details
As with Tibbits #00-1 and #00-2, this one "gets the CPU lines out". The only
difference is that one of the lines is replaced by +5V power, and another line is
ground. This leaves you with only two CPU lines, but very often this is sufficient.
The GND and +5V lines may be necessary when using this Tibbit with "C" Tibbit #21
(four terminal blocks). #21s doesn't have its own ground or power, so those must
come from the neighboring "M" device, such as this Tibbit.
Another use for this Tibbit is with "C" devices that implement various sensors:
#28: Ambient light sensor
#29: Ambient temperature meter
#30: Ambient humidity meter
#35: Barometric pressure sensor
#36: 3-axis accelerometer
All of the above sensors use I2C interface to talk to the main CPU. I2C only requires
two CPU lines. The remaining two lines are ground and +5V power.
to 5V.
LEDs
Two yellow LEDs are connected to two control lines of the CPU (through buffering
gates). LEDs light up for the LOW state of control lines.
227
#01, M1S:
Four-line RS232 Port
6.2.9.4
Function: Simple RS232 port with only TX, RX, RTS, and CTS lines
Form factor: M1S
Category: Input/output module
Special needs: [SER], [INT]
Power requirements: 5V/20mA
See also: #02, #05
Details
This is a standard "simple" RS232 port. This Tibbit is based on a generic RS232
transceiver (we use Zywyn ZT232F).
For "normal" RS232 applications, this Tibbit has to be connected to the TX and RX
lines of the CPU's UART (see [SER]). Planning to use RTS/CTS flow control as well?
An interrupt line must be available, too (see [INT]).
Combining this Tibbit with the "C" device #19 (DB9M connector) will create a serial
port with standard pin assignment on the DB9M:
#1
<No connection>
#2
RX (input)
#3
TX (output)
#4
<No connection>
#5
Ground

#6
<No connection>
#7
RTS (output)
#8
CTS (input)
#9
<No connection>
228
You can also combine the RS232 Tibbit with #20 (9 terminal blocks). Using #21 (four
terminal blocks) is also possible if you can steal the ground elsewhere (#21 doesn't
have its own ground line).
LEDs
There are four LEDs: two red and two green. Red LEDs are connected to TX and
RTS lines. Green ones are for RX and CTS. All LEDs are buffered (with logic gates)
and light up for the LOW state of control lines.
#02, M2S:
RS232/422/485 Port
6.2.9.5
Function: Universal RS232/422/485 port with electronic mode selection

Form factor: M2S
Special needs: [SER], [INT].
Mates with: #19, #20
See also: #01, #05
229
Details
This is a "full" serial port that can be electronically programmed to work in RS232,
RS422, or RS485 mode. The Tibbit is based on the Sipex SP337 universal
transceiver.
Mode selection is through FD/HD and 232/422-485 control lines:
Mode
FD/-HD
-232/422-485
RS232
HIGH
LOW
RS422
HIGH
HIGH
RS485
LOW
HIGH
When unconnected, FD/-HD defaults to HIGH, while -232/422-485 defaults to LOW.

This means that the RS232 mode will be selected.
In the RS232 mode the port has RX, TX, RTS, CTS, DTR, and DSR signals. This is
the full-duplex mode.
In the RS422 mode the port has +/-RX, +/-TX, +/-RTS, and +/-CTS signal pairs.
This is the full-duplex mode.
In the RS485 mode the port has only +/-RX and +/-TX signal pairs. This is the halfduplex mode, so you can connect +RX to +TX, and -RX to -TX. This will allow your
system to communicate over a single twisted pair. Direction control is through the
RTS line -- the line shall be LOW for data input and HIGH for output.
For "normal" RS232/422/485 applications, this Tibbit has to be connected to the TX
and RX lines of the CPU's UART (see [SER]). Planning to use RTS/CTS flow control
as well? An interrupt line must be available, too (see [INT]).
Combining this Tibbit with the "C" device #19 (DB9M connector) will create a serial
port with the following pin assignment on the DB9M:
RS232
RS422
RS485
#1
<No connection>
TX2- (output,
commonly RTS-)
<No connection>
#2
RX (input)
RX- (input)
RX- (input)
#3
TX (output)
TX+ (output)
TX+ (output)
#4
TX3 (output,
commonly DTR)
TX- (output)
TX- (output)
#5
Ground
Ground
Ground
#6
RX3 (input, commonly

DSR)
RX+ (input)
RX+ (input)
#7
TX2 (output,
commonly RTS)
TX2+ (output,
commonly RTS+)
<No connection>
#8

CTS)
RX2+ (input,
commonly CTS+)
<No connection>
#9
<No connection>
RX2- (input,
commonly CTS-)
<No connection>
230
The above pin assignment is the same we use on all our devices with the universal
port (for example, see the serial port of the DS1102).
You can also combine the RS232 Tibbit with #20 (9 terminal blocks).
LEDs
There are eight LEDs: five red and three green. Red LEDs are connected to TX, RTS,
DTR, FD/-HD, and -232/422-485 lines. Green ones are for RX, CTS, and DSR. All
LEDs are buffered (with logic gates) and light up for the LOW state of control lines.
#03-1, M1S:
Two Low-power Relays (Configuration 1)
6.2.9.6
Function: Two mechanical low-power relays with independent normally opened

terminals
Form factor: M1S
Category: Output module
Special needs: --Power requirements: 5V/60mA (with both relays activated)
Mates with: #19, #20, #21
See also: #03-2, #06, #07, #15
231
Details
These relays are rated for 1A/30V.
To activate a relay, set the corresponding control line LOW. When left
unconnected, control lines default to HIGH (and, hence, relays are off).
Combine this Tibbit with terminal block devices -- #20 (nine terminal blocks) or #21
(four terminal blocks).
LEDs
There are two red LEDs which are connected to two relay control lines. LEDs light
up for the LOW state of control lines (i.e. when relays are activated).
#03-2, M1S:
Two Low-power Relays (Configuration 2)
6.2.9.7
Function: Two mechanical low-power relays with joined middle (common) terminals.
Relay 1 has normally closed and normally opened terminals. Relay 2 only has the
normally opened terminal exposed.
Form factor: M1S
Mates with: #19, #20, #21
See also: #03-1, #06, #07, #15
232
Details
These relays are rated for 1A/30V.
LEDs
#04-1, M1S:
Two Isolated Inputs
6.2.9.8
Function: Two optically isolated inputs with independent terminals. Inputs are fully
isolated from system ground.
Form factor: M1S
Category: Input module
Mates with: #19, #20, #21
See also: #04-2, #04-3, #04-4
233
Details
If no external resistor is added these inputs activate at about 2V. Forward current
should not exceed 10mA, and this caps the maximum input voltage at around 5V.
Add external resistors if you need to apply higher input voltage.
LEDs
There are two green LEDs which are connected to two control lines. LEDs light up
for the LOW state of control lines (i.e. when current passes through the diodes of
the opto-couples).
#04-2, M1S:
Three Isolated Inputs, Common (-)
6.2.9.9
Function: Three optically isolated inputs with common (-). Inputs are fully isolated
from system ground.
Form factor: M1S
Mates with: #19, #20, #21
See also: #04-1, #04-3, #04-4
234
Details
LEDs
There are three green LEDs which are connected to three control lines. LEDs light
up for the LOW state of control lines (i.e. when current passes through the diodes
of the opto-couples).
#04-3, M1S:
Three Isolated Inputs, Common (+)
6.2.9.10
Function: Three optically isolated inputs with common (+). Inputs are fully isolated
from system ground.
Form factor: M1S
Mates with: #19, #20, #21
See also: #04-1, #04-2, #04-4
235
Details
LEDs
There are three green LEDs which are connected to three control lines. LEDs light
up for the LOW state of control lines (i.e. when current passes through the diodes
of the opto-couples).
#04-4, M1S:
Four Opto-inputs, Common Ground
6.2.9.11
Function: Four opto-couple inputs with the '-' terminal connected to the system
ground, independent '+' terminals
Form factor: M1S
See also: #04-1, #04-2, #04-3
236
Details
Note that these are not "isolated inputs" -- they share the ground line with the rest
of your system. Still, the optical stage isolates your system from noise, ESD, spikes,
and other external influences.
LEDs
There are four green LEDs which are connected to four control lines. LEDs light up
for the LOW state of control lines (i.e. when current passes through the diodes of
the opto-couples).
#05, M1S:
RS485 Port
6.2.9.12
Function: RS485 port with full-duplex or half-duplex operation

Form factor: M1S
Special needs: [SER]
Mates with: #19, #20, #21
See also: #01, #02
237
Details
This port has only +/-RX and +/-TX signal pairs. If you are working in the halfduplex mode, connect +RX to +TX, and -RX to -TX. This will allow your system to
communicate over a single twisted pair. Direction control is through the RTS line -the line shall be LOW for data input and HIGH for output. Keep the RX and TX pairs
separate for the full-duplex mode and set the RTS line HIGH to keep the TX enabled
at all times.
For "normal" RS485 applications, this Tibbit has to be connected to the TX and RX
lines of the CPU's UART (see [SER]).
LEDs
There are three LEDs: two red and one green. Red LEDs are connected to TX and
OUT/-IN lines. The green LED is for the RX input. All LEDs are buffered (with logic
gates) and light up for the LOW state of control lines.
#06, M2T:
Two High-power Relays
6.2.9.13
Function: Two mechanical high-power relays with normally opened and normally
closed terminals
Form factor: M2T
Mates with: #19, #20, #21

See also: #03-1, #03-2, #07, #15
Details
These relays have the contact capacity rated at 16A/48V (resistive load).
Combine this Tibbit with Tibbit #20 (nine terminal blocks).
LEDs
238
239

#07, M1S:
Two Solid State Relays
6.2.9.14
Function: Two solid state normally opened relays

Form factor: M1S
Mates with: #19, #20, #21
See also: #03-1, #03-2, #06, #15
Details
These relays are rated for the maximum load of 1A per relay.
LEDs
There are two red LEDs which are connected to two SSR control lines. LEDs light up
for the LOW state of control lines (i.e. when relays are activated).
240
#08, M1S:
Wiegand and Clock/Data Reader Port
6.2.9.15
Function: Wiegand and clock/data reader port plus one open collector output
Form factor: M1S
Special needs: [SER]
Power requirements: 5V/TBDmA
See also: #11
Details
Our programmable devices (such as TPP2 and TPP3) have the unique ability to
process input from card readers with clock/data or Wiegand interface. This is
achieved through the ser. object running in the clock/data or Wiegand mode. Tibbit
#08 implements necessary hardware.
In order to be able to process card reader output, this Tibbit has to be connected
to the RX and CTS lines of the CPU's UART (see [SER]).
When connecting a clock/data reader, wire the clock line to IO1, and the data line
to IO2. Set the CONTROL line to LOW -- this selects the clock/data mode for the
Tibbit's hardware.
When connecting a Wiegand reader, wire the W0 line to IO1, W1 line -- to IO2. Set
the CONTROL line to HIGH to select the Wiegand mode.
In both cases, the IO3 line must be connected to the external power source. Most
card readers with clock/data and Wiegand interfaces have open collector outputs.
Such outputs require pull-up resistors on the receiving end. On this Tibbit, the role
241

of pull-up resistors is played by opto-LEDs and resistors connected in series.
The exact voltage of the power source depends on the reader. Very often it is the
supply voltage for the reader itself (typically, +12V). In this case just split the
reader power line and connect the same power to IO3. Some readers require 12V
power and pull-up resistors to 5V. This means IO3 will need to receive +5V.
This Tibbit also has a standalone open collector output controlled through LINE D.
Set LINE D LOW to open the transistor. When left unconnected, the line defaults to
HIGH (hence, the transistor is closed).
(four terminal blocks). Note that #21 doesn't provide the ground line, and using this
Tibbit requires the ground line between the reader and your system. Hence, if you
use Tibbit #21 you will need to "steal" the ground somewhere else.
Check out the Tibbit #11 (four open collector outputs) if you are looking to emulate
clock/data or Wiegand reader output (that is, of you want to turn your device into
a reader that outputs data).
LEDs
There are four LEDs: two red and two green. Red LEDs are connected to the
CONTROL and OC line. Green LEDs are connected to W0&1 and W1 lines. All LEDs
are buffered (with logic gates) and light up for the LOW state of control lines.
#09, M1S:
Low-power 5V Supply, 12V Input
6.2.9.16
Function: Low-power non-isolated power supply with 5V output, 9-18V input range,
shutdown control
Form factor: M1S
Category: Power supply module
Special needs: --Power requirements: external 9-18V power
Mates with: #18, #19, #20, #21
See also: #10, #12, #23, #25
242
Details
This Tibbit is capable of generating up to 700mA of 5V power from the external input
in the 9-18V range. Multiple power supply Tibbits can be used to increase available
current or for power redundancy.
The module has a dedicated shutdown (-SDWN) line. Pull the line LOW to disable
this Tibbit.
Combine this Tibbit with #18 (it has a power jack and two terminal blocks), #20
(nine terminal blocks), or #21 (four terminal blocks).
LEDs
There is one green and one red LED. The green LED is connected to the +5V output
and lights up when the voltage is present on this line. Red LED is connected to the SHUTDOWN line and lights up when the line is LOW (i.e. when the power supply is in
shutdown). The red LED is buffered (with a logic gate).
#10, M1T:
Medium-power 5V Supply, 12 V Input
6.2.9.17
Function: Medium-power non-isolated power supply with 5V output, 9-18V input

range, and shutdown control
Form factor: M1T
Mates with: #18, #19, #20, #21
See also: #09, #12, #23, #25
243
Details
This Tibbit is capable of generating up to 1100mA of 5V power from the external
input in the 9-18V range. Multiple power supply Tibbits can be used to increase
available current or for power redundancy.
this Tibbit.
LEDs
shutdown). The red LED is buffered (with a logic gate).
#11, M1S:
Four Open Collector Outputs
6.2.9.18
Function: Four open collector outputs

Form factor: M1S
Special needs: [SER] (if reader emulation is desired)
See also: #16
244
Details
Transistors are rated for the maximum voltage of 24V and the maximum per-channel
current of 0.5A. Note that the maximum current should not be exceeded even at
lower voltages. Do not apply negative voltage!
To open a transistor, set the corresponding control line LOW. When left
unconnected, control lines default to HIGH (and, hence, transistors will be closed).
(four terminal blocks). Note that #21 doesn't provide the ground line, and using this
Tibbit requires the ground line between the outside world and your system. Hence, if
you use Tibbit #21 you will need to "steal" the ground somewhere else.
One additional possible use of this Tibbit is for the emulation of clock/data or
Wiegand card readers. Our programmable devices (such as TPP2 and TPP3) have
the unique ability to output data in the clock/data or Wiegand format. This is
achieved through the ser. object running in the clock/data or Wiegand mode. Card
readers usually have open collector outputs so this Tibbit is ideally suited as the
hardware front-end for the job. For this to work, the Tibbit has to be connected to
the TX and RTS lines of the CPU's UART (see [SER]).
As with many "real" readers, the equipment on the receiving end will need pull-up
resistors.
LEDs
There are four red LEDs which are connected to four control lines. All LEDs are
buffered (using logic gates) and light up for the LOW state of control lines (i.e.
when transistors are in the opened state).
245
#12, M1S:
Low-power +15/-15V Power Supply, 5V Input
6.2.9.19
Function: Low-power non-isolated power supply with +15/-15V output, 5V input,

shutdown control
Form factor: M1S
Special needs: --Power requirements: 5V/230mA + curr * 4.5 ("curr" is the combined current
consumed on 15V and -15V outputs)
Mates with*: #19, #20, #37
See also: #13, #14
Details
This Tibbit is capable of generating up to 15mA of +15V power and 15mA of -15V
power from the main 5V supply rail. This Tibbit, therefore, does not rely on the
outside power but instead generates +/-15V from the internal main power of the
TPS. The diagram in Tibbit Power Lines actually shows Tibbit #12 and its "power
relationship" with other Tibbits. Multiple Tibbits #12 can be used to increase
available +/-15V current budget.
The module is required for the correct operation of Tibbits #13 (ADC) and #14
(DAC).
This Tibbit has a base (idle) power consumption of 230mA. Each additional mA of
current consumed on the +15V and -15V outputs results in 4.5mA of extra power
drain on the 5V input. This 4.5 ratio is explained by the threefold difference in the
input (5V) and output (15V) voltages, as well as associated power conversion
losses.
246
this Tibbit.
LEDs
There are two red and two green LEDs. The first red LED is connected to the +5V
input. The second red LED is connected to the -SHUTDOWN line and lights up when
the line is LOW (i.e. when the module is in shutdown). Green LEDs are +15V and 15V power indicators.
* "Mates" in this case means "doesn't mind them close" as this device requires no
connector Tibbits for its own operation.
#13, M1S:
Four-channel ADC
6.2.9.20
Function: Four-channel ADC

Form factor: M1S
Special needs: +15V and -15V power (use Tibbit #12 to generate these voltages)
Power requirements: 5V/10mA, 15V/9mA, -15V/3.5mA (the aggregated
consumption through Tibbit #12 is 66mA)
See also: #12, #14
Details
247

This ADC Tibbit is based on the LTC2309 12-bit ADC with I2C interface. Only four
channels of this ADC are used by the Tibbit. The analog front end of the module
allows you to measure signals in the -10V to +10V range. All measurements are with
respect to the system ground.
Keep in mind that every time you are reading the data out of the LCD2309 IC you
are actually getting the previous conversion result. This may not be an issue when
running a conversion loop for a single ADC channel. You will have to ignore the first
result in these cases:
Discard the first ADC result after the channel change. Only the second
measurement will bring you the conversion data for the newly selected channel.
Do the conversion twice and discard the first result when performing sporadic
measurements. This way you will obtain the "current" data.
The LTC2309 ADC IC has a 12-bit resolution. The Tibbit #13 has the effective
resolution of around 9~10 bits. This reduction is caused by the system noise and
other factors that affect the measurement quality.
Combine this Tibbit with #20 (nine terminal blocks) or #19 (DB9M connector). It's
not common but possible to use the latter for wiring into the ADC inputs. The Tibbit
#21 (four terminal blocks) can also be used but you will have to steal the ground
elsewhere, as #21 doesn't have its own ground line and the ADC measures input
voltages with respect to the system ground.
LEDs
There is one red and one yellow LED. The red LED is connected to the SCL line of
the I2C interface, the yellow LED -- to the SDA line.
Sample project
The use of this Tibbit is illustrated by a Tibbo BASIC test project titled
"test_tibbits_13_14_(ADC_DAC)". You can find it here: http://tibbo.com/
programmable/applications/i2c-spi/adc-dac.html.
#14, M1S:
Four-channel DAC
6.2.9.21
Function: Four-channel DAC

Form factor: M1S
Special needs: --Power requirements: 5V/20mA, 15V/4mA, -15V/4mA (the aggregated consumption
through Tibbit #12 is 56mA, measurements were made with no loads on the DAC
outputs)
See also: #13
248
Details
This DAC Tibbit is based on the MCP4728 12-bit DAC with I2C interface. All four
channels of this DAC are used by the Tibbit. The analog front end of the module
allows you to output signals in the -10V to +10V range (respective to the system
ground).
The MCP4728 DAC IC has a 12-bit resolution. The Tibbit #14 has the effective
resolution of around 9~10 bits. This reduction is caused by the system noise and
other factors that affect the measurement quality.
not common but possible to use the latter for wiring into the DAC outputs. The
Tibbit #21 (four terminal blocks) can also be used but you will have to steal the
ground elsewhere, as #21 doesn't have its own ground line and the DAC outputs
LEDs
There are two red, one yellow, and one green LED. The red LEDs are connected to
the SCL and LDAC lines, the yellow LED -- to the SDA line, and the green LED -- to
the -BUSY line.
Sample project
"test_tibbits_13_14_(ADC_DAC)". You can find it here: http://tibbo.com/
programmable/applications/i2c-spi/adc-dac.html.
#15, H1:
High-voltage AC Solid State Relay
6.2.9.22
Function: High-voltage AC solid state normally opened relay
249

Form factor: H1
Mates with: --See also: #03-1, #03-2, #06, #07
Details
This Tibbit is based on the CPC1965 AC solid state relay and is implemented as the
H1 hybrid device. The CPC1965 is capable of handling AC voltages of up to 260V
and load currents of up to 1A.
To activate the relay set the control line LOW. When left unconnected, the line
defaults to HIGH (and, hence, the relay is off).
LEDs
There is a single red LED, which lights up when the control line is LOW (i.e. when
the relay is activated).
NO LIABILITY
Tibbo does not advertise the use of this Tibbit for the commutation of high
voltages and assumes no responsibility for any injuries and/or damage
caused by the use of this Tibbit. By purchasing this Tibbit you agree to use it
at your own risk and accept all full responsibility for such use.
250
#16, M1S:
Three PWMs With OC Outputs
6.2.9.23
Function: Three PWMs with open collector outputs

Form factor: M1S
See also: #17, #31
Details
This Tibbit is based on the PIC16F1824 microcontroller and takes advantage of the
PWM channels available on this PIC device. The PIC micro has four PWM channels
but one of the channels cannot be used because it shares I/O lines with the I2C
interface. The I2C interface is utilized for communications with the main CPU of the
TPP board and also for PIC firmware upgrades.
The frequency and the pulse width (duty cycle) are set independently for each
PWM channel. The frequency is controlled through a divider and a period value. The
divider allows you to select the base frequency applied to the divider. Available
choices are 32MHz, 8MHz, 2MHz, and 500KHz. The output signal of the PWM can
then be programmed to have the period equal to 4~1024 base frequency periods in
4-period steps (i.e. 4, 8, 12,...1020, 1024). This gives you the output range from
8MHz down to 488Hz. The PWM pulse width can be programmed to have the period
equal to 1~1024 base frequency periods in 1-period steps (1, 2, 3,... 1023, 1024).
Each PWM channel uses one Zetex FFMT491 NPN transistor which is rated for 1A
continuous collector current.
251

not common but possible to use the latter for wiring into the PWM outputs. The
ground elsewhere, as #21 doesn't have its own ground line and the PWM Tibbit
outputs voltages with respect to the system ground.
LEDs
There are two red, one yellow, and one green LED. The first red LED is connected to
the SCL line of the I2C interface, the second one -- to the -RST line of the PIC
micro. The yellow LED is connected to the SDA line of the I2C interface. The green
LED is on the -INT line.
PIC micro and GRA firmware
Tibbit #16 ships with the GRA (general register access) firmware, which allows you
to access internal PIC registers and memory through the I2C interface. The firmware
implements a very simple communications protocol which essentially consists of two
important commands -- address read and address write. These two commands are
used to write to and read from PIC's internal RAM and registers. This facilitates a
simple and versatile access to all microcontroller resources. The available Tibbo
BASIC library sits on top of the GRA firmware and uses the communications protocol
to access and set the PWM channels.
Since the GRA firmware does not do anything intelligent and all the setup work is
essentially scripted in Tibbo BASIC, it is possible to modify PWM setup (and PIC
behavior) without making any changes to the PIC firmware.
The GRA firmware can be updated or replaced using the pic_firmware_upgrade
Tibbo BASIC project (see below). You can, therefore, create and run PIC
applications that go far beyond providing simple register and memory access.
Sample project
"test_tibbits_16_17_31_(PIC copro)". You can find it here: http://tibbo.com/
programmable/applications/i2c-spi/pwm.html. Run the project in the TEST_PWM_1 or
TEST_PWM_2 "mode" (the link explains what this means).
#17, M1S:
Three PWMs With Power Outputs
6.2.9.24
Function: Three PWMs with power outputs (the power must be supplied externally)
Form factor: M1S
See also: #16, #31
252
Details
This Tibbit is based on the PIC16F1824 microcontroller and takes advantage of the
PWM channels available on this PIC device. The PIC micro has four PWM channels
but one of the channels cannot be used because it shares I/O lines with the I2C
interface. The I2C interface is utilized for communications with the main CPU of the
TPP board and also for PIC firmware upgrades.
The frequency and the pulse width (duty cycle) are set independently for each
PWM channel. The frequency is controlled through a divider and a period value. The
divider allows you to select the base frequency applied to the divider. Available
choices are 32MHz, 8MHz, 2MHz, and 500KHz. The output signal of the PWM can
then be programmed to have the period equal to 4~1024 base frequency periods in
4-period steps (i.e. 4, 8, 12,...1020, 1024). This gives you the output range from
8MHz down to 488Hz. The PWM pulse width can be programmed to have the period
equal to 1~1024 base frequency periods in 1-period steps (1, 2, 3,... 1023, 1024).
Each PWM channel uses one Singreat Electronics GT430PSB P-channel FET
transistor which is rated for 4A continuous current at room temperature.
not common but possible to use the latter for wiring into the PWM outputs. The
ground elsewhere, as #21 doesn't have its own ground line and the PWM Tibbit
outputs voltages with respect to the system ground.
LEDs
253

used to write to and read from PIC's internal RAM and registers. This facilitates a
simple and versatile access to all microcontroller resources. The available Tibbo
to access and set the PWM channels.
essentially scripted in Tibbo BASIC, it is possible to modify PWM setup (and PIC
behavior) without making any changes to the PIC firmware.
The GRA firmware can be updated or replaced using the pic_firmware_upgrade
Tibbo BASIC project (see below). You can, therefore, create and run PIC
applications that go far beyond providing simple register and memory access.
Sample project
programmable/applications/i2c-spi/pwm.html. Run the project in the TEST_PWM_1 or
TEST_PWM_2 "mode" (the link explains what this means).
#18, C1:
Power Input
6.2.9.25
Function: Power jack and two terminal blocks

Form factor: C1
Special needs: --Power requirements: --See also: #19, #20, #21
Details
---
LEDs
---
#19, C2:
DB9M Connector
6.2.9.26
Function: DB9M connector

Form factor: C2
Details
---
#20, C2:
Nine Terminal Blocks
6.2.9.27
Function: Nine terminal blocks

Form factor: C2
Special needs: ---
254
255

Power requirements: --See also: #18, #19, #21
Details
---
#21, C1:
Four Terminal Blocks
6.2.9.28
Function: Four terminal blocks

Form factor: C1
256
Details
---
#23, M2T:
Isolated PoE Power Supply, 5V Output
6.2.9.29
Function: Isolated PoE power supply with 5V output, shutdown control. Also can be
used as generic isolated power supply with 35-60V input range.
Form factor: M2T
Special needs: [POE] (unless used as a generic power supply)
Power requirements: PoE-compliant power source (unless used as a generic power
supply, in which case external 35-60V power source is required)
Mates with: #19, #20, #21 (aligns with the lower portion of this Tibbit), #37
See also: #09, #10, #12, #25
257
Details
This Tibbit is capable of generating up to 1.3A of 5V power from the external PoE
power source.
The following table details the maximum ambient temperature at given output
current:
Output current
Ambient T
up to 1.3A
up to 50C
up to 1.0A
up to 60C

up to 0.5A
258
up to 80C
As the PoE device, this Tibbit must be installed in the POE socket. On the TPP2
board Tibbit #23 will occupy sockets S9 and S11. On the TPP3 board this Tibbit will
occupy sockets S25 and S27. To connect the Tibbit to the Ethernet lines, four
jumpers located next to the RJ45 jack will have to be in the "PoE (1-2)" position.
Tibbit #23 can also be used as a generic isolated power supply. The 35-60V input
range makes it ideal for applications relying on 48V power. In case of non-PoE use
the external power is applied (in any polarity) via line pairs IO5/IO6 or IO7/IO8.
this Tibbit.
LEDs
and lights up when the voltage is present on this line. This LED's brightness varies
depending on the load current. Red LED is connected to the -SHUTDOWN line and
lights up when the line is LOW (i.e. when the power supply is in shutdown).
#24, M1S:
Thermocouple Temperature Meter
6.2.9.30
Function: Thermocouple temperature meter for type K probes

Form factor: M1S
Special needs: --Power requirements: 5V/TBDmA
Mates with: #19, #20, #21
See also: #29
259
Details
This Tibbit is not yet documented.
#25: M2S:
High-power 5V Supply, 12/24/48V Input
6.2.9.31
Function: High-power non-isolated power supply with 5V output, 8-60V input

range, and shutdown control
Form factor: M2T
Mates with: #18, #19, #20, #21
See also: #09, #10, #12, #23
260
Details
This Tibbit is capable of generating up to 1.5A of 5V power from the external input
in the 8-60V range. Although this Tibbit is primarily intended for 24V and 48V
applications, it is equally suited for 12V systems (albeit the current it is capable of
providing with 12V input is lower).
The following table details the maximum ambient temperature at given output
current and input voltage:
Output current
@ Input V
Ambient T
up to 1A
@ 12V
up to 70C
up to 1.5A
@ 24V
up to 60C
up to 1.0A
@ 24V
up to 80C
up to 1.0A
@ 48V
up to 60C
up to 1.0A
@ 60V
up to 50C
up to 0.5A
@ 48V
up to 80C
up to 0.5A
@ 60V
up to 70C
Multiple power supply Tibbits can be used to increase available current or for power
redundancy.
this Tibbit.
LEDs
261

shutdown).
#26, M1S:
IR Command Processor
6.2.9.32
Function: Records and plays back infrared commands (codes) of conventional IR

remote controls
Form factor: M1S
Mates with: #19, #20, #21
See also: ---
Details
IR command processor Tibbit records and plays back infrared commands of
conventional IR remote controls. This Tibbit utilizes an FPGA-based circuit for
262
capturing and reproducing IR signals, thus ensuring high timing precision and low
signal jitter. Tibbit #26 is based on the iCE5LP1K-SWG36 FPGA from Lattice
Semiconductor.
The Tibbit is controlled through a standard SPI interface lines -CS, SCLK, MOSI, and
MISO. There are two non-standard features built on top of the SPI interface:
-CS and SCLK lines are used to produce a reset pulse for the FPGA IC.
MISO line also doubles as a status (DONE) line.
Both non-standard features are described in Resetting and Initializing the Onboard
FPGA.
A suitable IR receiver and emitter must be connected to this Tibbit. Typically, you
would pair this Tibbit with #20 or #21, then attach the IR receiver and emitter using
wires. Tibbit #26 can work with a wide variety of IR receivers and transmitters. We
have provided some examples of suitable IR front-ends, but the spectrum of
receivers and transmitters that will work with this Tibbit is much wider than what's
documented here.
Note that there is no need to have a current-limiting resistor on the IR OUTPUT.
This is a current-regulated output that internally limits the output current to
500mA.
LEDs
There are three red LEDs and one green LED. These four LEDs are connected to four
interface lines of the Tibbit. LEDs light up for the LOW state of the interface lines.
Red LEDs are connected to the -CS, SCLK, and MOSI lines. The green LED is
connected to the DONE/MISO line.
Sample project
"test_tibbit_26_(IR proc)". You can find it here: http://tibbo.com/programmable/
applications/i2c-spi/ir.html.
Further info
Theory of operation
Resetting and initializing the onboard FPGA
SPI read and write transactions
Registers
Examples of wiring to IR receivers & emitters
Theory of Operation
Before the IR Tibbit can begin normal operation it must be properly reset and
initialized.
Once initialized, the Tibbit is controlled through a number of registers. Registers are
accessed through the SPI interface using SPI read and write transactions.
This Tibbit supports two commands, which are issued through the command
register: receive (record) IR data, and transmit (reproduce) IR data.
The Tibbit looks at IR data as a sequence of "IR light ON" and "IR light OFF" times.
263

No intelligent data analysis is performed. When recording an incoming IR signal,
Tibbit #26 simply measures ON and OFF times and outputs the data as an array of
measured ON and OFF lengths. Measured lengths represent demodulated IR signal,
i.e. the signal without the carrier frequency. ON and OFF time lengths are expressed
as the number of clock periods of the modulation frequency.
Modulated and unmodulated incoming IR streams

The IR Tibbit can work with IR receivers that output IR data intact, including the
modulation frequency. The Tibbit also works with receivers that filter the carrier
out. Option bit 4 in the command register determines what kind of incoming IR
stream is expected.
If the Tibbit is set to record a modulated incoming IR stream, then it will demodulate
the incoming signal. The modulation frequency will be filtered out, measured (with
averaging), and the corresponding divider value will be stored into the carrier divider
registers. The relationship between the divider value and the modulation frequency
is as follows:
Modulation_frq = 12Mhz / divider_value
If the Tibbit is set to record a demodulated incoming RX stream then it will be
expecting to work with data that doesn't contain the carrier frequency. In this
case, your program must preset the carrier divider registers with the value
corresponding to the expected modulation frequency before starting the recording.
In both cases, ON and OFF period lengths in the information-bearing (demodulated)
signal are measured in periods of the carrier frequency and the resulting data is
stored into the RX data buffer. The length of the recorded data (in bytes) can be
obtained from the RX length registers.
After the Tibbit receives the command to record the data, it starts waiting for the
first "IR light ON" state. The end of data is detected using a timeout method. After
the recording ends, bit 0 of the status register is set to 1. Therefore, your program
can poll this bit to determine when the data is ready (and if anything was received
at all).
IR receivers vary in how they output "IR light ON" (detected) and "IR light OFF" (not
detected) states. Many receivers output HIGH when the IR light is OFF, and LOW
when it is ON. We refer to such output lines as "normal". Some receivers are doing
this in reverse, meaning that LOW corresponds to the absence of the IR light, and
HIGH corresponds to the presence of the IR light. We refer to such output lines as
"inverted". Option bit 2 of the command register allows you to set the type of the
attached IR receiver.
When storing the recorded IR signal, remember to preserve not only the data from
the RX buffer (in the length determined by the RX length registers), but also the
divider value from the carrier divider registers.
Outgoing IR streams
Your program shall prepare the data for the output IR stream in the TX data buffer.
264
The format of data is the same wit the RX data buffer. Note that RX and TX buffers
are physically separate so if you want to immediately play back the signal you've
just recorded you still need to copy the data from the RX buffer into the TX buffer.
Prior to sending the "start transmitting data" command your program must preset
the carrier divider registers. As explained above, the information about the
modulation frequency should be stored along with the IR data itself.
IR emitters vary in the polarity of their control signal. Many emitters turn their IR
LED on when the control line is LOW. We refer to such control lines as "normal".
Some emitters turn their IR LED on when the control line is HIGH. We call this an
inverted control line. Option bit 3 of the command register allows you to set the
type of the attached IR emitter.
Resetting and Initializing the Onboard FPGA

For correct operation, the FPGA IC must be properly reset and uploaded with the
run-time binary code. Since M1 Tibbits only have four CPU lines, implementing a
dedicated reset line wasn't possible. As a result, FPGA reset is generated by
manipulating -CS and SCLK lines.
Here is the FPGA reset procedure (for reference, see tbt26_init() @ tbt26.tbs of
the test_tibbit_26 project):
Set the -CS line HIGH.
Set the SCLK line LOW.
Set the SCLK line HIGH. Now the FPGA is in reset.
Generate a small delay (optional).
Set the -CS line LOW.
Set the SCLK line HIGH. Now the FPGA is out of reset.
If the above sounds cryptic, here is the schematic diagram of the reset circuit:
The circuit is based on a D trigger that is clocked by the SCLK line. The data input D
of the trigger is connected to the -CS line. The FPGA's reset line (active LOW) is
taken from the inverted output -Q of the trigger. Setting the -CS line HIGH and
producing a rising edge on the SCLK line latches the trigger, and its -Q (inverted)
output becomes LOW. The FPGA IC enters the reset state. To release the FPGA
from reset, you need to set the -CS line LOW and produce another rising edge on
the SCLK line.
Once the FPGA is out of reset, avoid toggling the SCLK line while the -CS is HIGH
(inactive). This shouldn't be problematic as there is no point in generating SPI
clocks while the chip select is not asserted.
Following reset, the FPGA must be uploaded with the run-time binary file (for
265

reference, see tbt26_init() @ tbt26.tbs of the test_tibbit_26 project).
Key points:
SPI mode 2 is used; bytes are transmitted MSBit first.
Bytes of the run-time binary (IR_Remote_bitmap.bin) are sent to the FPGA one
after one.
After the last byte has been sent, the program generates 50 additional clock
cycles. We don't know why this is necessary. We just followed Lattice
specification.
After that, the success or failure of the upload procedure are verified through the
DONE/MISO line.
As the name implies, the DONE/MISO line serves two functions. When the -CS is
asserted (LOW), this line works as the standard MISO line of the SPI interface.
When the -CS line is HIGH, this line channels the state of the FPGA's CDONE output.
This output becomes HIGH if the upload of the binary file was successful.
SPI Read and Write Transactions

As with all SPI communications, transactions start when the -CS line goes LOW and
end when the -CS line goes HIGH.
SPI write transaction

Byte number
MOSI
MISO
&h02 (write opcode)
---
Register address, high

byte
---
Register address, low

byte
---
Data byte 1
---
Data byte 2
---
...
---
Byte number
MOSI
MISO
&h03 (read opcode)
---
Register address, high

byte
---
Register address, low

byte
---
---
Data byte 1
---
Data byte 2
---
...
SPI read transaction
266
Address auto-increments
Register address sent in bytes 2 and 3 of every SPI transaction will auto-increment
with each data byte send to or received from the FPGA.
This allows you to write or read multiple registers within the span of a single
transaction.
Registers
Registers described here are implemented within the IR_Remote_bitmap.bin FPGA
project, which needs to be uploaded into the FPGA during the initialization process.
Registers are accessed using SPI read and write transactions.
Available registers:
Command register
Status register
TX length registers
RX length registers
Carrier divider registers
TX and RX data buffers
Command Register
Address = &h000; read/write access
This register is used to direct the Tibbit to start receiving IR data or start
transmitting IR data. This register also contains three option bits.
Bit 4, carrier mode: 0- incoming signal contains the carrier frequency, 1- incoming
signal does not contain the carrier frequency.
Bit 3, data output mode: 0- LOW to turn the emitter LED on (normal mode), 1HIGH to turn the emitter LED on (inverted mode).
Bit 2, data input mode: 0- LOW means that the IR light is detected (normal
mode), 1- HIGH means that the IR light is detected (inverted mode).
Bit 1: "Rising edge" on this bit directs the Tibbit to start receiving data.
Bit 0: "Rising edge" on this bit directs the Tibbit to start transmitting data.
"Rising edge" for bits 1 and 0 refers to the change of the bit state. For example, to
initiate data reception in the no-carrier mode, do the following:
Write &h10 into the command register. This will set bit 4 (carrier mode) to the
desired state and clear bit 1.
Write &h12 into the command register. This will still keep bit 4 in the desired
state and set bit 1 to HIGH. Since this bit was previously set LOW, this second
step will achieve the "rising edge" on bit 1.
Note that two writes above are two separate write transactions that sequentially
store &h10 and &h12 into the command register.
267
Status Register
Address = &h001; read-only access
This register reports the status of the data recording and transmission (playback).
Bit 1: 0- IR data transmission is in progress, 1- IR data transmission has been
completed.
Bit 0: 0- IR data recording is in progress, 1- IR data recording has been
completed. If the data recording fails (i.e. because no IR signal has been received
at all) then this bit will remain at 0.
TX Length Registers
Address = &h002 (low byte) and &h003 (high byte); read/write access
Low and high bytes of the length of data prepared for transmission in the TX data
buffer. Your program must set the actual length of data prepared for transmission.
Note that the data length is expressed in bytes (even though the logical unit of
data in the TX buffer is a 16-bit word).
RX Length Registers
Address = &h004 (low byte) and &h005 (high byte); read-only access
Low and high bytes of the length of received data awaiting readout from the RX
data buffer. The Tibbit sets these registers automatically, upon the completion of
the IR data recording.
Note that the data length is expressed in bytes (even though the logical unit of
data in the RX buffer is a 16-bit word).
Carrier Divider Registers

Address = &h006 (low byte) and &h007 (high byte); read/write access
Low and high bytes of the carrier divider -- a value that corresponds to the
modulation frequency in the following manner:
Modulation_frq = 12Mhz / divider_value
How to use these registers:
When the IR data recording is conducted in the carrier mode (command register,
bit 4 = 0) then after the successful reception of an IR code the carrier divider
registers will contain the divider value for the measured carrier frequency. Your
program will need to save the measured divider value together with the recorded
data.
When the IR data recording is conducted in the no-carrier mode (command
register, bit 4 = 1) then your program must preset the carrier divider registers with
the correct value for the expected carrier frequency.
Before transmitting the IR data, your program must preset the carrier divider
registers with the correct value for the desired carrier frequency.
268
TX and RX Data Buffers

Address range = &h800 ~ &hFFF
There are two data buffers -- TX buffer and RX buffer. Each buffer's capacity is
2048 bytes or 1024 16-bit words.
Both buffers are mapped into the same address space. The TX buffer is accessed
with write transactions, while the RX buffer is accessed with read transactions. It is
not possible to read from the TX buffer or write into the RX buffer.
The TX buffer stores the data prepared for transmission. Before the data
transmission, your program must store the data to be transmitted into the TX
buffer, beginning from address &h800. Your program must also set TX length
registers to the length of prepared TX data (in bytes).
The RX buffer accumulates incoming IR data received in the cause of data
recording. After the IR data recording completes, this buffer will contain the
received data, aligned at address &h800. RX length registers contain the length of
received data (in bytes).
The IR Tibbit treats IR data (demodulated, information-bearing signal) as a
sequence of "IR light ON" and "IR light OFF" periods of measured lengths. That is,
the IR Tibbit does not attempt to process the data "intelligently" (i.e. classify the IR
protocol, etc.). The length of each ON and OFF period is measured and recorded in
periods of the modulation frequency. Here is how the data is stored in the buffer:
Address
Byte
Word
&h800
Low byte
ON time
&h801
High byte
&h802
Low byte
&h803
High byte
...
...
OFF time
...
Examples of Wiring to IR Receivers & Emitters

Kingbright APECVA3010P3BT phototransistor
These are popular SMT phototransistors. The carrier frequency is filtered out, so run
the IR data recording in the no-carrier mode (command register, bit 4 = 1). The
output produced by this circuit is "normal" (non-inverted), so set bit 2 of the
command register to 0.
269

Vishay TSMP6000
This is a photo detector and preamplifier in one package, with good noise filtering.
This part is fast enough to preserve the modulation frequency in the output signal.
Therefore, set bit 4 of the command register to 0. The output produced by this IC is
"normal" (non-inverted), so set bit 2 of the command register to 0.
Vishay TSAL6100
This is a high-power infrared emitting diode, very popular for IR applications. Notice
that a current limiting resistor is not necessary. The diode connects directly to VCC
and IR OUTPUT lines of Tibbit #16.
Xantech 282D "designer" emitter and 283D emitter

To connect this emitter, cut the audio connector off the emitter's cable, then
connect black-and-white wire to VCC and black write to IR OUTPUT.
#28, C1:
Ambient Light Sensor
6.2.9.33
Function: Visible spectrum ambient light sensor

Form factor: C1
Special needs: Tibbit #00-3
See also: #29, #30, #35, #36
270
Details
This Tibbit is based on the BH1721FVC ambient light sensor with I2C interface. The
sensor is implemented as the C1 device with a clear (transparent) window. The
module measures the light intensity of the surrounding environment and its spectral
response is close to that of a human eye.
The module outputs ambient light measurements as 16-bit values that do not
correspond to any standard measurement units.
This C1 device requires the Tibbit #00-3 to be installed in the neighboring "M" Tibbit
socket. #00-3 provides two direct lines for I2C comms, as well as the ground and
+5V power for the BH1721FVC IC.
Sample project
The use of this and other sensor Tibbits is illustrated by a group of Tibbo BASIC test
projects. You can find them at http://tibbo.com/programmable/applications/i2c-spi/
sensors.html.
#29, C1:
Ambient Temperature Meter
6.2.9.34
Function: Ambient temperature meter

Form factor: C1
See also: #28, #30, #35, #36
271
Details
This Tibbit is based on the MCP9808 ambient temperature sensor IC with I2C
interface. The sensor is implemented as the C1 device with perforated front face
and a rubber wall separating the temperature sensor from the internal space of the
TPS system. This is done to minimize the influence of the heat produced by the TPS
motherboard and adjacent Tibbits.
The MCP9808 has programmable resolution and can measure the ambient
temperature in steps as small as 1/16 degree Celsius. The conversion process is
rather slow at this resolution and takes ~250ms. Our sample project (see below)
operates with 1/4 degree precision, which also requires a relatively short conversion
time of ~65ms.
This device operates with a typical accuracy of +/-0.25 deg.C.
+5V power for the MCP9808.
Sample project
sensors.html.
#30, C1:
Ambient Humidity/Temperature Meter
6.2.9.35
Function: Ambient humidity and temperature meter

Form factor: C1
See also: #28, #29, #35, #36
272
Details
This Tibbit is based on the HIH6130 ambient humidity and temperature sensor IC
with I2C interface. The sensor is implemented as the C1 device with perforated
front face and a rubber wall separating the sensor from the internal space of the
TPS system. This is done to minimize the influence of the heat produced by the TPS
motherboard and adjacent Tibbits.
The module measures the ambient relative humidity with 0.04% resolution and +/4%RH accuracy. The temperature is measured with 0.025 deg.C resolution and +/-1
deg.C accuracy.
+5V power for the HIH6130 IC.
Sample project
sensors.html.
#31, C1:
PIC Coprocessor
6.2.9.36
Function: PIC coprocessor (PWM, ADC, UART, IO)

Form factor: M1S
See also: #16, #17
273
Details
Tibbit #31 is based on the PIC16F1824 microcontroller and takes advantage of the
rich peripheral set available on this PIC device. The I2C interface is used for
communications with the main CPU of the TPP board and also for PIC firmware
upgrades. Four of the micro's I/O lines act as IO1~4 lines of the Tibbit module:
Three lines have PWM capability;
All four lines can work as ADC inputs;
Two lines can act as TX and RX of the PIC's UART;
Each line can also function as a a regular input/output.
Three PWM channels are exposed through lines IO1~3. Each channel allows you to
independently set its frequency and the pulse width (duty cycle). The frequency is
controlled through a divider and a period value. The divider selects the base
frequency for the PWM channel. Available choices are 32MHz, 8MHz, 2MHz, and
500KHz. The output signal of the PWM can then be programmed to have the period
equal to 4~1024 base frequency periods in 4-period steps (i.e. 4, 8, 12,...1020,
1024). This gives you the output range from 8MHz down to 488Hz. The PWM pulse
width can be programmed to have the period equal to 1~1024 base frequency
periods in 1-period steps (1, 2, 3,... 1023, 1024).
The analog-to-digital converter has the resolution of 10 bits and the input range of
0~5V.
The UART has standard capabilities that include programmable baudrate, parity bit,
and the choice of the 8-bit or 9-bit operation.
not common but possible to use the latter for wiring into this Tibbit. The Tibbit #21
(four terminal blocks) can also be used but you will have to steal the ground
elsewhere, as #21 doesn't have its own ground line and the PWM Tibbit outputs
274
LEDs
used to write to and read from the PIC's internal RAM and registers. This facilitates
a simple and versatile access to all microcontroller resources. The available Tibbo
to control the micro.
essentially scripted in Tibbo BASIC, it is possible to modify the PIC behavior without
making any changes to its firmware.
The GRA firmware can be updated or replaced using the update_pic_firmware Tibbo
BASIC project (see below). You can, therefore, create and run PIC applications that
go far beyond providing simple register and memory access.
Sample project
programmable/applications/i2c-spi/pwm.html.
#35, C1:
Barometric Pressure Sensor
6.2.9.37
Function: Barometric pressure sensor

Form factor: C1
See also: #28, #29, #30, #36
275
Details
This Tibbit is based on the MPL115A2 barometric pressure measurement IC with I2C
interface. The sensor is implemented as the C1 device with perforated front face.
The module measures the atmospheric pressure with 0.15 kPa resolution and +/-1
kPa accuracy.
+5V power for the MPL115A2 IC.
Sample project
sensors.html.
#36, C1:
3-axis Accelerometer
6.2.9.38
Function: 3-axis accelerometer (shock sensor)

Form factor: C1
See also: #28, #29, #30, #35
276
Details
This Tibbit is based on the ADXL312 accelerometer IC with I2C interface. The sensor
is implemented as the C1 device.
The module measures acceleration in the +/-12G range, simultaneously in three
axes, and with 2.9mG resolution.
+5V power for the ADXL312 IC.
Sample project
sensors.html.
#37, C1:
RF Connector
6.2.9.39
Function: RF connector
Form factor: C1
Special needs: --Power requirements: --See also: ---
Details
---
277
#38: C1:
Pushbutton
6.2.9.40
Function: One pushbutton

Form factor: C1
See also: #39
Details
socket.
The output signal will be available on line A of Tibbit #00-3. The output will be LOW
when the button is pressed.
#39-1~4,
C1: Large LED (Four Colors Available)
6.2.9.41
Function: Large LED (red, blue, green, and yellow colors available)
Form factor: C1
See also: #38
278
Details
socket.
The LED is to be controlled through line A of Tibbit #00-3. Set the line LOW to turn
the LED ON.
IMPORTANT NOTE! Red and blue LEDs used in this Tibbit are high-brightness LEDs
that are fairly visible in regular office lighting conditions. Green and yellow LEDs are
less bright and are only recommended for use in dimly lit environments (equipment
closets, etc.).
#40-1~4,
M1S: Digital Potentiometer (Four Nominals)
6.2.9.42
Function: Digital potentiometer (5KOhm, 10KOhm, 50KOhm, and 100KOhm versions

available)
Form factor: M1S
See also: ---
279
Details
The Tibbit is based on the MCP4561 digital POT IC from Microchip. This IC has an 8bit resolution. Refer to Microchip datasheet for operation details.
LEDs
There is one red and one yellow LED. The red LED is connected to the SCL line of
the I2C interface, the yellow LED -- to the SDA line.
Sample project
"test_tibbit_40_(potentiometer)". You can find it here: http://tibbo.com/
programmable/applications/i2c-spi/potentiometer.html.
#41, C1:
8-bit Port
6.2.9.43
Function: 8-bit port (supplied with 200mm cable)

Form factor: C1
See also: ---
280
Details
This Tibbit is based on the MCP23008 8-bit port expander IC from Microchip. Refer
to Microchip datasheet for operation details.
socket.
To simplify wiring, Tibbit #41 is supplied with a 200mm WAS-P044 cable.
Sample project
"test_tibbit_41_(8-bit port extender)". You can find it here: http://tibbo.com/
programmable/applications/i2c-spi/8-bit-port.html.
#42, M1S:
RTC and NVRAM With Backup
6.2.9.44
Function: Real-time clock and non-volatile memory with backup battery and
interrupt output
Form factor: M1S
Mates with: #19, #20, #21 (limited use), #37
See also: ---
281
Details
This Tibbit is based on the DS3234 IC from Maxim Integrated. This is a temperaturecompensated high accuracy RTC with non-volatile memory. Refer to Maxim
Integrated datasheet for operation details.
The DS3234 RTC has the -INT/SQW pin, which can be set to trigger at a predefined
date/time or output a square wave signal. The -INT/SQW is available to the outside
world through the line IO1. -INT/SQW is also accessible from the CPU. The line is
multiplexed with the DOUT signal of the DS3234. The multiplexor is controlled by the
CS state. When CS is LOW, thus indicating that an SPI transaction is in progress,
the multiplexor selects the DOUT line. When CS is HIGH, the multiplexor selects the
-INT/SQW signal. Therefore, it is only possible to gauge the -INT/SQW state when
the SPI bus is idle.
The Tibbit carries a backup battery which powers the RTC when the main +5V
supply is off.
LEDs
There are three red LEDs and one green LED. Red LEDs are connector to CS, SCLK,
and MOSI lines. Green LED is connected to the -INT/MISO line.
Sample project
"test_tibbit_42_(RTC)". You can find it here: http://tibbo.com/programmable/
applications/i2c-spi/rtc.html.
The non-volatile memory of the DS3234 can be used from within the STG (settings)
library. Projects often have parameters (settings) that change too often to be
stored in the EEPROM, yet must be preserved even when the power is off. The nonvolatile memory of this Tibbit offers a perfect storage for such parameters.
#47, H2:
GPRS Modem
6.2.9.45
Function: GPRS modem

Form factor: H2
Special needs: --Power requirements: 5V/300mA average, spot current consumption reaches
1500mA
Mates with: --See also: ---
282
283
Details
This Tibbit is based on the SIM900 GPRS modem manufactured by SIMCOM. The
Tibbit is implemented as the H2 hybrid device. An external antenna (not included
with the Tibbit) connects to the SMA type connector located on the front of this
hybrid Tibbit. The use of external antenna is a must -- the Tibbit will not be able to
operate without it.
There is also a standard stereo phone jack, which can accommodate regular mobile
phone headsets. With the right application controlling the modem through AT
commands this Tibbit will be able to make voice calls as well!
The modem has standard TX, RX, RTS, and CTS signals, plus several additional lines.
The -SHDN (shutdown) line, when LOW, turns off the power regulator of the Tibbit.
When the line is switched HIGH the power regulator is re-enabled but the modem
remains in the off state. Toggle the PWRKEY line (see below) to turn on the modem.
The PWRKEY (power key) line toggles the power on and off. A HIGH-to-LOW
transition on this line flips the power: turns the Tibbit on if it was off, and off if the
Tibbit was on. This control method is highly inconvenient but is somehow used on all
GPRS modems. There are two methods of finding out whether the modem is
currently on or off: by sending an AT command and checking for a response, or by
querying the state of the STATUS line (see below).
The RESET line is active high. Bringing the line HIGH for about one second resets the
modem. There is no need to reset the Tibbit after turning on its power.
The STATUS line is LOW when the modem is off and HIGH when the modem is on.
The line can be used to check the current power state of the modem.
SIM card slot
The SIM card holder is located on the bottom of the Tibbit. This means that in order
to insert or remove the SIM you must first open up the TPS and then remove the
Tibbit from the Tibbo Project PCB. We chose this relatively inaccessible SIM card
location to lower the chances of the SIM getting stolen. While it is still possible to
284
get to the SIM card, doing so requires quite a bit of time and work, thus making it
impossible to remove the card "in a flash".
LEDs
There is one red and one green LED. The red LED is connected to the TX line, the
green LED -- to the RX line. Remaining lines are not equipped with LEDs because of
the board space constraints.
Power considerations
Tibbit #47 consumes a modest average current of 300mA but has the peak current
consumption of 1.5A. The current "spikes" are so narrow that they can't be seen on
a regular multimeter. Nevertheless, they are present and occur regularly when the
GPRS link is established. To prevent reboots and unstable operation make sure that
you use an adequate power source.
At this time, the TPS platform only offers two power supply Tibbits capable of
providing the required surge current -- Tibbit #23 (PoE) and #25 (12/24/48V). Tibbit
#25 will only be able to sustain the GPRS modem when powered from the 24V or
higher voltage.
The Online Configurator (http://tibbo.com/buy/tps/tpc.html) lists Tibbit #47 as
consuming 850mA of current. This is because the Configurator does not account for
surge currents and only specifies the average current consumption for each Tibbit.
We found 800mA to be a good approximation of the current burden that the GPRS
Tibbit puts on the power source.
GPRS library and the sample project
The easiest way to incorporate the Tibbit #47 into your project is by using our
official GPRS library (http://docs.tibbo.com/taiko/lib_gprs.htm). We've published a
small project that illustrates the use of this library. You can find it here: http://
tibbo.com/basic/resources/examples/test_gprs_lib.html.
#48, H2:
Audio In/Out
6.2.9.46
96KHz stereo audio line out, mic in Tibbit.
#49, C2:
SD Card Socket
6.2.9.47
Micro SD card slot Tibbit.
#57, M1S:
FPGA Tibbit
6.2.9.48
Function: Contains an ICE5LP1K-SWG36ITR50 FPGA from Lattice Semiconductor

Form factor: M1S
Special needs: --Power requirements: 5V/25a na mA
Mates with: #19, #20, #21
See also: ---
285
Details
The FPGA Tibbit carries a ICE5LP1K-SWG36ITR50 FPGA from Lattice Semiconductor.
The Tibbit is suitable for implementing a wide variety of configurations (functions).
The list of currently available configurations is found in Implemented Configurations.
Four IO lines of the FPGA are exposed to the outside world. Since the FPGA only
works with 3.3V logical signals, there are automatic bi-directional level shifters
between the FPGA and pins 2-5 of the Tibbit. "Automatic" means that these level
shifters do not require direction control and choose the direction for each IO line
automatically, depending on which side (FPGA or an external circuit) is driving this
line.
The Tibbit is controlled through a standard SPI interface lines -CS, SCLK, MOSI, and
MISO. There are two non-standard features built on top of the SPI interface:
-CS and SCLK lines are used to produce a reset pulse for the FPGA IC.
MISO line also doubles as a status (DONE) line.
Both non-standard features are described in Resetting and Initializing the Onboard
FPGA.
LEDs
There are three red LEDs and one green LED. These four LEDs are connected to four
interface lines of the Tibbit. LEDs light up for the LOW state of the interface lines.
Red LEDs are connected to the -CS, SCLK, and MOSI lines. The green LED is
connected to the DONE/MISO line.
Sample project
"test_tibbit_57_(RGBW)". You can find it here: http://tibbo.com/programmable/
applications/i2c-spi/fpga.html.
286
Further info
Resetting and initializing the onboard FPGA
Implemented Configurations
Resetting and Initializing the Onboard FPGA

For correct operation, the FPGA IC must be properly reset and uploaded with the
run-time binary code. Since M1 Tibbits only have four CPU lines, implementing a
dedicated reset line wasn't possible. As a result, FPGA reset is generated by
manipulating -CS and SCLK lines.
Here is the FPGA reset procedure (for reference, see tbt57_init() @
tbt57_common.tbs of the test_tibbit_57_sled project):
Set the -CS line HIGH.
Set the SCLK line HIGH. Now the FPGA is in reset.
Generate a small delay (optional).
Set the -CS line LOW.
Set the SCLK line HIGH. Now the FPGA is out of reset.
If the above sounds cryptic, here is the schematic diagram of the reset circuit:
The circuit is based on a D trigger that is clocked by the SCLK line. The data input D
of the trigger is connected to the -CS line. The FPGA's reset line (active LOW) is
taken from the inverted output -Q of the trigger. Setting the -CS line HIGH and
producing a rising edge on the SCLK line latches the trigger, and its -Q (inverted)
output becomes LOW. The FPGA IC enters the reset state. To release the FPGA
from reset, you need to set the -CS line LOW and produce another rising edge on
the SCLK line.
Once the FPGA is out of reset, avoid toggling the SCLK line while the -CS is HIGH
(inactive). This shouldn't be problematic as there is no point in generating SPI
clocks while the chip select is not asserted.
Following reset, the FPGA must be uploaded with the run-time binary file (for
reference, see tbt57_init() @ tbt57_common.tbs of the test_tibbit_57_sled
project). What binary file is to be uploaded depends on the desired FPGA function.
The full list of available configurations is found in Implemented Configurations.
Key points:
SPI mode 2 is used; bytes are transmitted MSBit first.
287

Bytes of the run-time binary (IR_Remote_bitmap.bin) are sent to the FPGA one
after one.
After the last byte has been sent, the program generates 50 additional clock
cycles. We don't know why this is necessary. We just followed Lattice
specification.
After that, the success or failure of the upload procedure are verified through the
DONE/MISO line.
As the name implies, the DONE/MISO line serves two functions. When the -CS is
asserted (LOW), this line works as the standard MISO line of the SPI interface.
When the -CS line is HIGH, this line channels the state of the FPGA's CDONE output.
This output becomes HIGH if the upload of the binary file was successful.
Implemented Configurations
At the moment there is only one use for the FPGA Tibbit:

In the smart LED configuration, Tibbit #57 can control a string of daisy-chained
SK6812RGBW LEDs. SK6812RGBW devices carry a small IC driving four onboard light
emitters with red, green, blue, and white colors. Each of the color sources can be
set to one of the 256 levels of brightness, meaning that four bytes of data are
needed per LED.
Smart LEDs are controlled via a special 1-wire protocol. Each LED has a DIN (data
in) and DOUT (data out) pins. The DIN pin of the first LED in the chain is connected
to the IO1 line of the FPGA Tibbit. The DOUT of the first LED is connected to the
DIN of the second LED, the DOUT of the second LED -- to the DIN of the third LED,
and so on.
In the smart LED configuration, the FPGA receives the data from the CPU through
the SPI interface and stores this data in the 8192-byte data buffer.
As with all SPI communications, transactions start when the -CS line goes LOW and
end when the -CS line goes HIGH. Bringing the -CS line LOW clears the memory
buffer of the FPGA and resets the buffer pointer to 0 (first buffer location). Each
subsequent byte of data sent in the course of an SPI transaction is stored into the
buffer location pointed at by the buffer, and then the pointer is incremented by one.
288
Once the -CS line goes HIGH, the FPGA starts sending the data stored in its buffer
memory to the LED chain.
The DONE signal (which is multiplexed with the MISO line) is asserted LOW for the
duration of the LED update cycle, meaning that DONE goes LOW as soon as -CS
goes HIGH. The DONE signal goes HIGH once the LED update cycle is completed. To
query the state of the DONE signal, read the DONE/MISO line while the -CS is HIGH.
New SPI transaction should not start while the DONE signal is LOW.
Data format for SPI write transactions
Byte number
MOSI
MISO
Green level, LED N*
---
Red level, LED N
---
Blue level, LED N
---
White level, LED N
---
Green level, LED N-1
---
Red level, LED N-1
---
Blue level, LED N-1
---
White level, LED N-1
---
---
---
---
Green level, LED 2
---
Red level, LED 2
---
Blue level, LED 2
---
White level, LED 2
---
Green level, LED 1
---
Red level, LED 1
---
Blue level, LED 1
---
White level, LED 1
---
* LED numbers (N, 2, 1) correspond to numbers on the diagram above.
Data format for SPI read transactions

No read transactions are supported in this configuration.
Sample project
The use of this and other "I2C/SPI" Tibbits is illustrated by a group of Tibbo BASIC
test projects. You can find them at http://tibbo.com/basic/resources/
i2c_tibbits.html. The smart LED project is titled test_tibbit_57_sled.
289
Tibbo Project PCBs (TPPs)
Tibbo Project PCBs are motherboards that accommodate Tibbits. Each board carries
a CPU, an Ethernet port, memory, status LEDs, and a buzzer.
Each TPP offers a number of standard tiles with installation sockets for Tibbits. Plug
in desired Tibbits, put the assembly into an optional Tibbo Project Box, and you've
got yourself a cost-effective, highly customized automation device that carries no
unwanted excess.
To achieve economical basic unit price, TPPs keep the onboard circuitry to the
necessary minimum. For example, there is no built-in power supply -- the boards
directly accept only regulated +5V power. Real-world power processing (from 12V,
PoE, etc.) is achieved by adding power supply Tibbits. This "no excess" approach is
the cornerstone of the Tibbo Project System.
TPPs come in two flovors: TPP2 and TPP3 boards run Tibbo OS (TiOS) and execute
applications written in Tibbo BASIC or Tibbo C (or both). The LTPP3 board runs
Linux.
TiOS-based TPPs are available in gen. 1 (original) and gen. 2 (fast) versions. Gen. 2
boards are 6-70 times faster than their original counterparts.
Available TPP Models

Available TPP models:
Size 2 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP2), gen. 2 -- 3 tiles
Size 3 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP3), gen. 2 -- 7 tiles
Size 2 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP2) -- 3 tiles
Size 3 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP3) -- 7 tiles
290
Size 3 Linux Tibbo Project PCB (LTPP3) -- 7 tiles
Size 2 Tibbo
6.3.1.1Project PCB (TPP2), Gen 2
!!! THIS PRODUCT IS IN BETA RELEASE !!!
Gen 2. performance highlights

The TPP2(G2) is a high-performance upgrade to the original TPP2 board. Here is a
list of important improvements:
32-bit architecture (vs. 16-bit architecture of the TPP2).
5 to 80 times better performance, depending on the calculations and variable
types.
7 times faster GPIO manipulation.
3 times larger available user SRAM (66KB vs. 22KB).
1.5-3.0 times faster graphics.
2 times larger flash memory (1MB for TiOS/code + 1MB for the file system vs.
1MB total for TiOS, code, and file system).
2.2 times lower power consumption (100mA vs. 220mA).
Introduction
Size 2 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP2), Gen. 2 runs Tibbo OS and is programmable in Tibbo
BASIC and Tibbo C.
TPP2(G2) is perfect for systems with a medium number of I/O lines. The board can
optionally control a TFT display and a keypad, so it is suitable for applications
291

requiring a human-machine interface (HMI).
This product can be used as a bare board or assembled into a size 2 Tibbo Project
Box. For HMI applications, the board can also be assembled into the TPB2L box,
which features a 320x240 TFT LCD and a 4-button sensor keypad.
Featuring 3 tiles for a total of 6 "M" and 6 "C" sockets, the TPP2(G2) can implement
configurations with up to four simple serial ports, up to 12 relays, or up to 24 optoinputs, PWM, or open-collector outputs.
The TPP2(G2) is perfect for data collection and AutoID projects, as well as factory,
shop, data center, hotel, and home automation applications. The board contains
enough "C" sockets to simultaneously accommodate temperature, humidity,
pressure, ambient light, and shock sensors. With the use of appropriate Tibbits the
board can even control legacy IR devices by emulating traditional IR remote
controls.
Hardware features
Fast 32-bit CPU, 5-80 times performance improvement over the original TPP2
board.
"cross" cables).
3 tiles (6 x "M" + 6 x "C" sockets, 24 control lines):
- Four "M" sockets with UART capability:
> Baudrates of up to 460,800bps;
> None/even/odd/mark/space parity modes;
> 7/8 bits/character modes (7-bit mode cannot be used in combination with parity = None);
> Full-duplex mode with optional flow control;
> Half-duplex mode with direction control;
> Encoding and decoding of Wiegand and clock/data streams.
- Six "M" sockets withinterrupt capability;

- One "M" socket with PoE capability.
Optional GPRS interface (requires Tibbit #47).
Connectors for optional TFT LCD and 4-button sensor keypad on the TPB2L.
Onboard buzzer.
RTC with dedicated backup supercapacitor.
2048KB of flash memory:
- 1048KB secure flash for TiOS and application code;
- 1048KB flash disk with fault-tolerant file system.
Eight onboard LEDs:
- Green and Red main status LEDs;
- Yellow Ethernet link LED;
- Five blue LEDs (can be used for Wi-Fi signal strength indication or any other
purpose).
Power: 100mA @ 5V (100BaseT mode, PLL on, all LEDs off).
Dimensions (LxW): 94x94mm.
292
Operating temperature range: -40 ~ +70C.

network (including "cold upgrade" firmware uploads through the network).
Platform objects:
- Lcd controls the TFT LCD display (optional, connected externally);
- Kp handles four-button keypad (optional, connected externally);
- Ser in charge of four serial ports (UART, Wiegand, and clock/data modes);
- Io handles I/O lines, ports, and six interrupts;
- Beep generates buzzer patterns;
- Button monitors the MD (setup) button;
293
Tiles, Sockets, Connectors, Controls
The TPP2(G2) board features 6 x "M" and (6+1) x "C" sockets.

Sockets (S1) ~ (S12) form 3 standard tiles.
There are 24 control lines connecting "M" sockets to the CPU -- four per each
socket.
Additionally:
"M" sockets (S1), (S3), (S5), and (S7) have the UART capability.
"M" sockets (S1), (S3), (S5), (S7), (S9), and (S10) have the interrupt capability.
"M" socket (S11) has the PoE capability, provided that four TPP2(G2) jumpers are
set to 1-2 position (see below).
"C" socket (S13) exists exclusively for the installation of the RF connector Tibbit
#37. This socket has no other functions.
The jumpers
Four jumpers next to the RJ45 jack define the connection between the "M" socket
(S11), "C" socket (S12), and the RJ45 jack:
294
When the jumpers are in the 1-2 position, four power lines from the RJ45 jack are
connected to four I/O lines of (S11). Under this arrangement you can install an M1
PoE device into the (S11), or M2 PoE device into the (S9)-(S11).
When the jumpers are in the 2-3 position, the RJ45 jack is disconnected from the
socket (S11). The socket (S11) is instead connected to (S12) in a "standard tile
way".
Size 3 Tibbo
6.3.1.2Project PCB (TPP3), Gen 2
!!! THIS PRODUCT IS IN BETA RELEASE !!!
Gen 2. performance highlights

The TPP2(G2) is a high-performance upgrade to the original TPP2 board. Here is a
list of important improvements:
32-bit architecture (vs. 16-bit architecture of the TPP2).
5 to 80 times better performance, depending on the calculations and variable
types.
7 times faster GPIO manipulation.
3 times larger available user SRAM (66KB vs. 22KB).
2 times larger flash memory (1MB for TiOS/code + 1MB for the file system vs.
1MB total for TiOS, code, and file system).
2.2 times lower power consumption (100mA vs. 220mA).
Introduction
Size 3 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP3), Gen. 2 runs Tibbo OS and is programmable in Tibbo
BASIC and Tibbo C.
295

TPP3(G2) is ideal for applications that require no human-machine interface (HMI)
while calling for a significant number of I/O lines and/or functions.
The board can be used to replace dumb PLC controllers or work as a safety,
security, or access control device. The TPB3 is also ideal for factory, lab, shop,
building, hotel, and home automation projects.
Offering 7 tiles for a total of 14 "M" and 14 "C" sockets, the TPP3(G2) can be used
to construct devices with up to four full serial ports, up to 25 relays, or up to 47
opto-inputs, PWM, or open-collector outputs.
Further, the generous number of available Tibbit sockets means you can increase
your system's versatility by offering multiple power supply options, such as +5V,
+12V, PoE, etc. You can also install multiple power supply Tibbits to increase total
available power or provide power redundancy.
This product can be used as a bare board, or assembled into a size 3 Tibbo Project
Box.
Hardware features
Fast 32-bit CPU, 5-80 times performance improvement over the original TPP3
board.
"cross" cables).
> Baudrates of up to460,800bps;
> 7/8 bits/character modes (7-bit mode cannot be used in combination with parity = None);
- Eight "M" sockets with interrupt capability;

Optional Wi-Fi interface (requires GA1000 add-on module).
Onboard buzzer.
2048KB of flash memory:
- 1048KB secure flash for TiOS and application code;
- 1048KB flash disk with fault-tolerant file system.
Eight LEDs:
purpose).
296

network (including "cold upgrade" firmware uploads through the network).
Platform objects:
- Io handles I/O lines, ports, and eight interrupts;
297
The TPP3(G2) board features 14 x "M" and (14+1) x "C" sockets.

There are 47 control lines connecting "M" sockets to the CPU. The number of control
lines is smaller than the number of "M" sockets multiplied by four. This is because
some sockets have a reduced number of control lines, or have no lines connected at
all:
Socket (S23) only has control lines A and B. Control lines C and D are not
implemented.
Socket (S25) only has the control line A. Control lines B, C, and D are not
implemented.
Socket (S27) has no control lines connected to it.
Remaining "M" sockets have all four control lines implemented.
Additionally:
"M" sockets (S1), (S3), (S5), (S7), (S9), (S11), (S13), and (S15) have the
interrupt capability.
"M" socket (S27) has the PoE capability, provided that four TPP2(G2) jumpers are
set to 2-3 position (see below).
The jumpers
298
way".
Size 2 Tibbo
6.3.1.3Project PCB (TPP2)
Introduction
Size 2 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP2) runs Tibbo OS and is programmable in Tibbo BASIC
and Tibbo C.
TPP2 is perfect for systems with a medium number of I/O lines. The board can
optionally control a TFT display and a keypad, so it is suitable for applications
requiring a human-machine interface (HMI).
This product can be used as a bare board or assembled into a size 2 Tibbo Project
Box. For HMI applications, the board can also be assembled into the TPB2L box,
which features a 320x240 TFT LCD and a 4-button sensor keypad.
Featuring 3 tiles for a total of 6 "M" and 6 "C" sockets, the TPP2 can implement
configurations with up to four simple serial ports, up to 12 relays, or up to 24 optoinputs, PWM, or open-collector outputs.
The TPP2 is perfect for data collection and AutoID projects, as well as factory,
shop, data center, hotel, and home automation applications. The board contains
enough "C" sockets to simultaneously accommodate temperature, humidity,
pressure, ambient light, and shock sensors. With the use of appropriate Tibbits the
board can even control legacy IR devices by emulating traditional IR remote
controls.
Hardware features
299

"cross" cables).
> 7/8 bits/character modes;
- Six "M" sockets withinterrupt capability;

Connectors for optional TFT LCD and 4-button sensor keypad on the TPB2L.
Eight LEDs:
purpose).
Onboard buzzer.
network.
Platform objects:
- Lcd controls the TFT LCD display (optional, connected externally);
300

- Io handles I/O lines, ports, and six interrupts;
301
The TPP2 board features 6 x "M" and (6+1) x "C" sockets.

There are 24 control lines connecting "M" sockets to the CPU -- four per each
socket.
Additionally:
"M" sockets (S1), (S3), (S5), (S7), (S9), and (S10) have the interrupt capability.
"M" socket (S11) has the PoE capability, provided that four TPP2 jumpers are set
to 1-2 position (see below).
The jumpers
302
way".
Size 3 Tibbo
6.3.1.4Project PCB (TPP3)
Introduction
Size 3 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP3) runs Tibbo OS and is programmable in Tibbo BASIC
and Tibbo C.
TPP3 is ideal for applications that require no human-machine interface (HMI) while
calling for a significant number of I/O lines and/or functions.
The board can be used to replace dumb PLC controllers or work as a safety,
security, or access control device. The TPB3 is also ideal for factory, lab, shop,
building, hotel, and home automation projects.
Offering 7 tiles for a total of 14 "M" and 14 "C" sockets, the TPP3 can be used to
construct devices with up to four full serial ports, up to 25 relays, or up to 47 optoinputs, PWM, or open-collector outputs.
Box.
Hardware features
303

"cross" cables).

Optional Wi-Fi interface (requires GA1000 add-on module).
Eight LEDs:
purpose).
Onboard buzzer.
network.
Platform objects:
304

- Io handles I/O lines, ports, and eight interrupts;
The TPP3 board features 14 x "M" and (14+1) x "C" sockets.

all:
Socket (S23) only has control lines A and B. Control lines C and D are not
implemented.
Socket (S25) only has the control line A. Control lines B, C, and D are not
implemented.
305

Additionally:
The jumpers
way".
Size 3 Linux
Tibbo Project PCB (LTPP3)
6.3.1.5
Introduction
Size 3 Linux Tibbo Project PCB (LTPP3) comes preloaded with our own, highly
polished distribution of Linux that is derived from the Red Hat line and is updated
with the latest and greatest kernel and drivers.
LTPP3 is ideal for applications that require no human-machine interface (HMI) while
306
calling for a significant number of I/O lines and/or functions.

Offering 7 tiles for a total of 14 "M" and 14 "C" sockets, the LTPP3 can be used to
construct devices with up to four full serial ports, up to 26 relays, or up to 51 optoinputs, PWM, or open-collector outputs.
Box.
Hardware features
Based on 1GHz Cortex-A8 Sitara CPU from Texas Instruments.
"cross" cables).
> Encoding and decoding of Wiegand and clock/data streams*.
- Two "M" sockets with CAN capability;

Optional Wi-Fi interface (requires the LW1000 add-on module*).
Onboard buzzer.
Optional 96KHz stereo audio line out, mic in (requires Tibbit #48)*.
512MB DDR3 SDRAM.
512MB NAND flash.
Optional micro SD card slot (requires Tibbit #49)*.
2048-byte EEPROM for data storage.
Eight onboard LEDs:
purpose).
Automatic on-demand CPU speed throttling.
Power: 500mA @ 5V (full speed, 100BaseT mode).
307

Internal software is upgradeable from a TFTP server.
*Future functionality/availability
Four ways to use the LTPP3 board

(1) Use LTPP3 with Embedded AggreGate
The board can be purchased with an Embedded AggreGate license. Serving as the
boards execution environment, AggreGate lends LTPP3 its immense power of data
collection, processing, and visualization. Further, AggreGate provides a uniform,
consists access to external data, devices, and systems using more than 100
supported communications protocols. Via a specially designed middleware C library,
Embedded AggreGate is also able to access the boards hardware resources, such as
GPIO lines, serial ports, as well as Tibbit blocks installed in boards sockets.
(2) Run Node.js applications*
LTPP3 comes with Node.js preinstalled. We are currently developing node.js modules
for accessing the board's hardware resources and installed Tibbit blocks. You can
also utilize many existing node.js modules, such as serialport and socket.io.
(3) Run Tibbo BASIC/C applications*
Tibbo is currently porting its popular Tibbo OS (TiOS) to Linux. When this work is
completed, you will be able to run TiOS as a Linux application and execute existing
Tibbo BASIC and Tibbo C code with little or no modifications. Needless to say, the
new LTPP3 board crunches Tibbo BASIC and C apps at unparalleled speeds.
(4) Or use LTPP3 as generic Linux platform...
... that comes in an attractive housing and may be extended with Tibbit blocks.
* Future functionality/availability
308
The LTPP3 board features 14 x "M" and (14+1) x "C" sockets.

all:
Socket (S25) only has control lines A thru C. Control line D is not implemented.
Additionally:
"M" socket (S17) has limited UART capability (only TX and RX lines are provided).
This UART is intended to be used as a debug serial port (debug console port), and
this is why (S17) is marked with the word "DEBUG".
Tile 3 has the audio capability.
"M" sockets (S17) and (S19) have the CAN capability.
Tile 6 has the MMC (SD) capability.
The jumpers
309

way".
Common
Information
6.3.1.6
Power arrangement
Ethernet port
MD and RST Buttons
LEDs
Buzzer
LCD Display Connector (TPP2 only)
Optional Wi-Fi
Power Arrangement
The TPP2 can be powered directly through two terminal blocks located next to the
RJ45 jack. The board expects regulated +5V power. We recommend the power
supply with at least 1-1.5A output current capability. 300mA of this power budget
will be used for the TPP2 alone. The GA1000 Wi-Fi add-on, if present, will consume
an additional 300mA of current. Installed Tibbits will also add to the overall power
consumption.
Alternatively, the TPP2 can be powered using power supply Tibbits (such as #9,
#10, #23, etc.), in which case there will be no need to connect +5V power to the
board.
Some Tibbits (such as #13 or #14) require additional +15V and -15V power to
function. These voltages are not generated by the TPP2 and can't be applied
externally. The only way to produce them is to install a special power Tibbit #12.
The Tibbit Power Lines topic contains additional information on the subject.
Ethernet Port
The Ethernet port of the TPP2 is of 10/100BaseT type.

The connector is of RJ45 type, pin assignment is as follows:
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
TX+
TXRX+
PoE+
PoE+

#6
#7
#8
310
RXPoEPoE-
MD and RST Buttons

The function of the MD button is described in Appendix 2: Setup (MD) Button (line).
Pressing the reset button causes a hardware reset.
Both buttons face right on Tibbo Project PCBs. For assembly inside a Tibbo Project
Box (TPB), a TPP must be outfitted with a so-called MD/RST button PCB. This is a
small PCB with two buttons facing upward. When plugged into the TPP board, these
buttons work in parallel with the buttons of the TPP board.
The MD/RTS PCB is necessary only when you assemble the TPP board into the Tibbo
Project Box. Hence, the MD/RST PCB is supplied as a part of the TPB kit, not the
Tibbo Project PCB.
LEDs
Each TPP board carries 8 LEDs.
Two status LEDs
These are our standard green and red status LEDs. See Appendix 1: Status LEDs. on
how this LED works.
One Ethernet status LED
The TPP2 has a single Ethernet status LEDs -- the yellow "link" LED. See Appendix
1: Status LEDs. on how this LED works.
Five signal strength LEDs
Five blue LEDs form an LED bar. They are intended primarily for the indication of the
RF signal strength (i.e. of the Wi-Fi signal). These LEDs are controlled through three
GPIO lines 46, 47, and 48.
GPIO46 is the reset line of the LED bar. Clearing this line sets all five outputs LOW
and this turns all LEDs ON. GPIO47 is a clock line- a positive (LOW-to-HIGH)
transition on this line "shifts in" the data on the data line. The LED control circuit is
shown below.
311
If you want to switch an LED ON then set the corresponding data line LOW. In the
following example we set the LEDs like this:
LED #5
LED #4
LED #3
LED #2
LED #1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Assuming all the LEDs were off previously (shown in gray), these are our steps.
Each step represents one cycle of the clock line (HIGH-LOW-HIGH):
Clock
Data
LED #5
LED #4
LED #3
LED #2
LED #1
LOW
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
LOW
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
HIGH
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
LOW
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
HIGH
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
312
The reset line is not really necessary. You can be certain what pattern is displayed
by the LEDs for as long as you generate five clock cycles every time you send new
data into this circuit.
Buzzer
The buzzer of the TPP2 is connected to the GPIO45/CO line.
is 21600.
LCD Display Connector (TPP2 only)

The TPP2 can control an LCD display of the TPB2L kit. The TPB2L product has a
320x240 TFT LCD display with onboard controller. The following GPIO lines are used
to control the LCD:
GPIO line/
port
Function
Port 0
8-bit bi-directional data bus
GPIO40
CS
GPIO41
RD
GPIO42
WR
GPIO43
DC
GPIO55
RST
GPIO54
Backlight (ON when LOW)
LCD control is the responsibility of the lcd. object. See "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual" for details.

The TPP2 can control a 4-key sensor keypad of the TPB2L kit. The following GPIO
lines are used to work with the keypad:
GPIO line/
port
Function
GPIO44
Reset (active LOW)
GPIO36
Return line 1 (left button)
GPIO37
Return line 2
GPIO38
Return line 3
GPIO39
Return line 4 (right button)
Keypad handling is the responsibility of the kp. object. See "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual" for details.
313

The TPP2 can optionally accommodate the GA1000 Wi-Fi add-on module.
GPIO line
49
Function
CS
(1 )
GA1000 pin
3
50
DO
51
RST
(2 )
52
DI
53
CLK
10
Notes:
1. "Data out" line of the TPP2, connects to the "data in" on the GA1000.
2. "Data in" line of the TPP2, connects to the "data out" on the GA1000.
Wi-Fi data communications is the responsibility of the sock. object (see "TIDE and
Tibbo BASIC Manual"). Before such data communications can take place, the Wi-Fi
interface must be properly configured. This is jointly achieved by the wln. object
and WLN library (again, see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
314
Tibbo Project Box (TPB) Kits
Most projects require an enclosure. Designing one is a tough job. Making it beautiful
is even tougher, and may also be prohibitively expensive. Not to worry -- your Tibbo
Project System can optionally be ordered with a Tibbo Project Box (TPB) kit.
There is a Box for every Tibbo Project PCB size. You can also choose a TPB with an
LCD display and sensor keys.
Tibbo Project Boxes can be ordered unassembled (as part kits) or fully assembled.
We also offer an optional retail packaging, as well as vibration protection and DIN
rail mounting kits.
315
TPB Structure
This exploded view illustrates the internal construction of a Tibbo Project System
(TPS) assembled in the Tibbo Project Box (TPB). Specifically, this is the size 2
system (TPS2) in the size two Box (TPB2).
A Tibbo Project Box comprises the bottom cover, left and right side walls, the top
cover, and the LED light guide. Unless this is the TB2L system with LCD and keys,
the top cover has two recesses for paper inserts and protective cover overlays.
Paper inserts are for marking wires and connectors in the same way you mark direct
dial buttons on your office phone.
The Box assembly is extremely easy and fast. Snap the LED light guide into the top
cover, then attach the left and right walls onto the top cover as well. All three
parts snap into place with a "click". To avoid confusion, the inner surface of the
bottom cover has arrows indicating left, right, top, and bottom. The left wall has
the "L" mark on it, while the right wall is marked "R". Notice that the left wall has a
cutout for the terminal blocks and the RJ45 jack of the Tibbo Project PCB (TPP).
There are 2 sets of screws supplied with each Box. Smaller screws secure the TPP,
large screws are for the Box itself. Pay attention to the TPP placement. In the
normal bottom cover orientation (judging by arrows printed on the inner surface of
the cover), the RJ45 jack should face away from you. You will notice that the
bottom cover has a small protrusion on which the RJ45 rests if the TPP is correctly
installed.
316
Each Tibbo Project Box kit additionally includes the MD/RST button PCB. This PCB
plugs into the TPP. The PCB is necessary if the TPP is to be assembled into the
Tibbo Project Box.
The vibration protection plate shown above is optional and must be purchased
(specified) separately as a part of the vibration protection kit (VPK).
Available Tibbo Project Box Kits

Size 2 Tibbo Project Box (TPB2) -- fits TPP2
Size 2 Tibbo Project Box with LCD/Keys (TPB2L) -- fits TPP2
Size 3 Tibbo Project Box (TPB3) -- fits TPP3
Size 2 Tibbo
6.4.2.1Project Box (TPB2)
This Tibbo Project Box accommodates size 2 Tibbo Project PCB (TPP2).
317
List of parts included with the TPB2 kit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Part
PM01P1054:
PM01P1055:
PM01P1049:
PM01P1050:
PM06P1004:
PM03P1017:
PM921009:
PM921010:
PM03P1020:
PCB-P2164:
PM12P1001-03:
SM3R5+32SPBC:
SM2R6+05SPNC:
Description
Qty
Top cover (TPB2)
1
Bottom cover (TPB2, TPB2L)
1
Right side wall (all TPB models)
1
Left side wall (all TPB models)
1
LED light guide (all TPB models)
1
Back label (TPB2, TPB2L)
1
Paper insert, bottom row (TPB2)
1
Paper insert, top row (TPB2)
1
Paper Insert Cover (TPB2)
2
MD/RST button PCB (all TPB models)
1
Blank Tibbit shell, C1 form factor, orange 7
Main Screw (all TPB models)
4
PCB screw (all TPB models)
4
318
The TPB2 can be purchased with an optional vibration protection kit (VPK), as well
as the DIN rail mounting kit.
Size 2 Vibration Protection Kit (VPK)
The vibration protection kit (VPK) consists of the vibration protection plate, four
special screws, and two small rubber parts that cushion the GA1000 Wi-Fi add-on,
when installed (they come attached to the plate and are not visible on the above
picture).
The plate is installed as shown on the exploded view of the TPS:
Four M2.5 screws securing the TPP are removed and four special screws (shown
above) are instead used to attach the TPP onto the bottom cover;
The vibration protection plate goes over Tibbits (installed on the TPP) and rests
on these special screws;
Four M2.5 screws that originally held the TPP in place are used to secure the
vibration protection plate onto the special screws.
319
contained herein.
Size 2 Project
6.4.2.2 Box With LCD/Keys (TPB2L)

TPB2L Parts and Accessories
List of parts included with the TPB2L kit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Part
Description
PM01P1053:
PM03P1018:
PM01P1055:
PM01P1049:
PM01P1050:
PM06P1004:
PM03P1017:
LCD-P0005:
WAS-P0036:
Top cover (TPB2L)

Faceplate (TPB2L)
Bottom cover (TPB2, TPB2L)
Back label (TPB2, TPB2L)
3.5" 320x240 TFT LCD panel with controller
LCD-to-TPP2 cable
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
320
321
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
PA-PCB-P2165-00:
PCB-P2164:
PM12P1001-03:
SM3R5+32SPBC:
SM2R6+05SPNC:
Keypad PCB for TPB2L, with cable

Blank Tibbit shell, C1 form factor, orange
1
1
7
4
4
The TPB2L can be purchased with an optional vibration protection kit (VPK), as well
as the DIN rail mounting kit.

The TPB2L uses the same size 2 vibration protection kit (VPK) as the TPB2.
contained herein.
Size 3 Tibbo
6.4.2.3Project Box (TPB3)
322
323
List of parts included with the TPB3 kit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Part
Description
PM01P1047:
PM01P1048:
PM01P1049:
PM01P1050:
PM06P1004:
PM03P1016:
PM921007:
PM921008:
PM03P1019:
PCB-P2164:
PM12P1001-03:
SM3R5+32SPBC:
SM2R6+05SPNC:
Top cover (TPB3)

Bottom Cover (TPB3)
Back label (TPB3)
Paper insert, bottom row (TPB3)
Paper insert, top row (TPB3)
Paper Insert Cover (TPB3)
Blank Tibbit shell, C1 form factor, orange
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
15
4
4
324
The TPB3 can be purchased with an optional vibration protection kit (VPK), as well
as DIN rail mounting kits (two kits are required for DIN rail installation).
The vibration protection kit (VPK) consists of the vibration protection plate, four
special screws, and two small rubber parts that cushion the GA1000 Wi-Fi add-on,
when installed (they come attached to the plate and are not visible on the above
picture).
The plate is installed as shown on the exploded view of the TPS:
Four M2.5 screws securing the TPP are removed and four special screws (shown
above) are instead used to attach the TPP onto the bottom cover;
The vibration protection plate goes over Tibbits (installed on the TPP) and rests
on these special screws;
Four M2.5 screws that originally held the TPP in place are used to secure the
vibration protection plate onto the special screws.
325
contained herein.
326
Retail Packaging
In the automation world, presentation may not be everything but it is certainly still
very important. Any product benefits from an attractive retail box, and our Tibbo
Project Box (TPB) kits and Tibbo Project Systems (TPS) are no exception.
TPB/TPS retail packaging kits were designed with the ease of assembly and
economical cost in mind. You have the choice of ordering unassembled (flattened)
cartons and stacked plastic inserts to save space and transportation costs, or you
can order your TPB/TPS fully assembled, in which case it will arrive in the retail
package fully assembled as well.
Important note: if you order fully assembled TPB/TPS, the retail packaging for each
Box (System) will be automatically included as well. This is because assembled
Boxes (Systems) require proper packaging for transportation. Ordering unassembled
goods allows you to choose whether to include the retail packaging kits or not.
Another note: the Tibbit remover tool (shown above) is not included with the retail
packaging kit. It is provided for free for every Tibbo Project System ordered. The
remover can also be purchased separately (part #PM05P1014-01).
327
TPB2/TPS2 Retail Packaging Kit
List of parts included with the TPS2/TPB2 retail packaging kit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Part
PM911018
PM07P1012
PM07P1010
PM911019
PM921012
Description
Qty
Retail box (all TPS/TPB models)
1
Package tray for TPS2/TPB2, TPS2L/TPB2LTPB2L 1
Transparent tray cover (all TPS/TPB models)
1
Accessories box (all TPS/TPB models)
1
Retail package label (TPS2/TPB2)
1
TPB2L/TPS2L Retail Packaging Kit
List of parts included with the TPS2L/TPB2L retail packaging kit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Part
PM911018
PM07P1012
PM07P1010
PM911019
PM921011
Description
Qty
1
Package tray for TPS2/TPB2, TPS2L/TPB2LTPB2L 1
1
1
Retail package label (TPS2L/TPB2L)
1
328
329
TPB3/TPS3 Retail Packaging Kit
List of parts included with the TPS3/TPB3 retail packaging kit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Part
PM911018
PM07P1011
PM07P1010
PM911019
PM921014
Description
Package tray (TPS3/TPB3)
Retail package label (TPS3/TPB3)
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
330
Assembled Retail Package
This is how the assembled retail package looks. The accessories box (2) goes into
the retail package box (1). The accessories box is meant for transporting Wi-Fi
antennas, wires, cables, etc.
Ordering Info
The following external controllers and controller families are currently being offered
by Tibbo:
DS110x Family
DS1206
DS1202
DS10xx Family
331
DS110x
Introduction
The DS110x is a family of compact BASIC-programmable controllers designed for
serial-over-IP and serial control applications.
The DS110x family currently includes:
The DS1100 serial controller with a single-channel RS232 port, this model targets
cost-sensitive applications;
The DS1101 serial controller with the 3.5-channel RS232 port;
The DS1102 serial controller with the universal RS232 (3-channel)/422/485 port.
The family is fully supported by TIDE software.
DS110x devices ship preloaded with a fully functional serial-over-IP application.
Written in Tibbo BASIC, the application is compatible with Tibbo Device Server
Toolkit software, comes with full source codes, and can be modified by the user.
Differentiating features
DS1100
DS1101
DS1102
Serial port
RS232 port on
DB9M connector
RS232 port on
DB9M connector
RS232/422/485 port
on DB9M conn.
No of serial port
channels
1 channel
3.5 channels
3 channels (RS232),
1 ch.(RS422/485)
Serial port lines
TX, RX, RTS,

CTS, DTR, DSR
TX, RX, RTS, CTS,

DTR, DSR, DCD
TX, RX, RTS, CTS,

DTR, DSR (RS232)
Device color
TX, RX, RTS, CTS

(RS422)
TX, RX half-duplex
(RS485)
Maximum
baudrate
Up to
115200bps
Up to 921600bps
Flow and
direction control
Optional RTS/CTS flow control
Opt. RTS/CTS flow

control (232/422)
Direction control
(RS485)
Parity modes
None/even/odd/mark/space parity
Bits/character
7/8 bits/character
Power input/
output on DB9
"12V" power
input on pin 9 of
DB9
"12V" power input

and output on pin
9 of DB9
(softwarecontrollable)
not provided
332
Flash memory
512KB for
firmware and
application
storage. No
flash disk
functionality.
1024KB for firmware, application and data

(flash disk)
EEPROM
200 bytes
2048 bytes
LEDs
Red and green

status LEDs
Red and green status LEDs
Yellow Ethernet
link LED
Five blue LEDs (can be used for Wi-Fi

signal strength indication)
Wi-Fi
no
optional 802.11b/g interface (GA1000)*
Display
no
optional 96x32 monochrome OLED
PoE
optional
optional*
Buzzer
no
yes
Processor
T2000
T1000
Operating
frequency and
PLL
80Mhz, no PLL
88MHz, software-controlled PLL
Superior
upgrade to...
DS203
DS1206
Firmware
upgrades
Through the
serial port or
network
(including cold
upgrades
through the
network).
Through the serial port or network (no

cold upgrades through the network).
Yellow Ethernet link LED
DS1206, DS100B
* Wi-Fi and PoE options are mutually exclusive and cannot be installed together
Common hardware features of the DS110x family

10/100BaseT auto-MDIX Ethernet port.
Power: 12VDC nominal (min. 9V, max. 18V).
Dimensions: 90x48x25mm.
Operating temperature range: -5 ~ 70 C.
CE- and FCC-certified.
(8), encryption/hash calculation functions (AES128*, RC4, MD5, SHA-1), and
more.
Platform objects:
333

- Wln handles the Wi-Fi interface (when the GA1000 is installed, DS1101 and
DS1102 only);
- Lcd controls the OLED display (when the display is installed, DS1101 and
DS1102 only).
- Beep generates buzzer patterns (DS1101 and DS1102 only);
* The DS1100 does not support AES functions (aes128enc and aes128dec).
DS110x Connectors and Controls
Power arrangement
Ethernet port
Serial port
Buzzer (DS1101 and DS1102 only)
334
Optional Wi-Fi (DS1101 and DS1102 only)

Optional OLED display (DS1101 and DS1102 only)
LED bar (DS1101 and DS1102 only)
DIN rail and wall mounting plates
Status LEDs (main status LEDs and Ethernet link status LED)
Setup button
Power 7.1.1.1
Arrangement
All DS110x devices are "normally" powered through the power jack.
The power jack accepts "small" power connectors with 3.5mm diameter. Use APRP0011, APR-P0012, or APR-P0013 power adaptor supplied by Tibbo or similar adaptor
with 12VDC nominal output voltage. Adaptor current rating should be at least
500mA. On the power jack, the ground is "on the outside", as shown on the figure
below.
There are also "alternative" ways of powering the devices. Click the links below to
explore:
DS1100
DS1101
DS1102
DS1100
The DS1100 can be powered through its power jack, pin 9 of the DB9 (RS232)
connector, or the optional PoE module (letter "P" in the model numbering scheme).
Pin 9 input has the same input voltage requirements as for the power jack.
Optional PoE module is supposed to be powered by 48V (nominal), which is standard
for PoE equipment. Your PoE-enabled hub will take care of this. The PoE module
outputs 12VDC.
Internally, all three power sources are connected to the DS1100's power regulator
through three diodes, as shown on the diagram below.
335
DS1101
The DS1101 can be powered through its power jack, pin 9 of the DB9 (RS232)
connector, or the optional PoE module (letter "P" in the model numbering scheme).
Pin 9 input has the same input voltage requirements as for the power jack.
Optional PoE module is supposed to be powered by 48V (nominal), which is standard
for PoE equipment. Your PoE-enabled hub will take care of this. The PoE module
outputs 12VDC.
Internally, all three power sources are connected to the DS1101's power regulator
through three diodes, as shown on the diagram below.
Pin 9 of the DB9M connector can also be used to provide "12VDC" power to an
attached serial device. Many small serial devices, such as barcode scanners, accept
power on pin 9 of their DB9 connectors.
We intentionally printed "12VDC" in quotation marks. This is because there is no
guarantee that the output voltage will be exactly 12V. It will actually be the "input
voltage minus the voltage drop across the diode". In plain words, it will be slightly
below the input voltage. If you connect 12V to the power jack you will get around
11.7V out of pin 9.
To turn the power switch on from within your Tibbo BASIC/C application, enable
(configure as output) the PL_IO_NUM8_PWROUT GPIO line and then set this line to
LOW. Additional programming information can be found in "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual" (see i.o object and the DS1101 platform documentation).
336
Note that the DS110x devices cannot accommodate the PoE and Wi-Fi options at
the same time.
DS1102
The DS1102 can be powered through its power jack or the optional PoE module
(letter "P" in the model numbering scheme).
The PoE module is supposed to be powered by 48V (nominal), which is standard for
PoE equipment. Your PoE-enabled hub will take care of this. The PoE module outputs
12VDC.
Internally, both power sources are connected to the DS1102's power regulator
through two diodes, as shown on the diagram below.
Note that the DS110x devices cannot accommodate the PoE and Wi-Fi options at
the same time.
Ethernet
Port
7.1.1.2
The Ethernet port of the DS110x is of 10/100BaseT type.

#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
TX+
TXRX+
PoE+
PoE+
RXPoEPoE-
337
Serial Port
7.1.1.3
Serial port capabilities are different for each device in the DS110x family:
DS1100
DS1101
DS1102
DS1100
The DS1100 carries a single-channel RS232 DB9M port.
#1
<No connection>
#2
RX (input)
#3
TX (output)
#4
DTR (output)
#5
Ground
#6
DSR (input)
#7
RTS (output)
#8
CTS (input)
#9
Power input ("12VDC")
DS1101
The DS1101 features a multi-channel RS232 port. Physically, the port is
implemented as a single DB9M connector with three output lines, four input lines,
power input/output, and the ground.
Internally, the DS1101 has four independent serial ports. These are controlled
through the ser. object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Each of the four ports has its own TX and RX lines. These lines are implemented in
hardware and can't be "remapped". The following table shows how the RX and TX
lines are connected to the DB9M:
#1
RX4 (input, commonly DCD)
#2
RX (input)
#3
TX (output)
#4
TX3 (output, commonly DTR)
#5
Ground
#6
RX3 (input, commonly DSR)
#7
TX2 (output, commonly RTS)
#8
RX2 (input, commonly CTS)
#9
Power input/output ("12VDC")
338
Each logical serial port of the ser. object also support RTS/CTS flow control, which
is implemented in firmware (TiOS). Ser.rtsmap and ser.ctsmap properties allow you
to assign any GPIO line of the DS1101 to serve as the RTS or CTS line of any logical
serial port. So, TX2 and RX2 lines (pins 7 and 8) can be assigned to work as RTS
and CTS lines, as is traditionally the case for RS232 ports. At the same time, these
lines can be set to function as an independent serial channel.
The same goes for the DTR and DSR lines, except they don't even "exist" from the
ser. object's perspective. These lines are implemented on the application level. For
example, our own "serial-over-IP" application supports these lines. Again, instead of
using TX3 and RX3 (pins 4 and 6) as the lines of an independent serial channel, it is
possible to use them as DTR and DSR lines, as is common.
To simplify the discussion, let's look at the RS232 port from the serial-over-IP
application's point of view. This application defines 15 mapping options:
Mappi
ng
optio
n
Available signals

#
2
#3
#8
#7
#6
#4
#1
Miss
ing
line
Optio
n0
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
---
---
Optio
n1
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR + RX/tx
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
RX4
tx4
Optio
n2
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
RX4
tx4
Optio
n3
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
CT
S3
rts3
Optio
n4
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
DS
R3
dtr3
339

Optio
n5
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
RX4
tx4
Optio
n6
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
CT
S2
rts2
Optio
n7
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
DS
R2
dtr2
Optio
n8
RX/TX + RX/TX +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
RX4
tx4
Optio
n9
RX/TX/CTS/rts +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
CT
S
rts
Optio
n 10
RX/TX/DSR/dtr +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
DS
R
dtr
Optio
n 11
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
CT
S4
RT
S4
RX4
tx4
Optio
n 12
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R4
DT
R4
RX4
tx4
Optio
n 13
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S4
RT
S4
DS
R
DT
R
RX4
tx4
Optio
n 14
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
DS
R4
DT
R4
DS
R
DT
R
RX4
tx4
only three outputs available. This is why this line is shown in gray (tx).
DS1102
The DS1102 features a multi-mode, multi-channel RS232/422/485 port. Physically,
the port is implemented as a single DB9M connector.
The definition of RS422 and 485 modes
To avoid any misunderstanding of what the RS422 and RS485 modes are, let's clarify
that the term "RS422 mode" refers to full-duplex differential signaling interface with
at least RX and TX signals, and possibly with CTS and RTS signals. Each signal is
carried by a pair of "+" and "-" lines. The term "RS485 mode" refers to half-duplex
differential signaling interface with RX and TX lines, where each signal is also carried
by a pair of "+" and "-" lines. The RTS line of the serial port is used (within the
DS1102) to control the direction, so TX and RX lines can be combined (externally)
to form a two-wire bus that carries data in both directions. On a physical signal
level (voltages, etc.), there is no difference between the RS422 and RS485 -- they
are implemented in the same way.
RS422 and RS485 modes typically require termination circuits. No such circuits are
provided within the DS1102. A simple 120Ohm resistor (added externally) is
sufficient for the proper termination of one "+"/"-" pair.
Pin assignment
In the RS232 mode, the serial port of the DS1102 has 3 output and 3 input lines. In
the RS422 mode, you get 2 output and 2 input line pairs. The RS485 mode offer one
340
output line pair and one input line pair and these are not independent -- they
operate in the half-duplex mode).
Internally, the DS1102 has three independent serial ports. These are controlled
through the ser. object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Each of those ports has its own TX and RX lines. These lines are implemented in
hardware and can't be "remapped". The following table shows how these RX and TX
lines are connected to the DB9M:
RS232
RS422
RS485
#1
<No connection>
TX2- (output,
commonly RTS-)
<No connection>
#2
RX (input)
RX- (input)
RX- (input)
#3
TX (output)
TX+ (output)
TX+ (output)
#4
TX3 (output,
commonly DTR)
TX- (output)
TX- (output)
#5
Ground
Ground
Ground
#6

DSR)
RX+ (input)
RX+ (input)
#7
TX2 (output,
commonly RTS)
TX2+ (output,
commonly RTS+)
<No connection>
#8

CTS)
RX2+ (input,
commonly CTS+)
<No connection>
#9
<No connection>
RX2- (input,
commonly CTS-)
<No connection>
Each logical serial port of the ser. object also support RTS/CTS flow control, which
is implemented in firmware (TiOS). Ser.rtsmap and ser.ctsmap properties allow you
to assign any GPIO line of the DS1102 to serve as the RTS or CTS line of any logical
serial port. So, TX2 and RX2 lines (pins 7 and 8) can be assigned to work as RTS
and CTS lines, as is traditionally the case for RS232 ports. At the same time, these
lines can be turned to function as an independent serial channel.
The same goes for the DTR and DSR lines, except they don't even "exist" from the
ser. object's perspective. These lines are implemented on the application level. For
example, our own "serial-over-IP" application supports these lines. Again, instead of
using TX3 and RX3 (pins 4 and 6) as the lines of an independent serial channel, it is
possible to use them as DTR and DSR lines, as is common.
To simplify the discussion, let's look at the serial port from the serial-over-IP
application's point of view. This application defines 15 mapping options. Even in the
RS232 mode, some options are redundant on the DS1102 (but not on the DS1101).
Many more options are redundant in the RS422 mode. See the links below to explore
further:
341

Mapping options for the RS232 mode
Mapping options for the RS422 mode
And where are mapping options for the RS485 mode? There are none -- but you
knew this already.
Mapping Options for the RS232 Mode

Unlike on the DS1101 device, the DS1102 does not have an input on line 1. Hence,
some of the 15 mapping options become indistinguishable from other options. Only
"unique" options are shown in the table below.
Mappi
ng
option
Available signals
Option
0
Missin
g
#
2
#3
#8
#7
#6
#4
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/DSR/
DTR
RX
TX
CTS
RTS
DSR
DTR
---
Option
2
RX/TX/CTS/RTS + RX/
TX
RX
TX
CTS
RTS
RX3
TX3
rx4,
tx4
Option
5
RX/TX/DSR/DTR + RX/
TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX2
DSR
DTR
rx4,
tx4
Option
8
RX/TX + RX/TX + RX/

TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX2
RX3
TX3
rx4,
tx4
Option
11
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CTS
RTS
CTS
4
RTS
4
rx4,
tx4
Option
12
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CTS
RTS
DSR
4
DTR
4
rx4,
tx4
Option
13
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CTS
4
RTS
4
DSR
DTR
rx4,
tx4
Option
14
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
DSR/DTR
RX
TX
DSR
4
DTR
4
DSR
DTR
rx4,
tx4
lines

There are even fewer options in the RS422 mode:
Mappin
g
option
Available signals
Pin pairs on the DB9M

connector
#6
,2
#3,
4
#8,
9
#7,
1
Missing
lines
Option
0
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/DSR/
DTR
RX
TX
CTS
RTS
dsr, dtr
Option
5
RX/TX/DSR/DTR + RX/TX
+ RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX2
dsr, dtr, rx4,

tx4
Option
14
RX/TX/DSR/DTR + RX/
tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
DSR
4
DTR
4
dsr, dtr, rx4,

tx4
342

There are no mapping options in the RS485 mode. You have one TX line pair, and
one RX line pair. That's all.
Flash and
EEPROM Memory
7.1.1.4
DS1100
The DS1100 has 512KBytes of internal flash memory and 208 bytes of EEPROM
memory.
A portion of the internal flash memory is used to store the TiOS firmware. When you
binary into.
The rest of this flash memory is available to your Tibbo BASIC/C application. The
internal flash memory cannot be used as a flash disk.
object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
DS1101 and DS1102
The DS1101 and DS1102 devices have 1024KBytes of flash memory and 2KBytes of
EEPROM memory.
binary into.
Manual").
Buzzer7.1.1.5
(DS1101 and DS1102)
The buzzer is only available on the DS1101 and DS1102 devices. It is connected to
the PL_IO_NUM_37_CO GPIO line.
"TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual"). Buzzer center frequency is 2730Hz, so the
recommended value for the beep.divider property is 16203.
Optional
Wi-Fi (DS1101 and DS1102)
7.1.1.6
The DS1101 and DS1102 devices can optionally accommodate the GA1000 Wi-Fi
add-on module (letter "G" in the model numbering scheme).
GPIO line
Function
GA1000 pin
PL_IO_NUM_15
CS
343

PL_IO_NUM_13
DO(1 )
PL_IO_NUM_11
RST
PL_IO_NUM_12
DI
PL_IO_NUM_14
CLK
10
(2 )
Notes:
1. "Data out" line of the DS1101/2, connects to the "data in" on the GA1000.
2. "Data in" line of the DS1101/2, connects to the "data out" on the GA1000.
Wi-Fi data communications is the responsibility of the sock. object (see "TIDE and
Tibbo BASIC Manual"). Before such data communications can take place, the Wi-Fi
interface must be properly configured. This is jointly achieved by the wln. object
and WLN library (again, see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Note that the DS110x devices cannot accommodate the Wi-Fi and PoE options at
the same time.
Optional
OLED Display (DS1101 and DS1102)
7.1.1.7
The DS1101 and DS1102 devices can optionally be outfitted with a 96x32
monochrome OLED display (letter "D" in the model numbering scheme).
As all displays of this type, the DS1101/2's OLED display has a limited life
span. There will be a decrease in the display brightness after ~10000 hours
of operation. To prolong display life, use the lcd.lock method of the .lcd
object to turn the display off whenever possible. Display image is preserved
when the display is "locked".
The following GPIO lines are used to control the display:
GPIO line
Function
PL_IO_NUM_36_OLED_RST
RST
PL_IO_NUM_35_OLED_DC
DC
PL_IO_NUM_34_OLED_WR
WR
PL_IO_NUM_33_OLED_RD
RD
PL_IO_NUM_32_OLED_CS
CS
PL_IO_PORT_NUM_0
data bus
The display is controlled by the .lcd object see ("TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
Proper I/O line mapping is required for the display to work, and it takes a single line
of code to set this right:
lcd.iomapping="36,35,34,33,32,0"
Additonally, the following lines must be enabled (io.enabled= 1- YES):
344
PL_IO_NUM_36_OLED_RST
PL_IO_NUM_35_OLED_DC
PL_IO_NUM_34_OLED_WR
PL_IO_NUM_33_OLED_RD
PL_IO_NUM_32_OLED_CS
The PL_IO_PORT_NUM_0 port doesn't need to be enabled. It is bidirectional and
the .lcd object will control it internally.
LED Bar
(DS1101 and DS1102)
7.1.1.8
The DS1101 and DS1102 devices feature an LED bar comprising five blue LEDs. The
bar can be used for signal strength indication. To turn an LED on, enable the
corresponding I/O line (io.enabled= 1- YES) and set this line LOW (io.state= 0LOW). Hint: these are properties of the I/O object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual").
DS1101/2 devices that ship with the Wi-Fi option installed will have a Wi-Fi icon
next to the LED bar. Devices without the Wi-Fi interface, as well as devices where
the GA1000 add-on module wasn't istalled by Tibbo will not have this icon.
Remaining three LEDs on the face of DS1101/2 devices are green and red status
LEDs, and a yellow Ethernet link LED. These are standard status LEDs.
GPIO line
LED
PL_IO_NUM_23_SB5
LED5 (top, the strongest signal)
PL_IO_NUM_22_SB4
LED4
PL_IO_NUM_21_SB3
LED3
PL_IO_NUM_20_SB2
LED2
PL_IO_NUM_19_SB1
LED1 (bottom, "the lowest signal"
345
DIN Rail7.1.1.9
and Wall Mounting Plates
Every DS110x device is shipped with two mounting plates -- one for the installation
on a DIN rail, and one for mounting on the wall.
Both plates are secured onto the device using two supplied screws.
346
Wall mounting plate can be used to affix the DS110x to a wall in a semi-permanent
or permanent manner. The diagram below shows important dimensions.

Visit our online store for the up-to-date list of accessories offered with DS110x
devices.
347
Model number
Description
DS1101GD
DS1101 device with the Wi-Fi add-on and OLED display
DS1102P
DS1102 device with the power-over-Ethernet module
DS1100
DS1101
DS1102
Device color
Ethernet
interface
10/100BaseT Ethernet, Auto-MDIX, magnetics not built-in
Serial port
RS232 port on
DB9M connector
RS232 port on
DB9M
connector
RS232/422/485 port
on DB9M conn.
No of serial port
channels
1 channel
3.5 channels
3 channels (RS232),
1 ch.(RS422/485)
Serial port lines
TX, RX, RTS,

CTS, DTR, DSR
TX, RX, RTS,

CTS, DTR, DSR,
DCD
TX, RX, RTS, CTS,

DTR, DSR (RS232)
TX, RX, RTS, CTS
(RS422)
TX, RX half-duplex
(RS485)
Maximum
baudrate
Up to 115200bps
Up to 921600bps
Flow and
direction control
Optional RTS/CTS flow control
Opt. RTS/CTS flow

control (232/422)
Direction control
(RS485)
Parity modes
None/even/odd/mark/space parity
Bits/character
7/8 bits/character
Power input/
output on DB9
"12V" power
input on pin 9 of
DB9
"12V" power
input and
output on pin 9
of DB9
(softwarecontrollable)
Flash memory
512KB for
firmware and
application
storage. No flash
disk
functionality.
1024KB for firmware, application and

data (flash disk)
not provided
348
EEPROM
200 bytes
2048 bytes
LEDs
Red and green

status LEDs
Red and green status LEDs
Yellow Ethernet
link LED
Five blue LEDs (can be used for Wi-Fi

signal strength indication)
Wi-Fi
no
optional 802.11b/g interface (GA1000)*
Display
no
optional 96x32 monochrome OLED
PoE
optional
optional*
Buzzer
no
yes
Processor
T2000
T1000
Operating
frequency and
PLL
80Mhz, no PLL
88MHz, software-controlled PLL
Firmware
upgrades
Through the
serial port or
network
(including cold
upgrade firmware
uploads through
the network).
Through the serial port or network (no

cold upgrades through the network).
Supply voltage
12VDC nominal (min. 9V, max. 18V)
Operating
temperature
range
-5 ~ 70 degrees C
Operating
relative
humidity
10 ~ 90%
Mechanical
dimensions
90x48x25mm
Carton
dimensions
137x99x70mm
Yellow Ethernet link LED
* Wi-Fi and PoE options are mutually exclusive and cannot be installed together
DS1206
349

Introduction
The DS1206 is a miniature BASIC-programmable controller designed primarily for
The DS1206 features a multi-channel serial port. The device has a single DB9M
Another feature of the DS1206 is software-controlled power output on pin 9 of the
RS232 port, so you can power an attached serial device directly through the
DS1206. Alternatively, the DS1206 itself can be powered through this pin.
The DS1206 is fully supported by TIDE software and a dedicated DS1206 platform
that covers all hardware facilities of the device (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
application. Written in Tibbo BASIC, the application is compatible with Tibbo Device
Server Toolkit software, comes with full source codes, and can be modified by the
user.
Hardware features
Superior upgrade to the DS203 and DS1202 devices.
Based on high-performance purpose-built 88-MHz T1000 ASIC.
100BaseT auto-MDIX Ethernet port (automatic detection of "straight" and "cross"
cables).
Up to 3.5 serial channels on a single RS232 connector:
- Optional flow control;
- Optional "12V" power output on pin 9 of the DB9M connector (softwarecontrollable);
- Optional "12V" power input from pin 9 of the DB9M connector (instead of
supplying power through the power jack).
512KB or 1024KB flash memory for firmware, application, and data storage.
Four LEDs:
Supply voltage range: 10-24V (12V nominal).
network.
350
Also available as DS1206N (board without housing).
Platform objects:
DS1206 Connectors and Controls
Click on one of the links provided below to learn more about the DS1206:
351

Power arrangement
Ethernet port
Multi-channel RS232 port
Status LEDs
Setup button
Power 7.2.1.1
Arrangement
Normally, the DS1206 is powered through its power jack.
The power jack of the DS1206 accepts "small" power connectors with 3.5mm
diameter. Use APR-P0011, APR-P0012, or APR-P0013 power adaptor supplied by
Tibbo or similar adaptor with 12V nominal output voltage. Adaptor current rating
Alternatively, the DS1206 can be powered through a pin 9 of the DB9M (RS232)
connector. Two internal diodes combine power jack and pin 9 inputs into a single
line, which goes to the internal regulator of the DS1206.
The pin 9 of the RS232 port can also be used to provide "12V" power to an attached
serial device. Many small serial devices, such as barcode scanners, accept power on
pin 9 of their DB9 connectors.
"12V" actually means "input power on the power jack", which is not necessarily
stabilized. The power line of the jack passes through a software-controlled switch
and is then connected to pin 9 of the RS232 port through a Schottky diode (shown
on the diagram below). Therefore, the voltage on pin 9 is close to the input voltage
on the power jack. Also, the maximum current an attached serial device can source
depends on the maximum output power of the power adaptor (power supply)
plugged into the power jack (minus the power consumed by the DS1206 itself).
352
Tibbo serial-over-IP application supplied with the DS1206 has a dedicated

"PS" ("Power on pin 9") setting to control the power switch. To turn the power
switch on from within your Tibbo BASIC/C application, enable (configure as output)
line PL_IO_NUM8_PWROUT and then set this line to HIGH. Additional programming
information can be found in "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual" (see i.o object and
DS1206 platform documentation).
If you want to use pin 9 of the DB9M connector to power an attached serial device,
then you must power the DS1206 itself through the power jack. We know you
understand this, but we still had to mention it.
Ethernet
Port
7.2.1.2
Ethernet port of the DS1206 is of 10/100BaseT type.

#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
TX+
TXRX+
<No connection>
<No connection>
RX<No connection>
<No connection>
The Ethernet port of the DS1206 incorporates two Ethernet status LEDs.
353
Multi-channel
7.2.1.3 RS232 Port
The DS1206 features a multi-channel RS232 port. Internally, the DS1206 has four
independent serial ports, and each of those ports can potentially have its own RX,
TX, CTS, RTS, DSR, and DTR lines. Physically, the RS232 port of the DS1206 has
three output lines and four input lines. Flexible mapping allows you to choose how
these inputs and outputs will be used.
The serial-over-IP application supplied with the DS1206 defines 15 mapping options.
These are presented in the table below:
Mappi
ng
optio
n
Available signals

#
2
#3
#8
#7
#6
#4
#1
Miss
ing
line
Optio
n0
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
---
---
Optio
n1
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR + RX/tx
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n2
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n3
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
CT
S3
rts3
Optio
n4
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
DS
R3
dtr3
Optio
n5
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n6
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
CT
S2
rts2
Optio
n7
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
DS
R2
dtr2
Optio
n8
RX/TX + RX/TX +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n9
RX/TX/CTS/rts +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
CT
S
rts
Optio
n 10
RX/TX/DSR/dtr +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
DS
R
dtr
Optio
n 11
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
CT
S4
RT
S4
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 12
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R4
DT
R4
RX
4
tx4
354
Optio
n 13
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S4
RT
S4
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 14
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
DS
R4
DT
R4
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Notice that on the DS1206, pin 9 of the RS232 port can be used to power the
DS1206 or provide power to an attached serial device. See Power Arrangement for
details.
Additional programming information regarding serial ports can be found in "TIDE and
Tibbo BASIC Manual".
Flash and
EEPROM Memory
7.2.1.4
The DS1206 has 512KBytes or 1024KBytes of flash memory and 2KBytes of EEPROM
memory.
binary into.
Manual").

Visit our online store for the up-to-date list of accessories offered with the DS1206.
Model number
Description
355

DS1206-512K-00
DS1206 device with 512KBytes of flash memory
DS1206-1024K-00
DS1206 device with 1MB of flash memory
Ethernet interface
Serial ports
One RS232 port (DB9M) with 3.5 serial channels

(four inputs and three outputs)
UART capabilities

Clock frequency

Flash memory

and data
EEPROM memory

application data
DC 10-24V (12V nominal)
-5 to +70 degrees C
10-90%
60x47x30mm
Carton dimensions
125x95x52mm
Gross weight
110g
DS1202
Introduction
The DS1202 is a miniature BASIC-programmable controller designed primarily for
356
The DS1202 features a multi-channel serial port. The device has a single DB9M
The DS1202 is fully supported by TIDE software and a dedicated DS1202 platform
that covers all hardware facilities of the device (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
application. Written in Tibbo BASIC, the application is compatible with Tibbo Device
Server Toolkit software, comes with full source codes, and can be modified by the
user.
Hardware features
Superior upgrade to the DS203 devices.
Based on the EM1202 BASIC-programmable embedded module.
100BaseT auto-MDIX Ethernet port (automatic detection of "straight" and "cross"
cables).
Up to 3.5 serial channels on a single RS232 connector:
- Optional flow control;
Six LEDs:
- Green and red status LEDs on the RJ45 jack;
Supply voltage range: 10-24V (12V nominal).
network.
Also available as a EM1202EV (board without housing).
357

Platform objects:
DS1202 Connectors and Controls
Click on one of the links provided below to learn more about the DS1202:
Power arrangement
Ethernet port
Multi-channel RS232 port
Flash and EEPROM memory
Status LEDs
Setup button
358
Power 7.3.1.1
Arrangement
The DS1202 is powered through its power jack. The power jack of the DS1202
accepts "small" power connectors with 3.5mm diameter. Use APR-P0011, APRP0012, or APR-P0013 power adaptor supplied by Tibbo or similar adaptor with 12V
nominal output voltage. Adaptor current rating should be at least 500mA. On the
power jack, the ground is "on the outside", as shown on the figure below.
Ethernet
Port
7.3.1.2
Ethernet port of the DS1202 is of 10/100BaseT type.

#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
TX+
TXRX+
<No connection>
<No connection>
RX<No connection>
<No connection>
The Ethernet port of the DS1202 incorporates four LEDs (two status LEDs and two
Ethernet status LEDs). The DS1202 has another pair of status LEDs located on top
of the board. Two status LED pairs work in parallel.
Multi-Channel
7.3.1.3 RS232 Port
The DS1202 has four serial ports internally. The RS232 port of the DS1202
implements three outputs, four inputs, and one "spare" input (CD). Each of the three
outputs can be used as a TX line of a serial channel, or as a control output such as
RTS or DTR. Input lines can be used as an RX line of a serial channel, or as a control
input such as CTS or DSR. The spare input cannot work as an RX line. This input is
not used by the serial-over-IP application supplied by Tibbo and will be largely
omitted from further discussion. Your Tibbo BASIC/C application can always use this
extra input if you require it.
359

With three outputs and four inputs, the DS1202 can be said to offer 3.5 serial
outputs).
Mappi
ng
optio
n
Available signals

DS1202-RS
Miss
ing
#
2
#3
#8
#7
#6
#4
#9
line
Optio
n0
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
---
---
Optio
n1
RX/TX/CTS/RTS/
DSR/DTR + RX/tx
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n2
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n3
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
CT
S3
rts3
Optio
n4
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
RX3
TX
3
DS
R3
dtr3
Optio
n5
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n6
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/CTS/rts
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
CT
S2
rts2
Optio
n7
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/TX/DSR/dtr
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
DS
R
DT
R
DS
R2
dtr2
Optio
n8
RX/TX + RX/TX +
RX/TX + RX/tx
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n9
RX/TX/CTS/rts +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
CT
S
rts
Optio
n 10
RX/TX/DSR/dtr +
RX/TX + RX/TX
RX
TX
RX2
TX
2
RX3
TX
3
DS
R
dtr
Optio
n 11
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
CT
S4
RT
S4
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 12
RX/TX/CTS/RTS +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
CT
S
RT
S
DS
R4
DT
R4
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 13
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/CTS/RTS
RX
TX
CT
S4
RT
S4
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
Optio
n 14
RX/TX/DSR/DTR +
RX/tx/DSR/DTR
RX
TX
DS
R4
DT
R4
DS
R
DT
R
RX
4
tx4
360
Flash and
EEPROM Memory
7.3.1.4
The DS1202 has 1024KBytes of flash memory and 2KBytes of EEPROM memory.
binary into.
Manual").
the DS1202 and EM1202 platform documentation (same manual).

The DS1202 device is only available in a single configuration and can be order as
"DS1202".
Ethernet interface
Serial ports
One RS232 port (DB9M) with 3.5 serial channels

(four inputs and three outputs)
UART capabilities

Clock frequency

Flash memory

EEPROM memory

application data
DC 10-24V (12V nominal)
-5 to +70 degrees C
10-90%
60x47x30mm
Carton dimensions
125x95x52mm
Gross weight
110g
361
DS10xx
The DS10xx is a family of BASIC-programmable industrial controllers.

The DS10xx is a universal platform that is well suited for a variety of control
applications. The functionality of the device depends on a Tibbo BASIC/C application
created (loaded) by the user.
All devices of the DS10xx family share a number of common features.
Internally, each device contains two main boards: an NB10x0 network board ("NB"),
and an IB100x interface boards ("IB") that implements the I/O functionality of
devices. These boards are interconnected by an IC1000 cable. Some interface boards
also carry a second "supplementary" board ("SB"). Additionally, there are two LED
boards -- LB1000 and LB1001. The LB1000 is attached to the NB10x0, the LB1001 -to the IB100x.
At the moment, the DS10xx family includes the following devices:
DS10x0 (4 RS232 ports);
DS10x2 (4 RS232/422/485 ports);
DS10x3 (4 isolated RS232/422/485 ports);
DS10x4 (8 analog inputs, 4 analog outputs, RS232/485 port, 2 relays);
DS10x5 (8 opto-isolated inputs, 6 relays, RS232/485 port);
If none of standard DS10xx devices suit your needs, you are welcome to create your
very own controller with exactly the set of I/Os required for your project. You can
also subcontract the design and manufacturing of your custom "IB" board to Tibbo.
When used with the included waterproof cover, all devices of the DS10xx family are
dust and water-proof to IP68.
362
Platform objects:
Common Features of the DS10xx Family

This section describes all common features of the DS10xx family:
Secondary cover
DIN rail mounting
Secondary
Cover
7.4.1.1
All DS10xx devices are dust- and water-proof to IP68 when used with the properly
installed secondary cover. Diagram below shows the procedure of waterproofing any
DS10xx device. Shown on the diagram are devices with terminal blocks (DS1004,
DS1005). Other devices in the DS10xx series have DB9 connectors (see DS1000,
DS1002, DS1003). Tibbo offers a TB1000 terminal block adaptor that "converts" DB9
connector into terminal blocks. The TB1000 is compatible with the secondary cover.
363
364
DIN Rail7.4.1.2
Mounting
All DS10xx devices are supplied with the DMK1000 DIN rail mounting kit. Mounting
holes on the back of the device allow you to attach the DIN rail mounting bracket
horizontally or vertically.
DS10x0, DS10x2, DS10x3 (4 Serial Ports)
The DS10x0, DS10x2, and DS10x3 BASIC-programmable controllers offer four serial
365

ports. DS1000, DS1002, and DS1003 are based on the NB1000 network board
(Ethernet interface only). DS1010, DS1012, and DS1013 are based on the NB1010
network board (Ethernet + optional Wi-Fi + optional GPRS).
Read carefully the explanation about the type of antenna installed when
the DS1010, DS1012, and DS1013 are ordered with Wi-Fi, GPRS, or Wi-Fi
and GPRS options.
The DS1000 and DS1010 have 4 "simple" RS232 serial ports (the IB1000 interface
board is used);
The DS1002 and DS1012 have 4 non-isolated universal RS232/422/485 serial ports
(the IB1002 interface board is used);
The DS1003 and DS1013 have 4 electrically isolated RS232/422/485 serial ports
(the IB1003 interface board is used);
Follow these quick links to often needed information:
Right (network) side of the device:
- Power jack, terminals, and power regulator;
- Ethernet jack;
- Ethernet LEDs, M (mode) and R (reset) buttons;
- "Right side" LEDs;
- Buzzer control;
- Optional Wi-Fi interface (DS101x devices only);
- Optional GPRS interface (DS101x devices only).
Left (interface) side of the device:
- Pin assignment and control of serial ports;
- "Left side" LEDs.
Ordering
7.4.2.1
DS101x devices without "G", "C", or "GC" options are not being offered by Tibbo. If
you want to purchase Ethernet-only device (without any wireless options), then
366
order DS100x instead.

External Antenna
DS1010, DS1012, and DS1013 devices can be ordered with Wi-Fi, GPRS, or Wi-Fi
and GPRS options. The Wi-Fi interface works better when equipped with an
antenna. In the absence of Wi-Fi antenna, the Wi-Fi interface still works (relying on
a small "chip" antenna on the GA1000), but the operating range is reduced. The
GPRS interface can't work without the antenna at all. Therefore:
DS1010G, DS1012G, and DS1013G devices (with Wi-Fi option) will be shipped with
Wi-Fi antenna.
DS1010C, DS1012C, and DS1013C devices (with GPRS option) will be shipped with
GPRS antenna.
DS1010GC, DS1012GC, and DS1013GC devices (with Wi-Fi and GPRS options) will
be shipped with GPRS antenna. The Wi-Fi interface will rely on the internal "chip"
antenna and, therefore, will have reduced range compared to DS1010G, DS1013G,
and DS1013G devices.
Network side
DS1000, DS1002, and DS1003: NB1000 + LB1000

DS1010, DS1012, and DS1013: NB1000 + LB1000
Interface side
DS1000 and DS1010: IB1000 + LB1001

DS1002 and DS1012: IB1002 + LB1001
DS1003 and DS1013: IB1003 + LB1001
DC 10-18VDC (12VDC nominal)
10-90%
91x104x99mm
Carton dimensions
203x160x110mm
367
DS10x4 (Analog I/O)
The DS10x4 BASIC-programmable controllers feature eight A/D inputs, four D/A
outputs with both voltage and current outputs, two low-power relays, and one
RS232/485 port. The DS1004 is based on the NB1000 network board (Ethernet
interface only), and the DS1014 is based on the NB1010 network board (Ethernet +
optional Wi-Fi + optional GPRS).
the DS1014 is ordered with Wi-Fi, GPRS, or Wi-Fi and GPRS options.

- Ethernet jack;
- Buzzer control;
- Optional Wi-Fi interface (DS1014 devices only);
- Optional GPRS interface (DS1014 devices only).
- Terminal blocks and control lines;
368
- A/D converter;
- D/A converter;
- Relays;
- RS232/485 port;
- "Left side" LEDs.
Ordering
7.4.3.1
DS1014 devices without "G", "C", or "GC" options are not being offered by Tibbo. If
order DS1004 instead.
External Antenna
The DS1014 can be ordered with Wi-Fi, GPRS, or Wi-Fi and GPRS options. The Wi-Fi
interface works better when equipped with an antenna. In the absence of Wi-Fi
antenna, the Wi-Fi interface still works (relying on a small "chip" antenna on the
GA1000), but the operating range is reduced. The GPRS interface can't work without
the antenna at all. Therefore:
The DS1014G device (with Wi-Fi option) will be shipped with Wi-Fi antenna.
The DS1014C device (with GPRS option) will be shipped with GPRS antenna.
The DS1014GC device (with Wi-Fi and GPRS options) will be shipped with GPRS
antenna. The Wi-Fi interface will rely on the internal "chip" antenna and,
therefore, will have reduced range compared to the DS1014G.
Network side
DS1004: NB1000 + LB1000

DS1014: NB1000 + LB1000
Interface side
IB1004 + SB1004 + LB1001
10-90%
91x104x99mm
Carton dimensions
203x160x110mm
369

DS10x5 (Digital I/O)
The DS10x5 BASIC-programmable controllers feature eight opto-isolated digital

inputs, six high-power relays, and one RS232/485 port. The DS1005 is based on
the NB1000 network board (Ethernet interface only), and the DS1015 is based on
the NB1010 network board (Ethernet + optional Wi-Fi + optional GPRS).
the DS1015 is ordered with Wi-Fi, GPRS, or Wi-Fi and GPRS options.

- Ethernet jack;
- Buzzer control;
- Optional Wi-Fi interface (DS1015 devices only);
370
- Optional GPRS interface (DS1015 devices only).

- Terminal blocks and control lines;
- Opto-isolated inputs;
- Relays;
- RS232/485 port;
- "Left side" LEDs.
Ordering
7.4.4.1
DS1015 devices without "G", "C", or "GC" options are not being offered by Tibbo. If
order DS1005 instead.
External Antenna
The DS1015 can be ordered with Wi-Fi, GPRS, or Wi-Fi and GPRS options. The Wi-Fi
interface works better when equipped with an antenna. In the absence of Wi-Fi
antenna, the Wi-Fi interface still works (relying on a small "chip" antenna on the
GA1000), but the operating range is reduced. The GPRS interface can't work without
the antenna at all. Therefore:
The DS1015G device (with Wi-Fi option) will be shipped with Wi-Fi antenna.
The DS1015C device (with GPRS option) will be shipped with GPRS antenna.
The DS1015GC device (with Wi-Fi and GPRS options) will be shipped with GPRS
antenna. The Wi-Fi interface will rely on the internal "chip" antenna and,
therefore, will have reduced range compared to the DS1015G.
Network side
DS1005: NB1000 + LB1000

DS1015: NB1000 + LB1000
Interface side
IB1005 + SB1005 + LB1001
10-90%
91x104x99mm
371

Carton dimensions
203x160x110mm
Companion Products
The following companion products are currently being offered by Tibbo:
GA1000 (Wi-Fi add-on module)
RJ203 (jack/magnetics module)
GA1000
Introduction
The GA1000 Wi-Fi add-on module further expands the scope of potential
applications for Tibbo BASIC/C-programmable modules by adding 802.11b/g
communications capability to the already powerful hardware mix. The GA1000 can
be used with these Tibbo devices: EM1000, EM1202, EM1206, EM500.
The module utilizes an SPI interface and only requires five GPIOs to control. This
can be reduced to four if two NAND gates are used to generate reset signal. On the
EM500, the number is even down to three lines! For more information, see
Connecting GA1000 to Tibbo Devices.
The GA1000 is fully supported by TIDE software (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC
Manual", wln. object). For convenient testing and evaluation Tibbo offers
EM1206EV, EM1000TEV and EM1000EV development systems.
Please note that the GA1000 is a slave device and cannot be used on its own. This
add-on will only work together a BASIC-programmable Tibbo module.
Hardware features
Superior upgrade to the now obsolete WA1000 module.
Implements 802.11b/g Wi-Fi standard.
Compatible with EM1000, EM1202, EM1206, and EM500 modules.
Requires 3-5 GPIO lines to control.
Chip antenna onboard, coaxial connector for external antenna.
Red status LED for scan/link indication.
Max. power: 280 mA (max) @ 3.3V.
Companion Products
372
I/O pin assignment

Pin #
Functio
n
Description
GND
System ground.
VCC
Positive power input, 3.3V nominal, +/- 5%.
CS
Chip select, active LOW (input*).
N.C.
No connection.
DI
SPI port, data in (input*, must be connected to DO of Tibbo

module).
N.C.
No connection.
RST
Reset, active LOW (input*).
N.C.
No connection.
DO
SPI port, data out (output*, must be connected to DI of
373

Tibbo module).
10
CLK
SPI port, clock (input*).
* Of the GA1000.
Connecting GA1000 to Tibbo Devices

GA1000 interface
The GA1000 communicates with Tibbo devices through an SPI interface. Your device
will control the GA1000 through five GPIO lines:
CS -- SPI bus, chip select (active low);
CLK -- SPI bus, clock;
DI -- SPI bus, data in (must be connected to the GA1000's DO);
DO -- SPI bus, data out (must be connected to the GA1000's DI);
RST -- reset (active low). This line can be eliminated -- see below for details.
On the EM1000, EM1202, and EM1206, do not forget to configure CS, CLK,
DO, and RST as outputs. DI must be configured as input. The wln. object
won't do this automatically. GPIO configuration is not necessary on the
EM500, whose lines are bidirectional.
Providing hardware reset

The wln. object directly controls CS, CLK, DI, and DO lines. Your application,
however, must take care of the proper hardware reset for the GA1000. There are
two methods for doing this:
Use a dedicated GPIO line to act as the RST line of the GA1000 interface (shown
on diagram A below).
Use 2 NAND gates to combine CS and CLK signals and produce the reset signal for
the GA1000 (shown on diagram B). This approach takes advantage of the fact
that during SPI communications, CLK line will never be LOW while the CS line is
HIGH. Schematic diagram on figure B generates reset when CS=HIGH and
CLK=LOW. This way you save one GPIO line of your programmable module.
Companion Products
374
Tibbo devices differ in whether the CS, CLK, DI, and DO lines are remappable. On
the EM1000, EM1202, and EM1206, you can choose any set of GPIOs to control the
GA1000. On the EM500 where remapping isn't provided, you just have to use
"prescribed" GPIO lines.
Special case -- the EM500
Diagram C shows the recommended way of connecting the GA1000 to the EM500
module. GPIO lines are a precious commodity on the EM500 -- there are only eight
of them available. As seen on the diagram C, you can get away with using only
three lines to control the GA1000 (against the standard five lines). One line is saved
by producing the reset out of CS and CLK lines. The second line is saved because
EM500's bidirectional GPIOs allow interconnecting DI and DO. The EM500 does not
allow remapping of GA1000 lines, so GPIO line assignment shown below cannot be
changed.
Status LED
The GA1000 has a single red status LED:
During scanning (see wln.scan*), the LED blinks.
When the GA1000 is associated with an access point (see wln.associate*), the
375

LED is ON.
When the GA1000 is in ad-hoc mode and has another peer connected to it, the
LED is ON as well.
In all other cases, the LED is off.
*See "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual", .wln object documentation.
Max.
42.1
Module length.
Max.
19.1
Module width.
Max.
6.7
Module height.
Min.
4.0
Pin length.
Min
11.7
Horizontal cutout dimension.
Min.
4.5
Vertical cutout dimension.
d
1
Aver
.
4.5
Horizontal distance from the centerline of the module to the

center of the mounting hole.
Aver
35.0
Vertical distance from the edge of the board to the center
Companion Products
376
of the mounting hole.
d
3
Min.
2.1
d
4
Aver
.
2.5
Vertical distance from the edge of the board to the center

of the first row of pins of the connector
Aver
.
2.54
Pin pitch
contained herein.

The GA1000 device is only available in a single configuration and can be order as
"GA1000".
A set consisting of the EM1000 and GA1000 modules can also be ordered using the
"EM1000G" ordering code (see Specifications and Ordering Info for the EM1000). The
GA1000 also works with EM1202, EM1206, and EM500 devices.
Specifications
Wireless interface
802.11b/g
Interface type
SPI

voltage (VCC pin)
DC 3.3V, +/- 5%

pin)
Post-reset, before boot: ~65mA;

Fully functional, no data transmission: ~200mA;
During data transmission: ~280mA.
Operating relative
humidity
10-90%
(excl. leads)
42x19x6.7mm
Packaging
Tray, 30 modules/tray.
377
RJ203 Jack/Magnetics Module

Patent pending
The RJ203 is an "Ethernet front-end" module that contains 10/100BaseT Ethernet

magnetics and a standard RJ45 jack. Module's magnetics are designed to work with
Davicom's DM9000B Ethernet controller.
Unique patent-pending design of the module minimizes module's footprint and allows
you to put other components required on your host board under the RJ203, thus
saving valuable host board space. Moreover, translucent housing of the RJ203's face
enables you to place status LEDs directly on the host board and have these LEDs
visible through the front face of the RJ203.
There are two ways in which you can utilize the RJ203 in your design:
You can interface the RJ203 to the DM9000B IC located, together with the CPU
and other necessary components, directly on your host PCB.
Alternatively, you can use the RJ203 in combination with the EM203 Ethernet-toserial module (documented in the "Serial-over-IP Solutions Manual") or EM1206
BASIC/C-programmable Ethernet module. These modules fit right "under" the
RJ203, thus taking (virtually) no additional space on the host PCB.
Interface Pads
The RJ203 has a single row or interface pins.
#1
RX+
Output
#2
RX-
Output
#3
AVCC
Input
#4
#5
-----
-----

input signal pair
input signal pair
"Clean" 1.8V power output for magnetics
circuitry
-----
Companion Products
#6
#7
GND
TX+
Input
#8
TX-
Input
378
Ground
output signal pair
output signal pair
Interfacing the RJ203 to the DM9000B

The RJ203 module interfaces directly to the DAVICOM's DM9000B Ethernet
controller. The following table details the interconnection between the DM9000A and
the interface pads of the RJ203:
DM9000B
RX+ (#3)
RX- (#4)
TX+ (#7)
TX- (#8)
RXVDD (#2), TXVDD (#9)
RJ203
RX+ (#1)
RX- (#2)
TX+ (#7)
TX- (#8)
AVCC (#3)
Don't forget to connect grounds too!

Additional passive components, such as resistors and capacitors must also be
placed near the DM9000B and connected to RX and TX lines. For detailed
information see the DM9000B datasheet.
To take full advantage of the unique space-saving design of the RJ203, place the
DM9000B (and/or any other components as you see fit) under the module. The
housing of the module has a substantial recess area under the RJ45 jack. This area
can be utilized to accommodate various board components. Moreover, the housing
of the RJ203 is made of a translucent material, so you can also place necessary
status LEDs within the recess area and in the proximity to the front wall of the
RJ203. This way, your status LEDs will be visible through the translucent front face
of the RJ203. Four to six LEDs can easily fit along that front wall.
379
Using the RJ203 With the EM203 and Other Modules
The RJ203 can also be used in combination with the EM203 Ethernet-to-serial
module (documented in the "Serial-over-IP Solutions Manual") or EM1206 BASIC/Cprogrammable Ethernet module.
Connector pins of the EM203 and EM1206 are designed to mate with interface pads
of the RJ203. The EM203 (EM1206) fits "under" the RJ203 and partially within the
recess area provided by the RJ203. This recess area is formed by a translucent
housing of the RJ203. When the EM203 (EM1206) is combined with the RJ203, the
status LEDs of the EM203 (EM1206) become positioned close to the translucent
front wall of the RJ203 and remain visible through the front face of the RJ203.
Detailed mechanical information can be found in the Mechanical Dimensions: RJ203
+EM203 and Mechanical Dimensions: RJ230+EM1206 topic.
Companion Products
380
Mechanical Dimensions: RJ203
L
W
H
l
w
1
w
2
M
t1
t2
t3
p
s1
s2
s3
h1
Max
.
Max
.
Max
.
Aver
.
Max
.
Max
.
Min.
Aver
.
Aver
.
Aver
.
Aver
.
Aver
.
Aver
.
Aver
.
Aver
.
31.0 Length
20.0 Width
15.5 Height
5.5
Clearance between the installation surface and the bottom of the

RJ203's board
19.0 Width at the face excluding mounting stands
18.1 Board width
1.9
2.5
Mounting stand and tail height

Mounting stand diameter
1.5
Solder tail width
0.25 Solder tail thickness

1.27 Connector pad pitch
28.1 Distance from device face to the pad row
17.4 Distance from the second pad row to the vertical centerline of
solder tails
21.4 Distance from the second pad row to the vertical centerline of
mounting stands
17.5 Distance between the horizontal centerlines of mounting stands
381

h2 Aver 18.5 Distance between the horizontal centerlines of solder tails
.
C Min. 4.4 Clearance from the installation surface to the top wall of the recess
area of the housing
contained herein.
Mechanical Dimensions: RJ203+EM203
L
W
H
l
w1
w2
M
t1
Max.
Max.
Max.
Min.
Max.
Max.
Min.
Aver
.
t2 Aver
.
t3 Aver
.
p Aver
.
s1 Aver
31.0
20.0
15.5
4.0
19.0
18.1
1.9
2.5
Length
Width
Height
Connector pin length
Width at the face excluding mounting stands
Board width
1.5
Solder tail width

1.27 Connector pin pitch
29.7 Distance from the face to the connector pins
Companion Products
.
s2 Aver
.
s3 Aver
.
h1 Aver
.
h2 Aver
.
382
19.0 Distance from connector pins to the vertical centerline of solder

tails
23.0 Distance from connector pins to the vertical centerline of
mounting stands
18.5 Distance between the horizontal centerlines of solder tails
contained herein.
Mechanical Dimensions: RJ203+EM1206
Max
.
W Max
.
H Max
.
l
Min.
w Max
1 .
w Max
2 .
M Min.
t1 Aver
34.4 Length
20.0 Width
15.5 Height
4.0 Connector pin length
19.0 Width at the face excluding mounting stands
18.1 Board width
1.9
2.5

383

.
t2 Aver
.
t3 Aver
.
p Aver
.
s1 Aver
.
s2 Aver
.
s3 Aver
.
s4 Aver
.
h1 Aver
.
h2 Aver
.
1.5
Solder tail width

1.27 Connector pin pitch
33.1 Distance from the face to the connector pins of the main connector
22.2 Distance from the connector pins of the main connector to the
vertical centerline of solder tails
5
vertical centerline of mounting stands
5
connector pins of the additional connector
18.5 Distance between the horizontal centerlines of solder tails
contained herein.

The RJ203 device is only available in a single configuration and can be order as
"RJ203".
The RJ203 can also be ordered in combination with the EM203 (documented in the
"Serial-over-IP Solutions Manual") or EM1206 module. To receive the RJ203 and
EM203 pre-assembled together, please specify "RJ203+EM203" on your order. To
receive the RJ203 and EM1206 pre-assembled together, please specify "RJ203
+EM1206" on your order.
Specifications
Jack type
Standard RJ45 Ethernet jack
Magnetics type
10/100BaseT, designed to work with DAVICOM

DM9000B Ethernet controller
Operating relative
humidity
10-90%
(excl. leads)
31.0x20.0x15.5 mm
Packaging
RJ203 devices and RJ203+EM1206 module

combination: tray, 30 modules/tray
RJ203+EM203 module combination: tube, 10
modules/tube
Companion Products
384
Accessories
The following accessories are currently being offered by Tibbo:
WAS-P0004(B) DS-to-device serial cable
WAS-P0005(B) DS-to-PC serial cable
WAS-1499 "straight" Ethernet cable (DS-to-hub cable)
WAS-1498 "crossover" Ethernet cable (DS-to-device cable)
12VDC Power Adaptors
TB100 Terminal Block Adaptor
TB1004 Test Board
TB1005 Test Board
WAS-P0004(B) DS-to-Device Serial Cable

WAS-P0004(B) is a female-male serial cable that can be used to connect Tibbo
Device Server or Board to the serial port of your device.
DB9M (Male)
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
DB9F (Female)
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
The cable is of blue color, approximately 1.5m long.
WAS-P0005(B) DS-to-PC Serial Cable

WAS-P0005(B) is a female-female serial cable that can be used to connect Tibbo
Device Server or Evaluation Board to the COM port of your PC.
DB9F (Female)
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
DB9F (Female)
#3
#2
#6
#5
#4
#8
#7
The cable is of green color, approximately 1.5m long.
385
WAS-1499 'Straight' Ethernet Cable

WAS-1499 can be used to connect Tibbo Device Server or Evaluation Board to an
Ethernet hub.
Side A
#1 (pair 1)
#2 (pair 1)
#3 (pair 2)
#6 (pair 2)
Side B
#1
#2
#3
#6
The cable is of blue color, approximately 1.5m long.
WAS-1498 'Crossover' Ethernet Cable

WAS-1498 can be used to connect Tibbo Device Server or Evaluation Board directly
to some other Ethernet device (i.e. Ethernet port of the PC). This is a so called
"crossover" cable that can interconnect two Ethernet devices without a hub.
Side A
#1 (pair 1)
#2 (pair 1)
#3 (pair 2)
#6 (pair 2)
Side B
#3
#6
#1
#2
The cable is of green color, approximately 1.5m long.
12VDC Power Adaptors

The following adaptor models are now offered:
Products
EM120/200-EV
EM1000-EV
EM1000-TEV
DS1000 family
DS1202, DS1206,
DS1026N,
EM1202EV
Specifications
12VDC/0.5A,
non-switching,
"large" connector
(5.5mm)
12VDC/1A,
switching,
"small" connector
(3.5mm)
12VDC/0.5A,
switching,
"small" connector
(3.5mm)
US
Europe
UK
APR1014
APR1015A
APR1018A
APRP0008
APRP0009
APRP0010
APRP0011
APRP0012
APRP0013

The TB100 Terminal Block Adaptor attaches to the DB9M connector. The TB100
provides a convenient way of wiring RS422 and RS485 lines to the serial port of a
Tibbo device. The wires are inserted into the terminal contacts and the terminals
are then tightened using a screwdriver.
Accessories
386
The following table details terminal block contact functions in RS232, RS422, and
RS485 modes of operation. The table assumes that the TB100 is connected to a
Tibbo device with universal serial port that has DB9M connector.
#2
#7
#8
#9
#10
#6
#1
#3
#4
RS232
<No connection>
RX (input)
TX (output)
DTR (output)
Ground
DSR (input)
RTS (output)
CTS (input)
<No connection>
RS422
RTS- (output)
RX- (input)
TX+ (output)
TX- (output)
Ground
RX+ (input)
RTS+ (output)
CTS+ (input)
CTS- (input)
RS485
<No connection>
RX- (input)
TX+ (output)
TX- (output)
Ground
RX+ (input)
<No connection>
<No connection>
<No connection>
Although Tibbo devices support half-duplex RS485 communications, TX and RX lines

remain independent on these devices even in the RS485 mode. In order to arrange a
two-wire half-duplex RS485 bus you need to externally connect RX+ to TX+ and RXto TX-. On the TB100 this is conveniently done by closing (putting to ON position)
two switches- SW1 and SW2. These are located on the back of the TB100.
Additionally, the TB100 provides termination circuits typically needed at the end of
long RS422 or RS485 lines. There are four identical terminators that can be switched
on and off individually using four switches located on the back of the TB100. The
following table details which line pairs the terminators can be connected to:
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
CTS+/CTSRTS+/RTSRX+/RXTX+/TX-
Schematic diagram for one of the terminators is shown on figure below.
If you are using RS485 mode (SW1 and SW2 are closed) and you want to terminate
the RS485 bus, then you only need to close either SW5 or SW6. Having both
switches closed will effectively add two termination circuits to the same bus!
387
The TB1000 terminal block adaptor is designed to be used with DS1000, DS1002,
and DS1003 devices (or IB1000, IB1002, and IB1003 boards). This adaptor
"converts" DB9 connectors of the DS1000, DS1002, and DS1003 into 9-terminal
blocks of "spring clamp" type. These are convenient for attaching wires, which is
very useful for industrial installations.
Each terminal of the terminal block connects directly to a pin on the DB9 connector.
Pin numbers on DB9 connectors and terminal blocks match exactly. Therefore,
terminal assignment on each terminal block is as follows:
Terminal #
RS422 mode
RS485 mode
RS232 mode
---
RTS- (output)
---
RX (input)
RX- (input)
RX- (input)
TX (output)
TX+ (output)
TX+ (output)
DTR (output)
TX- (output)
TX- (output)
SYSTEM GROUND
SYSTEM GROUND
SYSTEM GROUND
DSR (input)
RX+ (input)
RX+ (input)
RTS (output)
RTS+ (output)
---
CTS (input)
CTS+ (input)
---
---
CTS- (input)
---
DS1002 and DS1003 devices have universal serial ports that can additionally work in
RS422 and RS485 modes. Proper signal termination may be required when longer
cables are used in these modes. The TB1000 have four switch blocks, one for each
port. Each switch block includes four switches. When closed, each switch connects
a termination circuit between the "+" and "-" signals in a signal pair:
Accessories
Switch # within
the block
Signal pair
CTS+/CTS-
RTS+/RTS-
RX+/RX-
TX+/TX-
388
The TB1000 can be additionally secured on the DS10xx device using four screws
(included). This terminal block adaptor is also compatible with the "secondary
cover", also known as "waterproof cover".
TB1004 Test Board
The TB1004 test board is provided for the convenience of evaluating the DS1004
controller (IB1004 + SB1004 boards). The board is basically a loopback, feeding D/A
outputs into A/D inputs of the DS1004. Schematic diagram of the test board's
connections is shown below:
389
Voltage outputs of D/A channels 1-4 are connected directly to A/D inputs 1-4, and
also to four red LEDs 1-4. The brightness of these LEDs is proportional to the
voltage on D/A outputs. Obviously, LEDs will only work for positive output voltages
and will stay off for negative voltages. Thus, LEDs provide indication only for 1/2 of
the D/As' output range.
Current outputs of D/A channels are not used at all and can't be tested with the
TB1004 board.
A/D inputs 4-8 are wired into the circuit through four adjustable resistors R1-4.
Voltage for these resistors comes from the D/A output 4. Therefore, the voltages on
central taps of R1-4 are a fraction of the current output of D/A 4.
Accessories
390
TB1005 Test Board
The TB1005 test board is provided for the convenience of evaluating the DS1005
controller (IB1005 + SB1005 boards). The board is basically a loopback, feeding
relay outputs into sensor inputs of the DS1004. Schematic diagram of the test
board's connections is shown below:
391
Relays 1-6 are wired into sensor inputs 1-6. They commutate "Vin", which is the
voltage from the power source for the DS1005. When a relay is activated, this
voltage is applied to a corresponding sensor input.
There are eight sensor inputs but only six relays. Remaining sensor inputs 7 and 8
are controlled by two buttons which play the same role as the relays. Push a button
and a corresponding sensor input is triggered.

Status LEDs
BASIC-programmable devices supplied by Tibbo have a pair of green and red status
LEDs and/or control lines for connecting such LEDs externally. Particular status LED
arrangement is product-specific, but these LEDs and/or their control lines are
always implemented in one way or another.
Status LEDs have multiple functions:
When the device is in the serial upgrade mode, these LEDs indicate the status of
firmware upload process.
When the device is under TiOS firmware control and Tibbo BASIC/C application is
not running, these LEDs show current Tibbo BASIC/C application status.
392
When the Tibbo BASIC/C application is running, status LEDs are under the control
of the .pat object (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual").
The following table summarizes predefined status LED blinking (flashing) patterns:
Serial upgrade mode

Green LED blinks slowly
File upload completed successfully.
One long and one short

"blink" of red LED
Communications error encountered during

the serial file transfer.
One long and two short

"blinks" of red LED
FLASH memory failure.
Normal operation, Tibbo BASIC/C application not running

Fast-blinking GRGRGR...
pattern
TiOS firmware not loaded or corrupted.
Fast-blinking BBBB...
pattern (B= red and green
together)
Tibbo BASIC/C application loaded but

cannot run due to insufficient variable
(RAM) memory
Fast-blinking G-G-G-...
pattern
Tibbo BASIC/C application loaded but not

running.
Fast-blinking R-R-R-...
pattern
Tibbo BASIC/C application not loaded or

corrupted.
Ethernet status LEDs (when there are two of them)

Many Tibbo devices also have a pair of green and yellow Ethernet status LEDs
and/or control lines for connecting such LEDs externally.
Ethernet status LEDs indicate the following:
Link/Data LED (green) is turned on when "live" Ethernet cable is plugged into the
device. The LED blinks whenever an Ethernet packet is received.
100BaseT LED (yellow) is turned on when the device links with the hub at 100Mb.
The LED is off when the link is established at 10Mb.
The EM500 and EM500EV devices do not have Ethernet status LEDs and the
function of Ethernet state indication is performed by the status LEDs (status LED
control lines) of these devices. These so-called dual-function status LEDs indicate
the device state through familiar blinking (flashing) patterns, while LED brightness
indicates the physical link state.
When "live" Ethernet cable is not plugged into the device, flashing patterns
displayed by the status LEDs are "dimmed". That is, LEDs turn on at around 20% of
their nominal brightness. When a "live" Ethernet cable is plugged into the device,
flashing patterns are displayed at full brightness.
With this method of Ethernet status indication, there is no way to determine
whether the link is established at 10 or 100Mb. This aspect, however, is of little
importance these days because the majority of network hubs on the market are of
the 100BaseT type.
Single Ethernet status LED
393

Some Tibbo devices only have a single Ethernet LED of yellow color. This LED is
turned on when "live" Ethernet cable is plugged into the device. On some devices,
the LED blinks whenever an Ethernet packet is received.
Appendix 2: Setup (MD) Button (Line)

Tibbo boards* and external controllers have a button called "setup" or "MD" button
("MD" abbreviation stands for "mode"). Tibbo modules have an MD pin for connecting
an external button.
The setup button (line) has three functions:
When a Tibbo BASIC/C application is running, it can use the button for its own
purposes (see "TIDE and Tibbo BASIC Manual", button. object).
When the device is password-protected, keeping the button pressed while
accessing the device from TIDE allows to bypass the password. This is the way to
reset the password on the device.
When the device is powered up (exits from the hardware reset) with the button
pressed (line pulled low), it enters a firmware upgrade mode in which new TiOS
firmware, possibly with compiled Tibbo BASIC/C application attached, can be
uploaded into the device. If the device is powered up with the setup button not
pressed (line not pulled low), the device starts the execution of the TiOS firmware
(if loaded).
* This only applies to boards that carry a Tibbo module or directly incorporate
BASIC-programmable hardware (such as the T1000 ASIC).
Update history
07SEP2016
Updated test project links for Tibbits ##13, 14, 16, 17, 26, 28, 29, 30, 31, 35, 36,
40, 41, 42, 57.
Added info on the SIM card holder location for GPRS Tibbit (#47).
31AUG2016
DocumentedTibbit #57 (FPGA Tibbit).
04JUL2016
Documented new TPP2(G2) and TPP3(G2) boards.
27APR2015
Documented Tibbit #26 (IR command processor).
05APR2015
Documented the LTPP3 board.
10FEB2015
Documented the H2 Tibbit form factor.
Update history
394
16JAN2015
Documented the EM1001 board.
18NOV2014
Documented Tibbits #25, #38, #39, #40, #41, #42.
08MAY2014
Documented Tibbits #16, #17, and #31.
12MAR2014
Updated documentation for the following Tibbits: #12, #13, #14, #28, #29, #30,
#35, #36.
Revealed these upcoming Tibbits: #25, #31, #38, #39, #40, #41, #42.
08NOV2013
Corrections made to the Tibbo Project System (TPS) documentation (notably,
there are several new diagrams).
01NOV2013
Documented Tibbo Project System (TPS).
01SEP2012 release
Documented DS110x devices.
06FEB2012 release
Documented the NB1010 board.
Expanded DS10xx documentation to include devices based on the NB1010.
Documented TB1000, TB1004, and TB1005 adaptors.
Updated EM500EV documentation in connection with the release of the new IB1
(Wi-Fi/flash) board.
Corrected Ethernet Port Lines topic in EM1206 documentation to note correct
voltage (1.8V instead of 2.5V).
Updated the ordering info for most products.
30MAY2011 release
Expanded and corrected GA1000 documentation:
- Many small corrections throughout;
- Correction in I/O Pin Assignment and Pin Functions (of the GA1000): DI and DO
pins were shown incorrectly (swapped);
- One new Connecting GA1000 to Tibbo Devices topic.
Expanded and corrected EM500 documentation:
- Many small corrections throughout;
395

- Flash and EEPROM Memory topic now provides information on connecting external
flash IC for fd. object.
- I/O Pin Assignment and Pin Functions contains information about attaching
external flash IC and GA1000.
25MAY2011 release
Corrected a part number in EM1206 Ordering Info and Specifications.
16MAY2011 release
Edited EM500 manual: provided details on how an external flash IC can be
connected to the EM500.
21MAR2011 release
Removed all references to WA1000. This legacy module is no longer supported.
8MAR2011 release
Replaced references to obsolete WA1000 with GA1000, updated part numbers and
links.
16FEB2011 release
Updated list of power adaptors.
14FEB2011 release
Corrected typographical error in PSU part numbers (APR instead of ARP)
04JAN2011 release
Updated image on EM1000TEV topic to reflect use of GA1000 component.
03DEC2010 release
Added pin diameter for EM500, EM1206, EM1202, EM200, EM1000
20JUL2010 release
Documented EM500EV.
Reworked Appendix1: Status LEDs topic.
Reworked Appendix2: Setup Button (MD line) topic, also renamed it to "Setup
(MD) Button (Line)".
-----22JUN2010 release
Corrected various documentation errors, including incorrect model numbers in
DS1000, DS1002, DS1003 (4 Serial Ports) topic.
------
Update history
396
17JUN2010 release
Clarified and expanded External LED Control topic for NB1000.
Fixed incorrect reference to Winstar LCD model number (replaced WG12864F with
WG12864A)
Fixed GA1000 max. power consumption.
Fixed lines 6 and 7 in EM1206 I/O Pin Assignment and Pin Functions
Updated Module Comparison Table.
Documented EM500.
-----01FEB2010 release
Updated NB10x0 and IB100x Boards section (new IB1004 + SB1004, IB1005 +
SB1005 devices). Almost every pre-existing topic has also been edited.
Updated DS10xx Family section -- again, almost every topic has been edited.
Documented TB1000, TB1004, and TB1005 accessories.
-----29JUL2009 release
Documented the following products: EM1206, EM1206EV, GA1000, DS1206,
DS1206N, DS1202, and EM1202EV.
Edited cover pages for EM1000 and EM1202 products.
Edited Ordering Info and Specifications for EM1000 and EM1202 devices.
Created Appendix 1: Status LEDs and Appendix 2: Setup Button (MD line) topics,
added links to these new topics from each product's manual.
Edited I/O Pin Assignment and Pin Functions topics of EM1000 and EM1202
modules.
-----Initial release
Revamped DS1000 description. It now includes DS1001 and DS1002 devices.
Content is totally new -- the manual simply refers to the NB1000 and IB1000-2
docs.
Documented IB1004 and DS1004 devices.
Documented IB1005 and DS1005 devices.
The Programmable Hardware Manual is a spin-off of the Tibbo Document System
Manual. Original split was performed on 09JUN2008.
397
Index
-Ccable
crossover Ethernet
385
serial
384
straight Ethernet
385
crossover Ethernet cable
385
-DDS202
348, 354
-EEM1000
3
EM120/200-EV
EM1202
3
EM1206
3
EM200
3, 68
EM500
3
173
-Ppower adaptor
385
-Rrj203
377
-Sserial cable
384

Tibbo Hardware Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Tibbo Hardware Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Tibbo Programmable Hardware Manual

Copyright Tibbo Technology 2000-2016

Programmable Hardware Manual (PHM)

Mechanical Dim ensions ............................................................................................................................................................... 66

I/O Pin Assignm ent and Pin

NB10x0 and IB100x

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

Programmable Hardware Manual (PHM)

DS1206N Hardw are

EM1202EV Hardw are

Wireless Add-on Connector

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

Tibbo Project System (TPS)

The TPS: General

Tibbit Form Factors & Colors

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

Programmable Hardware Manual (PHM)

#09, M1S: Low -pow er 5V Supply,

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

Tiles, Sockets, Connectors,..........................................................................................................................................................

Ordering Info ................................................................................................................................... 330

DS110x Connectors and...............................................................................................................................................................

DS1206 Connectors and...............................................................................................................................................................

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

Programmable Hardware Manual (PHM)

DS1202 Connectors and...............................................................................................................................................................

Com m on Features of the

I/O Pin Assignm ent and...............................................................................................................................................................

Appendix 1: Status LEDs

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

Appendix 2: Setup (MD) Button

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

Programmable Hardware Manual (PHM)

This Manual has the following sections:

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

importation, advertisement, resale, or use of any of its PRODUCT or PRODUCT

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

Programmable Hardware Manual (PHM)

Module Comparison Table

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

via available Tibbo BASIC applcation

Programmable Hardware Manual (PHM)

YES, through the use of available serialover-IP Tibbo BASIC application

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

EXTERNAL, requires the GA1000 Wi-Fi addon module

128KB, for SoI or Tibbo

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

512KB or 1024KB, for TiOS firmware,

Programmable Hardware Manual (PHM)

2048 bytes, used by SoI

YES, can take all free space in the flash

2048 bytes, 2042 bytes available to store

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

NO, but you can

2000-2016 Tibbo Technology Inc.

NO, but you

Programmable Hardware Manual (PHM)

NO, but you can

YES, supports several models of graphical

NO, but you can

YES, up to 64 keys depending on the

YES, programmable square wave output